Faculty of Science and Mathematics Faculty Handbook 1994 · Volume 2 -Volume 3 -Volume 4 -Volume 5...

SER.IAL

10

"---.---'~-'~'-- ... ~

Faculty of Science and Mathematics

Volume 14

The University o/Newcastle


THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE

New South Wales, AuatraUa

Location Address _ University Drtve. Callaghan

Postal Address

Telephone

Te1eK

_ The University of Newcastle NSW 2308

_ (049) 21.5000

_ AA28194 - library

_ AA28618 - Bursar

_ AA28784 - TUNRA (The University of Newcastle Research Associates Umited)

Facsimile _ (049) 21.6922

Hrurs of Business _ Mondays to Fridays excepting public hoUdays 9amto5pm

The Unlvenlty of Newcastle Calendar conslate of the followlna: volumes:

Volume 1 -Volume 2 -Volume 3 -Volume 4 -Volume 5 -Volume 6 -Volume 7 -VolumeS -Volume 9 -

Legislation

University Bodies and Staff

Faculty of Architecture Handbook

Faculty of Art. Destgn and Commwrlcation Handbook

Faculty of Arts Handbook

Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook

Faculty of Education Handbook

Faculty of Engineering Handbook

Faculty of Health Sciences Handbook

Volume 10 _ Faculty of law Handbook

Volume 11 _ Faculty of Medicine Handbook

Volume 12 _ Faculty of Music Handbook

Volume 13 _ Faculty of Nursing Handbook

Volume 14 _ Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook

Volume }5 _ Faculty of Social Science Handbook

Also available are the Undergraduate Guides

1his Volume is intended as a reference handbook for students enrolling in courses conducted by the Faculty of Science and Mathematics ..

© 111e University of Newcastle 1993

ISSN 1034 - 4489

111e colour band Topaz BCC4 on the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelors of Science of this University. 'Ihe colour band Amethyst BCC28 on the cover is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelor of Mathematics of this University.

'Ihe infonnation in this Handbook ts correct as at 22 September 1993.

Recommended Price _ Five dollars and filty cents plus postage.

Designed by _ Marie-T Wlsniowski. Medical Communication Unit

'lYpeset by _ Jan Spurr. Office of the University Secretary

Printed by _ The Pot Still Press Pty Ltd. Artannon. Sydney

section one

section two

section three

section/our

section five

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

Faculty Staff

Faculty Information • ----=--------~ .

Undergraduate Degree/Diploma Rules

Undergraduate Diploma/Degrees offered in the Faculty

General Rules

Combined Degree Course Rules

Bachelor of Applied Science Environmental Assessment and Management

Bachelor of Environmental Science

Bachelor of Science

Bachelor of ScIence (Aviation)

Bachelor of Mathematics

Combined Degree Courses

Bachelor of ScIence (Psychology)

Diploma In Aviation ScIence

15

15

18

18

18

23

30

33

33

38

40

~A~p~p~ro~v~e~d~S~u~b~je~c~t~s ____________ ~ ....

Undergraduate Degree Subject =D~e~s~c~ri~p~ti~o~n=s ____________________ ~ .... Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries

Applied Science and Technology

Aviation

BiolOgical Sciences

ChemIstry

Environmental Science

55

56

61

71

77

82

section six

section seven

section eight

section nine

Geography

Geology

Mathematics

Physics

Psychology

Computer Science

Information Science

Philosophy: Scientific Method

Statistics

Recommended Programs

raduate ree Rules

Bachelor of Science (Honours)

Bachelor of Science Aviation (Honours)

Bachelor of Applted Science (Environmental Assessment and Management)

Bachelor of Environmental Science (Honours)

Bachelor of Mathematics (Honours)

Graduate Dtploma In Environmental Studies

Graduate Diploma tn Mathematical Studies

Graduate Diploma in Science

Master of Environmental Studies

Master of Mathematics

Master of Psychology (ClInlcal)/Master of Psychology (Educational)

Master of Science

Master of Scientific Studies

Postgraduate Degree Subject Descriptions

Numbers

85

89

93

107

III

117

120

121

122

135

138

140

142

144

146

148

148

150

152

152

153

154

I I

section ten General Information

Principal Dates 1994

Advice and Infonnation

Enrolment and Re-enrolment

Leave of Absence

Attendance at Classes

General Conduct

Examinations

Statements of Academic Record

Unsatisfactory Progress - Rules

Charges

Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HEes)

Loans

Refund of Charges

Campus Traffic and Parldng

Miscellaneous Services

Banking Cashier

Chaplaincy Service

Communtty Programs

Convocatton

Co-op Bookshop

Lost Property

Noticeboards

Post Office

Public Transport

Student Insurance Cover

University Computing Services

University Libraries

U

fii

v

v

v

v

vi!!

vii!

x x xi

xi

xi

xii

xit

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii

xii

xi!!

xi!!

xiv

Dean's Foreword

The Faculty of Science and Mathematicscomprtses the Departments of Aviation. Applied Science and Technology. Biological Sciences. ChemiStry. Geography. Geology. Mathematics. PhYSiCS and Psychology.

Undergraduate Degrees handled by the Facultyinclu«":ie the Bachelor of Science. Bachelor of Science (Aviation). Bachelor of Science (Psychology). Bachelor of Mathematics. Bachelor of Environmental Science and a number of combined degrees with other Faculties Including Law and Englneertng.

This Handbook provides delans relating to these degrees.

Students enrolled In a Science or Mathematics degree should be aware that they can apply to take subjects In Computer Science (offered within the Faculty of Engineering). Subjects from Statistics. Infonnatlon Science and a number of other disciplines can be pursued withtn the various degree programs. In the Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Mathematics degrees. students may take a sequence of subjects from outside the Faculty. thus combining expertise In bastc science and/or mathematics with a wide range of elective areas such as languages and other humanities. accountancy. management. computing and engineering.

Those students entertng university for the first time will find the system of Instruction vastly different from that tn secondary schools. The responslbUtty Is placed on the student to extract the maximum benefit from the course. University staff wUllecture to you and durtng that time you are expected to make notes about the material being presented. Some students respond by bying to take down the lecture verbatim but without understanding, others listen and make notes in outltne form. copytng down quotations or blackboard material, while a mlnortty. overwhelmed by the volume and complexity of the subject matter, simply contemplate their next social engagement, to their own disadvantage. Two Issues will be Important for your ultimate success. The first is the development of an efficient note taking system and in this you should seek the assistance of the Student Counselltng Unit which provides relevant short courses. The second is that, apart from regular tutorials, tests, and final examinations. no one will follow up your comprehension of the lecture material

other than yourself. The Faculty expects you to spend at least one hour of your time on private study for every contact hour that you have with University staff. You need to allocate this from the very begtnnlng of your course and If you delay the process you will probably never make up the lost time. A well planned. unlfonn program of work to support your lectures. tutortals and laboratory classes will allow you to develop your understanding of the subjects and enjoy the many other facets of university life.

The quality of your tertiary education depends upon your abtlity to make efficient use of the University Library. Ensure that you take part In the orientation programs which the Library staff offer at the begtnnlng of every year. Throughout your course the teaching and administrative staff of the University are here to guide you and If you need assistance it is available at a number of levels. Difficulties with particular subjects should be discussed with the lecturer or tutor concerned or the Year Supervisor tn each Deparbnent. Problems with your degree structure and progression are the province of the Assistant Deans and the Dean who will gtve guidance when reqUired. Day to day changes In your current enrolment are handled by the ASSistant Registrar who can be found In the Faculty Omce which Is located In the Science BuUdlng adjoining Chemistry.

In a climate where government charges for tertiary education have risen steeply. you must make the mostofyourttmeat University byusing its resources to the full. Learn to organise your thoughts. expand your l1}Ind. and develop your critical faculties to the

utInosttnordertoprovideyourselfwithquallflcations which will lead to a successful career and satisfying life. On a final note. I Invite you to enjoy your time at University.

D.C.FINLAY

Dean

section one

Faculty Staff

PRINCIPAL OFFICERS

Visitor His Excellency. The Governor of New South Wales

Chancel10r The Honourable Justice E.A. Evatt. AD. LLB. HonLLD(Syd). LLM(Harv). HonLLD(Macq). HonDUnlv

Deputy Chancel10r P.I.A. Hendry. AD. MB BS(Syd). DCP(Lond). HonMD. FRCPA. FCAP. FAACB

Vice-Chancellor Professor RJ. Mortley. BA(Syd). MA(Monash), Dr3'cycle. DesL(Stras). FAHA(phUos)

Deputy Vlce-Chancel1or Professor M.P. Carter. BA(Nott). PhD(Edtn)

Pro Vlce-ChaDceUor aDd DeaD of Student. Professor K.R. Dutton. MA(Syd), DU(parls), FACE, Officer des Palmes academiques

Pro Vlce-Chancel1or (Development) L.R. Eastcott. BA(NSW). MEd(Syd). PhD(Alta). DtpEd

Pro Vice-Chancellor (Reoearch) Professor RJ. MacDonald. BSc. PhD(NSWl. FAIP

Deputy President of the Academic Senate Professor F.L. Clarke. BEe. PhD(Syd). FCPA. ACIS. AClM

FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS STAFF

Aceountant R Pertsty. BCom

Senior Computer Programmer RJ.Dear. BSe(Syd)

Computer Programmers C.Mason. MA(Camb). MSc(Ply). DlpCompSc J. Symon, SSc T. Wlklendt. BCompScl

Dean D.C. F1nlay. MSc. PhD(Melb). MAPsS


Aoaistant De .... J.G. Couper. BSc. PhD(NE)

Section One

C.E. Lee. BA. PhD(Adel). MAPsS

Aoaistant Registrar H.R Hotchkiss. BA. DlpEd(NE)

AdmiDistratl"e Asslstant K.A. Hodyl. BCom(NSW)

OffIee Stall N.H. Adams

Faculty Staff

DEPARTMENT OF APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

Senior Lecturers R Clark. Teach Cert. BSe. MSe(NSW). FRACI. CChem. MACE (Head of Department) R Hosken. BSc(WA). MSe(Monash). MBA. PhD K. McDonald. DAM. MLitt. MA(NE). MEdStud. FACE. FAAEE.MEIA

Lecturers RG. Fairall. BSc. MEngSc(NSW). GradDIp(Maths) CSU Mitchell P. Geaty. BSe. MSc. DlpEd. MEIA.MAWWA S.A. Grenqulst. BA. BS. MSe(Notre Dame) RW. Kldd. BSe(NSW). PhD(Macq). MEIA M. Llnlch. DlpTeach (NTC). BSc. MSeStud J. Ma. BSc(NSW). MSe. PhD(HK). CEng. MIEE. MIE(Aust) M. Mahony. BA. DlpEd. PhD(Macq) K. Sutton. BEStud. GradDlpEdStud(Speciai Educ). MEStud. DlpTeach(IndArts) A. Williams. DlpTeach(App Arts)(Avondale). BEd(IA)(NCAE) P.J. Williams. BA. DlpTeach. MA. PhD RM. Williamson-Haydon. BSc(NSW). All

AIIaociate Lecturers H. Farrah. BSc(Qld). DlpEd

Honorary Associate J.P. Drtnan. BRurSc(Hons). (UNE). PhD(Macq). J.P.

Technical Omcers A. Lleb J. Wold

Laboratory CraftspersoDs M. Chandler G. Jenkins

Laboratory Assistant C. Walker

Laboratory Attendant. RDavis J. Elliott M. Guest K. Strong

Departmental Omce Stall K. Allan L. Ltnklater

DEPARTMENT OF AVIATION

Profeaaor RA. Telfer. BA(NSW). MEdAdmlnHons(NE). PhD. DlpEdAdmln(NE) (Head of Department)

LeCturers

Faculty 01 Sellnco and Mathematics

D. Chrlstley. BA(Macq) FAIN MRIN

Section One Faculty Staff

I. Henley. BEd(Alberta). Adult Educ Cert. (Nova Seotta) MA(Alberta). MEd(Manltoba) P. Suren. BA (McGill) A. Ulmer. BSc(Phys). BE(Aero)(Syd) M. WIggins. BSocSeI (NE). BAHon. (NE)

Technical OffIcer J. Stephens

Departmental OffIce Stall L. Gamer

DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

PrOfessor B. Boettcher. BSe. PhD(Adel)

Associate Professors RC. Jones. BSe(NSW). PhD(Syd) J.W. Patrick. BScAgr(Syd). PhD(Macq) J.C. Rodger. BSc(NSW). PhD(Syd) T.K. Roberts. BSc(Adel). PhD(FlIn) RJ. Rose. BScAgr(Syd). PhD(Macq) (Head of Department)

8eDior Lecturers B.A. Conroy. BSc. PhD(Syd) RN. Murdoch. BSc(NSW). PhD(Syd) C.E. Omer. BSc. PhD(Adel)

Lecturer RH. Dunstan. B.Ag.Se(Adel). D.Phll(Oxi) D.W. McCurdy. B.Sc. PhD (LaTrobe)

Honorary Associates D. McNair K. Myers. BSc. DSe(Syd) J.D.Stanger. BSc (James Cook). PhD

Asooclate Lecturer. M.A. Cole. BSc(Syd) M. Conroy. BSc. Dip Ed(Syd). PGDlp Plant & Wildlife Illus(NCAE) P. Lake. BSc. MSc(Tor) M. Lin. MSeAgrtc(Jlangxi). PhD C.M.R Peters. BA. BSc(Syd)

Professional Omcers D.J. Kay. BSe(Adel). PhD J. Clulow. BSc. BA. PhD

Technical Omcers E. Blajet. M.Sc(Joglellovlan) R Campbell. B.A. Dlp.Ed J.J. Nairn E.Stark RJ. Tayler

LIIboratory Crartsperaon J.P. Nolan

LIIboratory Assistants D.L. Brennan J.M. Forbes

T.D. Frost B. Hayes L.D. Pezely K.H. Stokes


Departmental Office Staff D.Snushall A. Bulloch

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY

Profe88OJ' Vacant

Associate Professors K.H. Bell, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRACl, CChem L.K. Dyall, MSc, PhD(Melb)

Section One Faculty Staff

G.A. Lawrance, BSc, PhD, DSe(Qld), DtpEd(Melb), FRACl, CChem (Head of Department)

Senior Lecturers RA. Fredlein, BSc, PhD(Qld), MRACl, CChem M. Maeder, PhD, Habilitation (Basel), MRACl, CChem E.!. von Nagy-Felsobuk!, BSc, PhD, DlpEd(Lall, FRACl, CChem

Lecturers RC. Bums, BSe, PhD(Melb), MRACl, CChem G.L. Orr, BSc(Qld), PhD(NSW), MRACl, CChem !.A. van Altena, BSc(James Cook), PhD(Alberta), MRACl, CChem

Associate Lecturers J .A. Ferguson, BSc(Syd) K.A. Grice, BSc E.N. Wilkes, BSc

Honorary Research Asaoclate D.A.J. Swinkels, BSc(NSW), PhD(Penn), ASTC, FRAC!. CChem

Senior Technical Omcer A.J. Beveridge

Technical Officers RF. Godfrey F. McKenzie J. Slavek W.J. Thompson

Laboratory AssIstants O. Peters T. Williams

Departmental Office Staff E. Slabbert M. Munns

DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY

Profesaor E.A. Colhoun, BA(Belij, MS(Wis), PhD(BeIQ, MA(Dub)

Aaaoclate Profeasors H.A. Bridgman, BA(Belott), MA(Hawatt), PhD(Wis) J.C.R Camm, MSe(Hull), PhD RJ. Loughran, BSc(Dunelm), MSe, PhD(NE) (Head of Department)

SeDior Lecturera


G.N. McIntyre, BAlTas), MA(ANU), PhD J.C. Turner, BSeAgr(Syd), MS, PhD(Wls) H.P.M. Winchester, MA (Oxon), DPhil(Oxon)

Lecturera K.W. Lee, BA(Uv), MA(NE) P.M. McGuirk, HDtp,PhD (Dublin) P.M. O'Nem, MA (Hons) Macq), DtpEd(Macq)

cartograpber O. Rey-Lescure

TechDical Officer C. G. Dever

. Depsrtmental Office Staff M.B.Lane

I. DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY

Associate Profeasors B.A. Engel. MSc(NE), PhD R Offier, BSc, PhD(Adel) (Head of Department) P.K. Seccombe, MSe(Melb), PhD(Mantt)

Senior Lecturers RL. Boyd, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd) W.J. Collins, BSe(ANU), PhD(Lall

Lecturer J.G. Bailey, BSe, DlpEd, PhD

Section Ona Faculty Staff

Emeritus Professor IIDd Honorary Asaoclate C.F.K. Dlessel, DtplGeol, DrRerNat(Berlin), AAuslMM, FAlE

Profesalonal Officer G.L. Dean.Jones, BA, MSc(Macq)

SenIor Technical Officer R Bale, BSe

Technical Omcers E. Kruplc J.A. Crawford

Laboratory AssistllDt H.L. Ruming, BSc

Depsrtmental Office Staff G.A. MacKenzie

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS

Profeasor I, Raeburn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Utah) (Head of Department)

Aa80ciate Professors W. Brtsley, BSe(Syd), MSe (NSW), PhD, DlpEd(NE) J,R Giles, BA(Syd), PhD, DlpEd(Syd), ThL P,K, Smrz, PromPhys, CSc, RNDr(Charles(Prague))

8eDior Lecturers I,M, Benn, BSc(Edln), PhD(Lancaster) R.F. Berghout, MSe(Syd) J,G, Couper, BSc, PhD(NE)

Lau, ME(NSW), PhD(Syd)

Si;~:~::'j BSe(Qld), PhD(york(Cant), Canada) I BSe(Edtn), PhD(Newcastle, UK)

BSc, PhD Summerfield, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin)


W.P. Wood. BSc. PhD(NSW). FRAS

Lecturers D.A. Pasko BSc(Hons). MSc. PhD(Warwtck) E. Vlachynsky. BSc(Syd). PhD(Syd) G.A. W!llls. BSc(Adel). PhD(Newcastle. UK)

Asaoeiate Lect1D'ers A. Gore. BMath(Hons) G. Pettet. BSc. DlpEd. BMath(Hons) J. Ramagge. BA(Hons). MSc. PhD(Warwlck) J. Ryan. BMath(Hons)(Woll)

Secllon One Faculty Staff

Research Asaoclate M.E. Laca. BSEE(Urugnay). MA(Santa Barbara). PhD(Berkeley)

Profeaaor Emeritus RG. Keats. BSe. PhD(Adel). DMath(Waterloo). FIMA. FASA. MACS

Departmental OfIIce Staff J. Garnsey. BA(Syd) L. Steel R Pease. BEd(Math)(MCAE)

Division of Quantitative Methods

PrIncipal Lecturer W.P.Galvin. BA(Syd). MMath. MEd. MEngSe. FlMA

Senior Lecturer M.J. Williams. BA. MEngSc. DipEd

Lecturers T.J.Dalby. MSe(Cant). BMath J.A.MacDougall. BSc. MA(Dalhousle). MPhll(Waterloo) M.J. Roberts. BMath. PhD S.D.SeltTer. BChemEng. BMath. PhD

Division OfIIce staff L. Locker J. Trayhurn

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS

Profeaaor RJ. MacDonald. BSc. PhD(NSW). FAIP

Associate Professors B.J. Fraser. MSc(NZ). PhD(Cant). FAIP. FRAS C.S.L. Keay. MSc(NZ). PhD(Cant). MArror). CPhys. FlnstP(Lond) FAIP. FAAAS. FRNZAS. FRAS D.J. O·Connor. BSc. PhD(ANU). FAIP (Head of Department) P.V. Smith. BSc. PhD (Monash). MAIP

Senior Lecturers F.T. Bagnall. BSc(NSW). MSc(NE). PhD. MAlP J.E.R Cleary. MSc(NSW). MAlP B.V. King. BSc. BE. PhD(NSW). MAIP P.A. McGovern. BE. BSc(Qld). MS. PhD(CaITech). MIEEE. SMlREAust RH. Roberts. BE(NSW). MSc. PhD (York). ASTC. MAIP

Lecturer F.W. Menk. BSe. PhD(LaT). MAlP

Researeb _Iates H.J. Hansen. MSe. PhD(Natal) Y.D. Hu. MSe (USTC). PhD. MAIP M. Radny. MSc (Wroclaw). PhD (Wroclaw). PPS(Poland). IUVISTA


Honorary Research _Iates D. Webster. BSc. PhD J.A. Ramsay. MSc(Melb). PhD. FAIP

Senior Technical OfIIcen B. Mason M.K. O'NeIll J.F. Pearson J .S. Ratcliffe

Technical Officen T.W.Burns M.M. Cvetanovskl. BSc J.e. Foster G. Plszczuk

Senior Laboratory Craftspenon B. Stevens

Laboratory Craftspersons P. Greig l. Clarke

Departmental OfIIce Staff J. Oyston N. Smith

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY

Profeasora

Section One

D.C. Finlay. MSe. PhD(Melb). MAPsS (Head of Department) M.G. KIng. BA. PhD(Qld). FAPsS

Associate Professor RA. Heath. BSc. PhD(McM)

Senior Lecturers M.M. Cotton. MA. PhD(NE). MPsych(ClIn). MAPsS M. Hunter. BSc. phD(Lond). CertEd. MBPsS. MAPsS N.F. Kafer. BA. PhD(ANU). MAPsS C.E. Lee. BA. PhD(Adel). MAPsS S.A. McFadden. BSc. PhD(ANU) D. Munro. MA(Manc). PhD(Lond). Cert Soc St(Glas). Dip Data(SA) H.P. Pfister. BA(Macq). PhD. MAPsS J.L. Seggie. BA. PhD J.D.C. Shea. MA(Cant). PhD(Qld) MASH. MACPCP. MASA. MISNIM

Leeturon R. Brown. BA. PhD. MASA. MISNIM B. Hayes. BSc. BPsyc(ClIn). PhD(NSW) A. Heathcote. BSc(Hons). PhD (Queens) J. Kenardy. BSc(Hons). PhD(Qld). MAPsS S. Pmvost. BSe(Psyc). PhD (NSW)

"-!ate Lecturer J Spinks. BA. MA(Syd). Dip Sc

Faculty Staff

Bmeritus Professor J.A. Keats. BSe(Adel). BA(Melb). AM. PhD(Prtn). FASSA. FBPsS. FAPsS

Honorary Associates


W.J. Clarke. BA. Dip Psych. MAPsS D.B. Dunlop. MB. BS(Syd). DO. FRSM. MACO B. Fenelon. BA(Qld). MA. PhD. MAPsS. AAAN. MSPR B.G. Frost. BA. PhD. MAPsS F. Hughes. BA. MSc(Cltn) D.M. Keats. BA. Dip Ed(Syd). M Ed. PhD(Qld). FAPsS W. Levick. BA. M.Psych(Cltn). MAPsS T. Single. BA. M.Psych(Cltn). MAPsS

Section One

F.V. Smith. MA(Syd). PhD(Lond). FBPsS. FAPsS. C.Psychol T.C. Waring. BA. MSc(Cltn). MAPsS

Profeuional Officer D.F. Bull. BSc

Senior Technical Officers L. Cooke R. Gleghorn A.O. Harcombe J. Lee-Chin. BSc

Technical Officers D. Golvers, BA E.M. Huber P.W. Smith

Laboratory Craftsperson M. Newton

Departmental Office Staff W.N. Mead S. Harris L. Davies

Faculty Staff

I

section two

Faculty "Information

FACULTY INFORMATION

The Faculty of Science and Mathematlcscomprtses the Departments of AppUed Science and Technology, Aviation. Biological Sciences, Chemistry, Geography, Geology, Mathematics, Physics and Psychology. The Departments of Computer Science and Statistics also offer major sequences of qualifying subjects for the degrees of Bachelor of Science and Bachelor of Mathematics in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

Transition Arrangements E:l:ceptional Circumstances

In order to provide for exceptional circumstances artslng In particular transition cases, the Dean may determine the transition program to be followed.

General Information for New Undergraduates

Students embarking on a university course for the first time may find some difficulty in adapting to the new environment. Tertiary education makes a number of demands on students it requires them to be self-diSCiplined, organized. self-motivated and moreover. responsible for their own course of study. Hence it is Important that students become familiar with the University structure. degree courses offered and service organizations (such as the University Counselling Service & Accommodation Service etc.) which offer assistance with study. personal and housing problems.

Often students on first entering University are not certain of their final field of interest. In fact. it Is usually only after the completion of the first year of study that many students finally choose to major In a particular subject. In order to maintain f1extbtltty first year semester subjects (100 level subjects) should be chosen from areas where the student has some previous expertise or special interest. At the same time. they should take note of the degree reqUirements, particularly with regard to prescrtbed subjects. prerequisites and corequlsites as set out In the appropI1ate degree/diploma Rules In this handbook.

Students should note that degrees must be structured to include a speCified number of 300 level subjects. For example. a Bachelor of Science degree must Include forty credit points at the 300 level In one Department. and at least forty more credit points at 300 level chosen from subjects approved by Faculty Board.


Subject to the Dean's penntsslon. a candidate may be pennltted to enrol In some subjects from amongst those offered by another Faculty.

Time I1mits are set on the duration of an undergraduate courseas indicated in the appropriate Rules. Maximum workloads are also preset. since limits are placed on the number of subjects students are pennttted to undertake in anyone year. For information on these restrictions consult the appropriate degree Rules.

Undergraduate Mmi .. lon Requirements

In order to be considered for admission for any qualification other than a postgraduate qualification an appltcant shall be required to

either

(I) attain such aggregate of marks In approved subjects at the New South Wales Higher School Certiftcate examination as may be prescrlbed by the Senate from time to time; or

(tt) otherwise satisfy theAdmlsslons & Progression Committee that the appltcant has reached a standard of education sufficient to enable the approved course to be pursued.

Aasumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty

There are no prescrlbed prerequisites forentIy to the Faculty of Science and Mathematics; students are advised that lectures will commence on the assumption that all students will have achieved the level Indicated.

Subject Aasumed Knowledge

AViation 109-115 2-unlt. 3-unlt or 4-unlt Mathematics. Also. 2-unlt Physics or 4-unlt Science (Including the Physics ·makeup' electives) with a level of perfonnance plaCing them In the top 50% of the candidature for these subjects.

Biology 101 Higher School Certificate Chemistry or 4-unit Science Is approprlate and students are advised to Include CHEM 10 I and CHEM 102 In their University program. However. some lectures In background chemistry wtll be offered by the Department of Community Programmes prlor to the start of

SectJonTwo

Chemlstry 10 I

Geography

Geology 101

Mathemattcs III

Mathematics 102

Physics III

Physics 113

Psychology 10 1

Faculty Information


the first semester. Attendanct! year in which enrolment is sought and who have at this Preparatory Course II completedallmltedNewSouthWalesHtgherSchool opttonal. Certtficate . Program. Subjects which wtll enable At least 2-unlt courSI, entry into the Faculty of Science a!1d Mathematics Mathematics. 2-unlt courSl, include four units selected from Physics. Chemistry. ChemiStry. and 2-unlt COUI"S(I Mathematics (3-unit course preferred). and 4-unit PhYSiCS with ranking In the tOil Science. For entry into the Bachelor of Mathematics 50% in each case. degree. include 3-unit mathematics (attaining a HSC Geography would be at result of at least 120/150) and one other subject advantage. but the course Is i; recognised for admission purposes. foundation course that does no~ ComblDed Degree CoUl'8e8

require haVing undertakerjThe decision to take a combined degree course Is Geography at schooL ; usually taken at the end of a student's first year in 2-unlts of Science (preferab~'!- his or her orlgtnal degree course. In consultation Chemistry) and at least 2-untb with the Deans of the Faculties responSible for the of Mathematics. : two degrees. Pursuit of a combined degree course 2-untt course Mathematics, al will nonnally require an average of Credit levels In higher. j first year subjects.

Mathemattcs at3-unltlevel wttl' ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ascoreofatleast 120/150 In 3 Mvi Services unit. or have passe sory Mathematics Ill. Students reqUiring spectftc adVice on the selection

HSC 2-unit Mathematics with perfonnance level In the top 3 of the candidature for th subject.

HSC 3-unlt Mathemattcs wtth mark of at least 110/150 PhYSiCS 2-unltorScience 4-un with a perfonnance level In top 50% of candidature for the subjects.

A quota exists for entry PSYC 10 I. Students who are n enrolled In a Bachelor of Sci en (Psychology). Bachelor of (Psychology) or Bachelor Social Work are eligible to en in PSYC101 only on achleVin Tertiary Entrance Rank. equivalent. equal to or grea than the TER reqUired I admission to either the Bache of ScIence (Psychology) or Bachelor of Arts (Psycholo degrees. whichever is the Ie

or content of subjects in the course should seek help from members of the Faculty. In particular. adVice should be sought from first. second and third year subject co-ordlnators In each Department. Heads of Departments. the Assistant Deans or Dean.

EnqUiries regarding enrolment. vanatlon to program and general administrative problems should be directed to the Faculty Secretary In the Faculty of Science and Mathematics in the Science Building.

For personal counselltng and study skills training it Is suggested that students should consult the University Counselltng Service.

S_ent Participation In University Affairs

Provision is made for students to be elected as members on Departmental and Faculty Boards as well as toother University bodies. Election of student members usually takes place in Semester One and students should watch Departmental notice boards for detalls of election of student members.

The Faculty Board of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics has proVision for the election of four student members.

Mature Age Entry I!qbject TImetable Clashes

Students are strongly advised to check on possible Ibnetable clashes before enrolling. Clashes may »

Entry Into the University is available to persons wtll be at least 21 years of age by I st March of

Section Two Faculty Information

force students to take those subjects in different years. Although academic staff are always wtlling to advise students, It Is the student"s responslblltty to ensure that chosen subjects may be studied concurrently. Science and Mathematics students taking subjects from other Faculties must examine the timetable to ensure that clashes do not exist in their proposed subjects.

Although the timetable for one particular subject may clash with that of another. this may not necessartIy mean that this combination cannot be done. Often an arrangement can be made by one or both Departmental representatives to overcome this problem. Therefore. see the Departmental representatives before deciding upon your final subject combinations.

Workload

The expected maximum workload for students devoting most of their time to degree studies Is 40 credit points per semester. In the case of a 20 credit point subject offered over a full year. the work load will be rated as 10 credit points per semester. Enrolment in excess of 40 credit points persemester can only be exceeded in exceptional circumstances by students with a good academic record and requires the permission of the Dean.

Students with external commitments. such as parttime employment. should enrol in fewer subjects. Such commitments cannot be taken into consideration for an extension of time for written work. or failure to attend examinations some of which may be scheduled on Saturday mornings.

Review of Student Academic Progress

All candidates are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory progress and, in particular. attention Is drawn to the Rules Governing Unsatisfactory Progress. In accordance with Regulation 4(1) of the Rules Governing Unsattsfactory Progress the Faculty Board has determined the followtng policy:

1. Ifacandidatedoesnotpassatleasttwosemester subjects (equivalent to twenty credtt points) In their first year of full-time attendance or in their first two years of part-time attendance. that candidate will be asked to show cause as to why the candidate should not be excluded from the Faculty. If the candidate does successfully show cause. a condition will be imposed on re-enrolment. that the candidate's

Faculty of ScJenca and Mathamatlc.

program be restricted. to a maximum of thirty credit points in each semester.

2. If a candldate does not pass at least eight semester subjects (equivalent to eighty cred!t points) by the end of their first two years of fulltlme attendance or four years of part-time attendance. that candldate will be asked to show cause as to why the candidate should not be excluded from the Faculty. Candidates who have been reviewed under (1) above and have satisfied the conditions imposed on their reenrolment, will not be asked to show cause at the end of that year.

3. In any year following their second year of fulltime attendance or first four years of part-time attendance, if a candidate's academic record Indicates failure tn more than fifty percent of their total enrolment (as expressed In credit points). that candldate will be asked to show cause as to why the candidate should not be excluded from the Faculty.

4. The Dean may request that Faculty Board review the academic progress of any student who has an extremely poor academic performance In years subsequent to the end of the second year of attendance In the Faculty of Science and Mathematics. The use of this prOvision Is at the discretion of the Dean.

5. If a candidate fails a semester subject for the second ttme, that candidate shall not be permitted to enrol again in that subject except with the permission of the Dean on the recommendation of the Head of Department offering that subject.

6. If a candldate fails a compulsory subject for the second time or fails four semester subjects twice that candldate will be asked to show cause as to why the candidate should not be excluded from the FaCUlty.

7. Candidates should note that a Terminating Pass can be awarded only at the 100 Level or 200 Level and that no more than four Tenntnating Passes may count In a candidate's program (equivalent to forty credit points). with no more than two (eqUivalent to twenty credit points) at the 200 Level.

8. In thecase of acandldateenrolled In a Combined Degree course who fails to maintain a minimum

s.cUonTwo Faculty Information

Faculty of Science and Mathematic.

ofCreditlevel grades or better In fifty percent Oland Social Sciences have additional specific the candidate's total enrolment In anyone year, requirements. that candldate will be asked to show cause whJ PrImary method

a recommendation should not be made to th, 1 50 red! ts (20 100 30 200 1 1) f At east c tpoln - ; - eve oa Admissions ~d Progression Committee tha degree In a specified area and 20-100 level credlt the candidate s enrolment In the comblne(jpolntsof adegree in each of two others. The specified degree course be terminated (l.e. the candidaUlarea Is usually a secondary teaching area. be pennltted. to continue In a single degret only). Further details may be obtained from the Faculty

;:!~!~~1;~~:~~:~~:~::F~a~culty of Education. Note Where there Is a change In status. two part-ttmeyearswill be of Faculty Board, Faculty of Science and equivalent of one full-time of this policy.

TEACHER TRAINING COURSES

m,e role ollthe Faculty Board. Faculty of Science and !Matllenaat.ics is defined by Faculty Board Rule 7

states Prerequisite. for Diploma In Education Unit.

'l;~~~~~~~l!to any resolution of the Council or the Students who intend to proceed to a Diploma ~~ Senate, and any provisions of any Rules, Education should famtltarise themselves with Faculty Board shall prerequisites for unUs offered In the course.

encourage and supervise the teaching. These prerequisites are stated In terms of assessment and research activities of the of the University of Newcastle. Applicants Faculty;

courses of study have Included SUbjects"qUiVSllel1] make recommendations to theAcademtc Senate deemed. for this purpose to provide an foundation may be admitted to the Diploma on any matter affecting the Faculty; as special cases. (cl detennlne the grades of pass to be used for In the subjects offered In the courses for which the

Learning units are grouped as follows Faculty Is responsible; (d) consider theexamlnatton results recommended (a) Secondary

In respect of each of the candidates for which English the Faculty is responsible and take action in History accordance with the prescrlbed procedures:

Social Science (Geography, (e) makerecommenciatlonsonmattersconcemlng Social Science) admissions, enrolment and progression tn the Mathematics courses for which the Faculty is responsible to

the Admissions and ProgreSSion Committee; Science and

Modern Languages (French. (0 deal with any matter referred to it by the Japanese) Academic Senate.

(b) Primary Profe88lonal Recognition

Prerequlaltes Graduates of the University of Newcastle enrolled In For Information about prerequisites. students the Faculty of Science and Mathematics are Invited to contact the Faculty Secretary, recognized by a number of different profeSSional Education. This contact should be made In the S()Cietles depending on their degree majors.

stages of a degree course. AppUed Science and Technology

AD aecondary methods Thedemand for graduates In areas of environmental Nonnally at least 50 credit points (20· monitoring, assessment and management Is steadily level) of a degree In the main teaching area and IJ'OwtngthroughoutAustralta, as the Environmental credit points (20-100 level) of a degree In ImpactAssessment(EIA) process has penneatedthe subsidiary area. Modem Languages, wan"". """"'

Section Two Faculty Information

requirements for development approvals connected with almost all new developments for mining, indusUy, agriculture, and urban expansion. Surveys of natural and disturbed. ecosystems are on the agenda for government at local, state and national levels.

Blolopcal ScIence.

The Australian Institute of Biology Incorporated was inaugurated In 1986. Its objectives are to represent the Biology profeSSion In Australia, to promote education and research In Biology and to Improve communication between biologists of different disciplines. The Institute confers on Its members a status slmUar to thatforother Australian profeSSional institutes. Membership grades are Fellow, Member, Associate and Student. Members and Fellows are able to indicate this by the appropriate letters after their qualifications. Fellowship requires distinction In Biology and nomination from the existing membership. Membership requires a first or second class Honours degree In Biology and three years relevant expertence, or a pass degree with five years experience, or a Masters degree with two years relevant experlence, or a PhD. An Associate reqUires an appropriate pass degree or contribution to the advancement of Biology.

Chemistry

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majoring In Chemisll)'. may join the Royal Australian Chemical Institute which has several categortesof membership according to qualification and experience.

Geology

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science (Honours) majoring in Geology may Join the GeolOgical Society of Australia Inc., the Australian Institute of Geoscientists and The Australasian Institute of Mtntng& Metallurgywhlch has several categortesof membership according to qual1ftcatton and experience.

Mathematics

For employment as a Mathematician, graduates should have at least one major In Mathematics. An Honours degree Is preferred by many employers. The profession Is represented by the Australian Mathematical SOCiety.

Physic.

For employment as a physicist, students must have a minimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science

Faculty of Science and MathematlCI

degree with a major In PhysIcs. An Honours degree in Physics or combined. Physics/Mathematics would be preferred.

Physics as a profession is represented by the Australian InstltuteofPhyslcs. Membershlp Is Umlted to graduates with a minimum of a major in Physics. The AustraUan Institute of PhysIcs has a number of grades of membershIp whIch are related to experience as a physIcIst. There Is a grade of membershIp for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors courses in Physics at tertlaIy Instltutlons and judges them In terms of sultabtUty for admission to membership of the Australian Institute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of physIcIsts to matters relating to physIcists and their role. There are no formal conditions for registration as a physIcist.

Psychology

Graduates holding a Bachelor of Science majorlng In Psychology or a Bachelor of Science (Psychology) may JoIn the AustraUan PsychologIcal SocIety. Membership nmmally requires a four year degree In Psychology. Provision is also mc.tde for Student subscribers and AIllUates.

Section Two Facully Information

ndergraduate Degree and ploma Rules

Undergraduate Diploma And Degree. offered In the Faculty of Science and Mathematic.

Bachelor of Science (Aviation) Bachelor of Environmental Science Bachelor of Science Bachelor of ScIence (Psychology) Bachelor of Mathemattcs Diploma tn Aviation Science

Rule. Governing Academic Awards

1 AppUcatlon of Rule.

These rules shall apply to all the academic awards of the University other than the degrees of Doctor and Master.

2 Interpretation

(1) In these rules. unless the context or subject matter otherwise Indicates or requires

"award" means the degree. diploma (including graduate diploma and associate diploma) or graduate certificate for which a candidate is enrolled;

"courae" means the total reqUirements of the program of study approved by the Academic Senate to quaUfy a candidate for the award as set out in the schedule;

"Dean" means the Dean of a Faculty;

"department" means the department offerlng a particular subject and includes any other body so doing;

"Faculty" means the Faculty responSible for the course;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;

"schedule" means the schedule to these rules relevant to the award listed under the name of the Faculty;

3

4

6


"subJect" means any part of a course for which a result may be recorded.

(2) A reference in these rules to a Head of Department shall be read not only as a reference to the person appointed to that office but also, where a subject is not offered by a department as such. to the person approved by the Academic Senate to undertake the responsibilttles of a Head of Department for the purpose of these rules.

Admission

An applicant for admission to candidature for an award shall satisfy the requirements of the University governing admission to and enrolment in a course and any other additional reqUirements as may be presctibed in the schedule for that award.

Subject

(1) For the purpose of a course, a subject may be classified at a level determined by the Faculty Board.

(2) Each subject shall be allotted a credit point value by the Academic Senate after consldeting the advice of the Faculty Board of the Faculty In which the department Is located.

(3) The Academic Senate. after considering a request from a Facul ty Board, may determine that a subject be not offered during a particular academic year.

(4) The Faculty Board shaH approve the subjects for the award. Any change in the Ust of approved subjects which will have effect In the followtngyear shall be approved by a date determined by the Academic Senate.

(5) Where there Is any change In the Itst of approved subjects. the Faculty Board shall make all reasonable provision to permit students already enrolled In the course to progress normally.

Enrolment

(1) A candidate may not enrol In any year In a combination of subjects which is incompattble with the requirements of the timetable for that year.

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Rule.

6

(2) Except with the penntsslon of the Dean and7 subject to any contrary provision In the schedule

(a) a candidate may not enrol In subjecu, totaJltng more than the eqUivalent of 40 credit points in any semester;

(h) a candidate shaJI not enrol in a subjecl' which does not count towards the,; award; and .

(c) a candidate shall not be permitted enrol In any subject which substantially eqUivalent to one that candidate has pr,evlousl), C()ulnt'<il towards a degree or diploma.

(3) A candidate for an award shall not enrol a course or part of a course for an,otlhaj award In this University unless cOllsenll has first been obtained from the uean, al'<l,J if another Faculty Is responsible for course leading to that other award,

DeanofthatF:'~~i~~~~(!~~~:t;:;;;~~~ may enrol In a course by the Academic Senate leading awards.

Prerequisites and Corequi.ltes

(1) The Faculty Board on the r~~:~;;:~~:~~ of the Head ofthe Department may prerequisites and/or corequtsttes for subject offered by that Department.

(2) Except with the permission of the granted after considering recommendation made by the Head of Department, no candidate may enrol subject unless that candidate has any subJects prescribed at any grade which may be specified has already passed or concurrently in or is already enrolled tn any su:bjecl/l prescribed as its corequisites.

(3) Except with the permission of the n""n.

candidate will not have prerequisite if the prerequistte subject not been completed tn the preceding calendar years.

(4) A candidate attaining a Terminating In a subject shall be deemed not to passed that subject for purposes.

Credit


(I) A Faculty Board may grant credit to a candidate In spectfled and unspecified subjects, on such conditions as It may detenntne. tn recognition of work completed in the University or another Institution approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose.

(2) Except as may be otherwise provided In the schedule, a candidate shall not be given credit for more than sixty five per cent of the total number of credit points required to complete the course.

Subject Requirements

(1) The subjects which may be completed In the course for the award shall be those approved by the Faculty Board and pubUshed annually as the Approved Subjects section of the schedule.

(2) A candidate enrolled In a subject shall comply with such academic and practical requirements and submit such written or other work as the Department shall specify.

(3) Except as otherwise permitted by the Head of Department, any matetial presented by a candidate for assessment must be the work of the candidate and not have been previously submitted for assessment.

(4) To complete a subject a candidate shall satisfy pubUshed departmental requirements and gain a satisfactory result in such assessments and eXaminations as the Faculty Board shall require.

Withdrawal

(1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject orthecourseonlybytnfonrungtheAcademlc Registrar in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A student shall be deemed not to have enrolled tn a subject if that student withdraws from the subject

(a) In the case of a semester length subject. before the Higher Education Contribution Scheme census date for that semester. or

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degree and Diploma Rule.

(h) in the case of a full year subject. before the first Higher Education Contribu tion Scheme census date for that academic year.

(3) Except with the permission of the Dean

(a) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject after the relevant date which shall be

(I) In the case of a semester length subject. the last day of that semester; or

(tt) In the case of a full year subject. the last day of second semester; and/or

(Ut) subject to any provision within the schedules; and

(h) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject on more than two occasions.

10 Absence (1) Subject to any provision In the schedule. a

candidate tn good academic standing in the course

(a) may take an absence of one year from the course; or

(h) with the permission of the Dean. may take an absence of two consecu live years from the course without prejudice to any light of the candidate to re-enrol tn the course following such absence and with full credit In all subjects successfully completed prior to the period of leave.

(2) For the purposes of sub-rule (1). unless otherwise specified tn the schedule. a candidate eligible to re-enrol shall be deemed to be In good academic standing.

(3) A person who has been enrolled In a course but Is absent without leave or has been excluded from the course may apply for readmission to that course and may be readmitted to candidature under such conditions and at such time as the Faculty Board may determine. unless othetwise specified in the schedule.

Faculty of Sclance and Mathamatics

11 QuaHflcadon for the Award

(I) To qualtJY for the award a candidate shall satisfactorily complete the requirements governing the course prescribed in the schedule.

(2) A subject which has been counted towards a completed award may not be counted towards another award. except to such extent as the Faculty Board may approve.

12 Combined Degree Programs

(1) Where so prescribed fora partlcularcourse. a candidate may complete the requirements for one Bachelor degree In conjunction with another Bachelor degree by completing a combined degree program approved by the Academic Senate on the advtceofthe Faculty Board and. where the other Bachelordegree Is offered In another Faculty. the Faculty Board of that Faculty.

(2) Admission to a combined degree program shall be restricted to candidates who have achieved astandard of perfonnance deemed satisfactory for the purposes of admission to the specific combined degree course by the Faculty Board(s).

(3) The work undertaken by a candidate In a combined degree program shall be no less in quantity and qualtty than if the two courses were taken separately.

(4) To qualtJY for admission to the two degrees a candidate shall sattsJY the reqUirements for both degrees. except as may be otherwise provided.

13 Relu:lng Provision

In order to provtde for exceptional circumstances arlstngin a partlcularcase. the AcademtcSenate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may rel~ any provision of these rules.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT

No intake after 1993.

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degree and Diploma Rule.


SCHEDULE - BACHELOR O~ ENVIRONMENT CORE

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE compulsory subjects are:

1 QuaHflcadon for the Degree Level

2

(I) To quallfy for admission to the de!(re<tN11l CI2 candidates shall pass subjects

Environmental Values and Ethics

240 credit points selected from the Environmental Issues and ApprovedSubjects including the p ... ,selrth<<! Problems subjectsunlesstheFacultyBoardapIPrc.v<1lICILIOI Plant and Animal Biology otherwise In a particular case. Cell Biology. Genetics and

(2) (a) at least 80 credit points from 100 Evolu tton subjects; Level

(h) at least 80 credit points from 200 lev<l~1V2:0 I subjects; and

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 1_ .. .I~1V2:02 subjects.

Credit

(I) A candidate may be granted credit: Level

[a) forupto 180credltpointsinr~~!:.~t:~~;; of subjects completed at another institution which have not pr<,v!(ousl._ •• , •• counted towards a completed

[h) for as many cr<:dtlt p'.inlts 'IS the Facull Board determines In recognition subjects completed in the Un.iversill which have not been p,..::vt"U!~y,c01mt<41 towards a completed award; and

[c) forupto 1'~~~;X~~~~:~~~7~:~:~~~i for subjects completed and counted towards a completed

(2) Except with the permission of the

candidates grantedd~c:~r~ed~,i;:t.:in~;:,~f;~~I:~ workcompletedata complete at ieast 40 credit points at th" 3A level at the University.

Environmental Legislation and Planning Human Values and the Environment Environmental Sampling and Data Analysis Ecology

Integrated Environmental Impact Assessment Environmental Specialist Study Environmental Biology

3 Time RequiremeDts

[I) Except with the permission of the Board, acandldate shall cornpletethe'collr within nine years of study.

[2) A candidate granted credit shall be .. :. to have commenced the course from detennlned by the Dean at the time which credit Is granted.

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subject approved by the Faculty Board for award are:

IOcp

IOcp 10cp

IOcp

IOcp

10cp

IOcp IOcp

IOcp IOcp IOcp

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Rules

Code Name

Faculty of Science and Mathematici

Subjects for a Biological Sciences Major

200 Level

Minimum of thirty credit points from BlOL201 Biochemistry

BIOL202 Animal Physiology BlOL204 Cen and Molecular Biology BlOL205 Molecular Genetics BlOL206 Plant PhYSiology BlOL20B Biochemistry 208 300 Level Minimum of forty credit points from BIOL302 Reproductive PhYSiology BlOL305 Immunology BIOL309 Molecular Biology BlOL31O Microbiology

BlOL313 Cellular Biochemistry

BIOL314 Plant Development BIOL315 Plant Molecular Biology

BlOL316 Cen Biology

Subjects for a Chemistry Major

100 Level CHEMIOI Chemistry 10 I CHEMI02 Chemistry 102 200 Level CHEM211 Analytlcal Chemistry CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry and a minimum of ten credit points from CHEM22I InorganIc Chemistry CHEM231 Organic Chemistry CHEM241 Physical Chemistry 300 Level CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry CHEM313 Industrial Chemical Analysts CHEM36I Environmental Chemistry and a minimum of fifteen credit pOints from CHEM312 Chemometrlcs

CHEM32I Inorganic Chemistry CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding & Cluster

ChemiStry

Cp

10

10 10 10 10 10

10 10 10 10

10

10 10

10

10 10

10 10

10 10 10

10 5 10

5

10

5 CHEM323 Blotnorganfc Co-ordination Chemtstry5 CHEM33I Organic Chemistry 10 CHEM333 Organic Reaction Mechanism 5

Section Thr ..

Prerequlalta

BIOLIOI BIOLI02 CHEMIOI CHEMI02 BIOLIOI BlOLI02

Undergraduate DegrH and Diploma Rul ••

Corequlsltef:oc!e

tHEM334

~EM335 , HEM341

Name

Faculty of Selene. and Mathematic.

Cp

Identification of Natural Compounds5 Organic Spectroscopy 5 Physical Chemistry . 10

Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion 5 Molecular Spectroscopy 5

BlOLIOI BlOLI02 BlOLIOI BlOLl02

for an Earth Sciences Mlllor

BlOLIOI BlOLI02 BIOL201 Introductlon to PhYSical Geography 10

The Environment 10 Earth Materlals 10

Two BIOL200 Two BlOL200 Methods In Physical Geography 10

Bl0L201 BIOL205 Biogeography and Climatology 10

BlOL20 I and one other Geomorphology of Australta 10

BlOL200 (BlOL204 advisable) 13 Ancient Envtronments and OrganismslO

BJ0L201 and one other BI0L200 (Bl0L20B from 1995) The Biosphere and ConselVation 10

Two BlOL200 Climatic Problems 10

Two BlOL200 Including one Hydrology 10

of BIOL204 BI0L205 BIOL206 Geology of Quaternary Environments 10

Section Thr ..

Prerequlalta

CHEM231 CHEM23I CHEM241 MATIlI02 (or MATII Jl2) CHEM241 MATIlI02 (or MATII Jl2) CHEM24I

GEOLIOI

GEOGIOI GEOGIOI GEOGIOI GEOLI02

Undergraduate Degree end Diploma Rul ••

Corequlsltes

GEOG2OJ GEOG203 GEOG204 GEOG201 GEOG203 GEOG201 GEOG203 GE0L213 or GEOG204

or BlOL20B for an Environmental Management Major Two BlOL200 Level

Foundations of Environmental Management 10 Social Development and the Envtronment 10

CHEMIOI CHEMI02 credit points from

CHEM 101 CHEM 102 I Soils and Hydrology 10 ENVI03 The Sustainable Society 10 EMGTI02

CHEMIOI CHEMI02 Australian Flora and Fauna 10 BIOLIOI BlOLI02

CHEMIOI CHEMI02 Systems Agriculture 10 ENVI03

CHEMIOI CHEMI02 credit points from

CHEM211 Coastal Systems Management 10 EMGT201 EMGT203 CHEM211 The PoUticsofEnvtronmental Health 10 EMGT202 CHEM26I Biodiversity and Wildlife ManagementiO EMGT203

Urban and Industrial Systems 10 EMGT204 CHEM211 MATIlI02 Water and Wastewater Systems (or MATIlI12) Management 10 EMGT201 CHEM221 Occupational Hygiene and TOxicology 10 BlOLIOI BIOLI02

for a Physical Sciences Major CHEM221 CHEM221 CHEM231 Physics 113 10 see (1)

CHEM231 Physics 114 10 PHYSJl3

!I

1·1, [Ii, '

1

I

I

Faculty of Sclence and Mathematic.

section Thr .. Undargraduate o.gr .. and Diploma Rula.

Feculty of Science end Mathamatlc.

Code Name Cp PnI""lulsltes Co""lulsltes SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

MATH 102 Mathematics 1 02 10 see (2) or MATH111 200 Level Minimum of thirty credit points from PHYS201 Quantum Mechanics and 10 MATH 102 PHYS113

Electromagnettsm PHYS 114 (see (3)) PHYS202 Mechanics and Thermal Physics 10 MAllil02 PHYS 113

PHYS 114 (see (3)) PHYS203 Solid State and Atomic Physics 10 PHYS201 PHYS205 Sclenttfic Measurement Principles.

Processes and Applications 10 PHYS112 and MATH201 Multtvartable Calculus 5 (MATH 102 & MATH 103)

or(MATHl11 & MATH I 12) or (MATH 102 & Permission ofH.O.D.)

300 Level Minimum of forty credit pOints from PHYS301 Mathematical Methods and

Quantum Mechanics 10 PHYS20lMATH20lMATH203 PHYS302 Electromagnetism and Electronics 10 PHYS201 MATH201 PHYS303 Atomic. Molecular and Soltd

State Physics 10 PHYS203 PHYS30 I PHYS304 Statistical Physics and Relativity 10 PHYS202 MATH201 PHYS305 Nuclear Physics and Advanced

Electromagnetism 10 PHYS302

(1) Advisory entry requirement - HSC 3 Unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/ ISO and Physics 2 Unit or Science 4 Unit with a performance in the top 50% of candlture for these subjects.

(2) Entry reqUirement - HSC 3 Unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150.

(3) MATH111 and MATH I 12 may substitute for MATH 102 and performance to an acceptable stan (Credit average) in PHYSlll and PHYS1l2 may substitute for PHYS113 and PHYS114 with tht approval of the Head of Department.

1 Interpretation

In this schedule. "cllsclplIne" means a branch of learning recognised as such by the Faculty Board.

2 guaUfication for the Degree

(1) To qualify for admlsslon to the degree. candidates shall pass subjects totalling 240 credit points of which at least 150 credit points shall be selected from the list of Approved Subjects in Group A and comprising:

(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level subjects;

(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects;

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects.

(2) The subjects shall be chosen in accordance with the following conditions:

(1) atleast 150 credit points from Group A subjects consisting of:

(a) the 60 credit points at the 100 level compristng at least 20 credit points chosen from each of three diSCiplines;

(b) a sequence of at least 20 credit points at the 100 level. 30 credit points at the 200 level and 40 credit points at the 300 level shall be chosen from a stngle discipline;

(c) not more than 160 credit points may be chosen from a single discipline; and

(d) subjects at the 300 level may not be chosen from more than three diSCiplines.

(tt) not more than 90 credit points from Group B.

(3) Enrolment in any Group B subject shall require the approval of the Dean.

3 Credit

3. (I) A candidate may be granted credit:

(a) forupto 160creditpointslnrecognitlon of subjects completed at another tertiary

section Thr .. Undergreduata DegrH and Diploma Rule.

institution which have not been prevlouslycounted towards acompleted award;

(b) for as many credit points as the Faculty Board determines in recognttlon of subjects completed in the University whlch have not been previously counted towards a completed award; and

(c) forupto I iOcreditpointsinrecognit1on for subjects completed and previously counted towards a completed award.

(2) Except with the permiSSion of the Dean. candidates granted credit in recognitton of workcompletedatanothermstttutton must complete at least 40 credit points at the 300 level at the University.

4 Time Requirement.

(I) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. acandidate shall complete the course within nine years of study.

(2) A candidate granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit is granted.

5 Combined Degree.

A candidate may undertake one of the follOwing combined degree programs in accordance with Rule 12 of the Rules Governing Academic awards. namely:

Science/ Arts

Science/Computer Science

Science/Engineering

Science/Laws

Science/Mathematics.

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are in the discipline areas of Biological Sciences. Chemistry. Geography. Geology. Mathematics. Physics and Psychology and are listed In Group A Subjects.


hetlon Thr .. Undergraduate Degree and Diploma Rule.

Code Name Cp Prerequisite. corequlsltel,Co<Ie GROUP A SUBJECTS CHEM323 BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

BIOLIOI Plant & Animal Biology 10 CHEM33I BIOLl02 Cell Biology, Genetics & Evolution 10 'CHEM332 B10L201 Biochemistry 10 BIOLIO I,BIOLI02 plus

CHEMIOI, CHEMI02' B10L202 Animal Physiology 10 BIOLIOl,BIOLI02 BIOL204 Cell & Molecular Biology 10 B10LIOI,B10LI02 B10L205 Molecular Genetics 10 BIOLIOl,BIOLI02 B10L206 Plant Physiology 10 BIOLIOl,BIOLI02 BIOL207 Ecology 10 BIOLIOl,BIOLI02 B10L208 Biochemistry 208 10 BIOL201 BIOL302 Reproductive Physiology 10 Two B10L200 BIOL303 Environmental Plant PhYSiology Not In 1994 BIOL305 Immunology 10 Two BIOL200 B10L309 Molecular Biology 10 BI0L20 I and BIOL205 B10L31O Microbiology 10 B10L20 I & one other

BIOL200 (BIOL204 advisable) B10L311 Environmental Biology 10 B10L207 B10L312 Animal Development Not In 1994 Two B10L200 BIOL313 Cellular BiochemiStry 10 BI0L20 I & one other BIOL200"

Students who have completed BI0[.304 are not eligible to enrol In this subject.

BIOL314 Plant Development 10 Two BIOL200 Students who have completed B10L304 are not eligible to enrol in this subject.

B10L315 Plant Molecular Biology 10 Two B10L200, Incl. one of B10L204 BI0L205 B10L206 B10L208. Students who have completed BI0L307 are not eligible to enrol In this subject.

B10L316 Cell Biology 10 Two BIOL200 CHEMISTRY GEOG31O CHEMIOI Chemistry 10 I 10 CHEMI02 Chemistry 102 10 GEOG311 CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI CHEMI02 GEOG315 CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI CHEMI02 CHEM231 OrganiC Chemistry 10 CHEM 101 CHEM 102 GEOG316 CHEM24I PhYSical Chemistry 10 CHEMIOI CHEMI02 CHEM251 Applied Chemistry NoUn 1994 CHEM 10 I CHEM 102 OIoLOGY CHEM26I Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM 101 CHEM 102 CHEM311 Analytical ChemlslIy 10 CHEM211 CHEM312 Chemometrics 5 CHEM211 MATH 102 or MATIl1I2 CHEM313 Industrial Chemical AnalysIs 5 CHEM211 CHEM314 Trace Analysts In

Environmental Systems NoUn 1994 CHEM211 CHEM32I Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEM221 CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding &

Cluster Chemistry 5 CHEM221

Name


Blotnorgantc Coordination ChemlslIy Organic ChemlslIy

Cp

5 10

Section Thr ..

Prerequisite.

CHEM22I CHEM231

Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Rule.

COrequlslte.

Heterocyclic Chemistry Not In 1994 CHEM231 Organic Reaction Mechanism 5 CHEM23I Identlftcatlon of Natural Compounds 5 CHEM23I Organic Spectroscopy 5 CHEM23I Physical ChemlslIy 10 CHEM241 MATIlI02

or MATIl1I2 Electrochemical Solar Energy 5 CHEM241 MATIlI02 Conversion or MATIl1I2 Molecular Spectroscopy 5 CHEM24I Environmental Chemistry 10 CHEM26I

Introduction to Physical Geography 10 see' Introduction to HUman Geography 10 see' Methods In Physical Geography 10 GEOGIOI Methods In Human Geography 10 GEOGI02 Biogeography & Climatology 10 GEOGIOI Geomorphology of Australia 10 GEOGIOI Population, Culture & Resources 10 GEOGl02 Cities & Regtons 10 GEOGI02 Advanced Methods In Physical 10 GEOG20l plus either Geography GEOG203 or GEOG204 Advanced Methods in Human 10 GEOG202 plus either Geography GEOG207 or GEOG208 The Biosphere & Conservation 10 GEOG201 GEOG203 GEOG204 Climatic Problems 10 GEOG201 GEOG203 Geography of Australia An 10 GEOG202 plus either Historical Perspective GEOG207 or GEOG208 Society & Space 10 GEOG202 plus either

GEOG207 or GEOG208 Directed Studies tn Human 10 GEOG202 plus either Geography GEOG207 or GEOG208 Hydrology 10 GEOG201 GEOG203 Production, Work & Territory 10 GEOG202 plus either

GEOG207 or GEOG208 Directed Studies In Physical 10 GEOG201 plus either Geography GEOG203 or GEOG204

The Environment 10 Earth Matertals 10 GEOLIOI Optical Mineralogy 5 GEOLI02 Introductory Petrology 10 GEOL211

Advisory CHEM 102 Ancient Environments & Organisms 10 GEOLI02 Geological Structures & Resources 10 GEOLI02 Geology Field Course 215 10 GEOLI02 Geology Field Course 216 5 GE0L215 GEOL214

Code

GEOL311

GEOL312 GEOL313 GEOL314 GEOL3IS GEOL316 GEOL317 GEOL318 GEOL319 GEOL320

Name

Faculty of Science and Mathemetlcs

Igneous Petrology & Crustal Evolution Metamorphic Petrology Structural Geology & Geophysics Stratigraphic Methods Sedtmentology Geology of Fuels Resource & Exploration Geology Geology Field Course 318 Geology Field Course 319 Geology of Quaternary Envtromnents

MATHEMATICS

MATIlll I Mathematics 111 MATIl112 Mathematics 112# MATIl102 Mathematics 102# MATIl103 Mathematics 103

MATIl201 Multtvariable Calculus

MATIl202 Partial Differential Equations 1 MATIl203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1

MATIl204 Real Analysis

MATIl205 AnalysIs of Metrtc Spaces MATIl206 Complex Analysis I

MATIl207 Complex Analysis 2 MATIl209 Algebra MATIl210 Geometry 1

MATIl211 Group Theory

MATIl212 Discrete Mathematics

MATIl213 Mathematical Modelltng

MATIl214 Mechanics

Cp

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 S S 10

10 10 10 10

S

5 5

S

S S

5 5 5

5

5

5

5

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Rula.

Prerequlaltu Corequlsltes

GEOL312 GEOL212 GEOL214 GEOL213 GEOL212 GEOL213 GEOL213 GE0L212 GEOL214 GEOL213 GE0L216 GEOL313 GE0L213 or GEOG204

2 unit HSe Mathematics MA'Illll I See 20r MATIllll MATIl102 or (MATIl111 & MA'Ill112) or permission of H.O.D. of Mathematics (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATH I 11 & MATIl112) or (MATH 102 & Permission of the H.O.D.') MATIl201 MATIl203 (MATH 102 & MA'Ill 103) or (MATH III & MA'Ill112) or (MATH 102 & Permission of the H.O.D.'). (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATH III & MATIl112 & MATH 103)

MATIl204' (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or MATIl20l (MATH I II & MATIlI 12) or (MATH 102 & Permission of H.O.D.') MA'Ill206 & MATIl103 MATIl103 MATIl21S' (MATHI02 & MA'Ill103) or (MATH III & MATIl112 & MATIlI03) (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATH III & MA'Ill112 & MATIlI03) MATIl102 or MATIl103 or (MATH I 11 & MATIlI12) (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATH I 11 & MATIl112) MA'Ill102 & MATIlI03 or (MATH 11 I & MATH 112 & MATH 103)

Code MATIl2lS

MATIl216

tMATIl217

tMATIl218

MATIl301

MATIl302 MATIl303

MA'Ill304

MA'Ill305

MA'Ill306

MA'Ill307

MA'Ill308

MA'Ill309 MA'Ill310 MA'Ill311 MA'Ill312 MA'Ill313

MA'Ill314 MA'Ill315

MA'Ill316

MA'Ill317 MA'Ill318 MAQM2i4"

11 12 13 14

Name


Operations Research

NumertcaJ Analysis

Linear Algebra 1

Linear Algebra 2

Logic & Set Theory

General Tensors & Relativity Variational Methods and Integral Equations

Cp

S

S

S

S

10

10


Prerequlaltu Corequlsltes MATIlI02 or MA'Ill103 or (MATIlll I & MA'Ill112) (MATIlI02 & MA'Ill103) or (MATIllll & MATIl112 & COMPIOI) or (MATIlIII & MATIl112 & MA'Ill103) MATIlI02 or (MATIlIII & MA'Ill112) (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATH I 11 & MATIll12 & MA'Ill103) 20 cp from 200 level MATIl Incl. one of MATH204 MATIl209 MATIl211 MATIl212 MATIl218' MATIl201 MATIl218'

Not In 1994 MATIl20 I MATIl203 MATIl204'

Ordinary Differential Equations 2 10 MATIl20 I MA'Ill203 MATIl204' MATIl218'

Partial Differential Equations 2 Not In 1994 MATIl20 I MATIl202 MATIl203 MATIl204'

FlUid Mechanics Nottn 1994 MATIl20 I MATIl203 Advisory MATIl204' MATIl206 MA'Ill207

Quantum & Statistical Not In 1994 MATIl20 I MATIl203 Mechanics MA'Ill206 Geometry 2 10 20 c.p. from 200 level MATH

Incl. one of MATH209 MATIl211 MATIl218'

Comblnator1cs Not In 1994 MATIl218' Functional Analysis 10 MATIl205 Measure Theory & Integratton 10 MATIl205 Algebra Nottn 1994 MATIl211 MATIl218' Numertcal Analysis (Theory) 10 MATIl20 I MATIl203

MATIl204' MATIl218' Optimization 10 MATH20 I MA'Ill218' Mathematical Biology 10 MATIl20 I MA'Ill203

MATIl213 Industrial Modelling 10 MATIl20 I MATIl202

MATIl203 MATIl213 MA'Ill216 & Permission of H.O.D.

Number Theory 10 30 c.p. from 200 level MATH Topology Not In 1994 MATH204' or MA'Ill205 Quantitative Methods Not In 1994 INFO 101 & STATIOI

PhYSiCS I I I 10 See6

Physics 112 10 PHYS III or See6

Physics 113 10 See7

Physics 114 10 PHYS113

Code

PHYS201

PHYS202

PHYS203 PHYS205

PHYS301

PHYS302 PHYS303

PHYS304 PHYS305

Name

Faculty of SC .. nce and Methematlc.

Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism Mechanics & Thennal Physics

SoUd State & Atomic Physics Scientific Measurement Principles. Processes and Applications Mathematlcal Methods & Quantum Mechanics Electromagnetism & Electronics Atomic, Molecular & Solid State Physics Statistical Physics & Relativity Nuclear Physics & Advanced Electromagnetism

Section Thr ..

CJI PrerequUltu

10 MATH 102 PHYS113 PHYS114'

10 MATH 102 PHYSI13 PHYS114'

10 PHYS201

10 PHYS112 10 PHYS201 MATH201

MATH203 10 PHYS201 MATH201

10 PHYS203 PHYS301 10 PHYS202 MATH201

10 PHYS302

PSYCHOLOGY

PSYC101 PSYC102 PSYC202 PSYC205 PSYC206 PSYC207 PSYC208 PSYC209 PSYC110 PSYC301

PSYC302 PSYC303 PSYC304 PSYC305 PSYC306

Psychology Introduction I 10 See' Psychology Introductlon 2 10 PSYC 10 1 Basic Processes 10 PSYC 102 Applied Topics In Psychology 1 Notln 1994 PSYC 102 Applled Topics In Psychology 2 Not In 1994 PSYC 102 Experimental Methodology 10 PSYC 102 Psychobiology 10 PSYC 102 Personality and Social Processes 10 PSYC 1 02 Developmental Psychology 10 PSYC 102 Advanced Foundations for Psychology Independent Project Basic Processes 1 Basic Processes 2 Individual Processes Advanced Social Processes

10 10 10 10 10 10

PSYC201 or PSYC207 PSYC201 or PSYC207 PSYC2010rPSYC207 PSYC2010rPSYC207 PSYC2010rPSYC207 PSYC2010rPSYC207

PSYC307 Advanced Applied Topics In Psychology 1 10 PSYC20 I or PSYC207

PSYC308 Advanced Applled Topics In Psychology 2 10 PSYC201 or PSYC207

PSYC309 Topics in Neural Science Not In 1994 PSYC201 or PSYC207

GROUP B SUBJECTS

Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Aul ••

Corequlsltea

PSYC207@ PSYC207@ PSYC207@


PSYC301

Group B Subjects may be chosen from subjects offered in courses leading to other degrees of the Ur,lv,,"slty •• and must be approved by the Dean.

Footnotes

The normal pattern for the Bachelor of Science degree is 80 credit points at 100 level. 80 credit poinD ..

•

Faculty of Sc"nca and Mathematics

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Aule.

Students should note that GEOG 10 1 and GEOG 1 02 are prerequlsltJes for a major study In Geography, and for admission to Geography Honours GEOG40 1.

Entry requirement - HSC 3 Unit Mathematlcs with a mark of atleast 120/150,

3 This option Is for students who take MATI-Il03 in second semester.

• MATH2081n 1990.

Students who have passed Mathematlcs lin 1989 or before do not need MATH204.

II AdviSOry entry reqUirement HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a perfonnance In the top 30% of candidature.

Advisory entry requirement HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/ 150 and 2 unit Physics or 4 unit Science with a performance in the top 50% of candidature for these subjects.

• Perfonnance to an acceptable level In PHYS11I and PHYS112 may substltute for PHYSI13 and PHYSI14 with the approval of Head of Department. MATH 11 I and MATH 1 12 may substitute for MATH 102.

• Students who are not enrolled In a Bachelor of Science (Psychology), Bachelor of Arts (Psychology) or Bachelor of Social Work are eligible to enrol in PSYC 101 only on achieving a Tertiary Entrance Rank, orequtvalent. equal to or greater than theTER reqUired for admission to either the Bachelor ofSctence (Psychology) or the Bachelor of Arts (Psychology). whichever Is the lesser.

#

t

• ..

Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH 1 12 and MATH 102.

Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH217 and MATH218.

Credit cannot be obtained for both MATH215 and MAQM214.

As a transltton arrangement, CHEMIOI and CHEMI02 maybe taken as corequtsites tn 1994.

1995 prerequisites will be BI0L201 and BIOL208 .

PSYC201 may be substituted for PSYC207.

200 level and 80 credit points at 300 level. ) j,

Leave of Absence - For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards. a candidate be deemed to be In good standing If, at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course, candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.


SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (AVIATION)

1 QualifIcation for the Degree

(1) To qualify for admission 10 the degree. candldates shall pass subjects IotalUng 240 credlt points selected from the list of Approved Subjects and comprtslog

(a) atleast 60 credit points from 100 level Group A subjects;

(h) at least 60 credlt points from 200 level subjects of which 50 credit points shall be from Group A; and

(c) at least 60 credlt points from 300 level subjects of which 40 credit points shall be from Group A.

2 Credit

(I) Credlt may be granted for studlescompleted which quallfied the candidate for an award of the University or for studies completed at another Institution up to a total of 120 credit points.

(2) Credit may be granted for all subjects completed in the University which have not already been counted towards a completed award.

3 Time Requirement.

(I) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, acandldate shall complete the course within nine years of study.

(2) A candidate granted credlt shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credlt Is granted.

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degr" and Diploma Rule.

APPROVED SUBJECTS


Section Thr ..

The subjects approved' by the Faculty Board for the award are

Code Name Cp

. GROUP A SUBJECTS

100 Level

AVlAI09 Introductory Meteorology 5 AVIAIIO Introductory Navigation 5 AVIAIll Introductory AerodynamiCS 5 AVlAI12 Introductory HUman Factors 10 AVlA1l3 Aircraft Performance & Systems 5 AVlAl14 Flight Rules & Procedures 5 AVlAl15 Reciprocating Engines 5 AVlAl16 Commercial Meteorology 5 AVIA 11 7 Navigation 5 AVlAl18 Aerodynamics 5 AVlAl19 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 AVlAl20 Aviation Law. Commercial Flight

Rules & Procedures 10 AVlAl21 Aircraft Systems & PropulSion 5 AVlAl23 Aircraft Performance & Loading 5 200 Level AVlA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 AVlA208 Instrument Navigation 5 AVlA209 Long Range Navigation 5 AVlA211 Jet Engines 5 AVlA212 Human Factors 10 AVlA213 Aircraft Structures & Materials 5 AVlA214 Jet Aircraft Flight PlannIng 10 AVlA218 Advanced Aircraft Performance 5 AVlA219 High Altitude Meteorology and

Forecasting 5 AVlA22 I Human Performance tn

Multi-Crew Operations 5 300 Level

AVlA306 Advanced Aircraft Operations 10 AVlA308 Aviation Instruction 10 AVlA310 Advanced Navigation 10 AVlA311 Advanced Aviation Instruction 10 AVlA316 Fltght Deck Performance 5 AVlA318 Aircraft Stability and Control 5

BSUBJECTS

CompreSSible AerodynamiCS 5 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 Management of Aviation 5 Aviation Computing and Electronics 5

Pre""lulsltes

AVlAI09 AVIAIIO AVIAIll AVlAI12

AVlAl14

AVlAl13

AVlAl16 AVlA1l7 AVlA1I7 60 cp A VIA 100 Level AVlAl19 60 cp A VIA 100 Level AVlA1I7 AVlAl23

AVlA207

AVlA2l2

AVlA214 60 cp A VIA 200 Level AVlA209 AVlA308 AVlA22 I AVlA1I8

AVlAl18 AVlA213 AVlAl20 AVlAl2l

Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Rule.

Corellulsltes

900 Level AVIA305 AVIA312 AVIA314

AVIA315 AVIA317 AVIA320 AVIA32 I

Faculty of SCience end Mathematics

AIrcraft Design Applted Aerodynamtcs Directed Study

Advanced Aviation Management Avtation Climatology Avtation Instruction Practicum I Avtation Instruction Practlcum II

5 5 10

5 5 5 5

Section Thr ..

AVIA213 AVIA318 AVIA223

AVIA222 AVIA207

A VIA308 A VIA320

Undergraduate Degr .. end Diploma Rule.

AVIA318

At least two of the followtng A VIA306 . AVIA308 AVIA311

AVIA308 AVIA311

Faculty of SCience and Mathemetlc.

SCHEDULE- BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

1 QUaBflcadOD for the Dearee

(1) To qualIfY for admission to the degree a candtdate shall pass subject$ totalUng 240 credtt points from the Ust of Approved Subjects and comprtslng:

(a)

(h)

not more than 80 credit points from 100 level subjects of which 20 credit points shall be from Group A;

at least 70 credit points from 200 level subjects of which:

(I) at least 25 credtt points shall be from Group A;

(U) at least 5 credit points shall be from Group B subjects; and

(UI) at least a further 30 credit points shall be from Group Band/or Group C;

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which:

(I) at least 40 credit points shall be from Group A: and

(U) at least a further 40 credit points shall be from Group A and/or Group C.

:I credit

2. (1) A candidate may be granted credit:

(a) forupto 18OcredttpointsinrecognlUon ofsubjectscompletedatanothertertlary institution which have not previously counted towards a completed award;

(b) for as many credit points as the Faculty Board determlns In recognition of subjects completed in the University which have not been prevtouslycounted towards a completed award; and

(c) for u p to 110 credit points In recognition for subjects completed and prevtously counted towards a completed award.

(2) Except wtth the permission of the Dean. candidates granted credit In recognitton of workcompletedatanotherinstttution must complete atleast 40 credit points at the 300 level at the University.

Section Thr .. Undergradua .. Degr .. and Diploma Rul ••

9

4

TIme Requirement. (I) Except wtth the permission of the Faculty

Board, acandidate shall complete the course within nine years of study, from its commencement.

(2) A candtdate who has been granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit Is granted.

ComhIDed Degree.

A candidate may undertake one of the follOWing combined degree programs in accordance with Rule 12 of the Rules Governing Academic awards, namely:

Mathematics/Arts;

Mathematics/Commerce;

Mathematics/Economics;

Mathemattcs/Englneertng;

Mathematics/ Compu ter Science;

Mathematics/Science;

Mathemattcs/Surveytng.



APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved' by the Faculty Board for the award are:

Code Name Cp Prerequisites GROUP A SUBJECTS

MATIl102 Mathematics 1021 10 See' or MATIlIII MATIl103 Mathematics 103 10 MATIl102 or (MATIlIII

& MATH I 12) or permission of H.O.D. of Mathematics.

MATIl II 2 Mathematics 1121 10 MATIl11 I MATIl201 Multivartable Calculus 5 (MATH 102 & MATIlI03)

or (MATIlIlI & MATIl112) or (MATIlI02 & Permission ofH.O.D.')

MATIl203 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 5 (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATIlIII & MATIl112) or (MATH 102 & Permission ofH.O.D.')

MATH204 Real Analysis 5 (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATIlIII & MATIll12 & MATH 103)

MATIl206 Complex Analysis 1 5 (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) MATIl201 or (MATIl11 I & MATIlI12) or (MATIlI02 & Permission ofH.O.D.')

MATIl21B Linear Algebra 2 5 (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATH 11 I & MATH 112 & MATIlI03)

MATIl301 logic & Set Theory 10 20 credit points from 200 level MATH incl. one of MATH204. MATH209. MATIl211. MATH212. MATIl2IB'

MATIl302 General Tensors & Relativity 10 MATIl201 MATIl2IB' MATIl303 Vartational Methods and Not In 1994 MATIl201 MATIl203

Integral Equations MATIl204' MATIl304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 10 MATIl20 I MATIl203

MATIl204' MATIl21 B' MATIl305 Partial Differential Equations 2 Not In 1994 MATIl201 MATIl202

MATIl203 MATIl204' MATIl306 Fluid Mechanics Not In 1994 MATIl201 MATIl203

MATIl204' MATIl206 MATIl307 Quantum & Statistical Not In 1994 MATIl20 I MATIl203

Mechanics MATIl206 MATIl30B Geometry 2 10 20c. p. from 200 level

MATIl Incl.one of MATIl209 MATIl211 MATIl21 B' MATIl309 CombinatoIics Not In 1994 MATIl2IB'

MATIl310 Functional Analysts 10 MATIl205 MA1li311 Measure Theory & Integration MA1li312

10 MATIl205 Algebra

Nottn 1994 MA1li2 II MATIl21B'

··eode MATH313

14 MATH315

MATH316

MATH317 MATH31B STAT301 STAT302 STAT303

STAT304

STAT310

Name


Numertcal AnalysIs (Theory)

Optimtzation Mathematical Biology

Industrial Modelling

Number Theory Topology Statistical Inference Study Design Generalized Linear Models

Time Series Analysts

Total Quality Management

GROUP B SUBJECTS

MATH213 Mathematical Modelling

MATH214 Mechanics

MATH215 Operations Research

GROUP C SUBJECTS

MATH II I Mathematics III MATH202 Partial Differential Equations 1 MATH205 Analysis of Metrtc Spaces MATH207 Complex AnalYSiS 2 ldATH209 Algebra MATH210 Geometry 1

MATH211 Group Theory

Discrete Mathematics

6 Numertcal Analysts

Quantum Mechanics & Electromagnetism

Cp

10

10 10

10

10

Section Thr ..

Prerequisites MATH201 MATIl203 MATH2046 MATIl21 B' MATIl201 MATIl2IB' MATIl20 I MATIl203 MATH213 MATH201 MATIl202 MATH203 MATIl213

Undergraduate Degree and Diploma Rules

Corequlsltes

MATH216 & Permission ofH.O.D. 30 c. p. from 200 level MATH

Not In 1994 MATH204 or MATH205 10 STATZOI & MATH201 10 STATZOI & STATZ02 10 STATZOI & STATZ02

Advisory STAT30 I 10 STATZO I & STATZ02

Advisory STAT30 I 10 Pennission of Head of

Department of Statistics

5 (MATH 102 & MATIlI03) or (MATH II I & MATH I 12)

5 (MATH!02 & MATHI03) or (MATIlIlI & MATIl112 & MATIlI03)

5 MATH 102 or MATIlI03 or (MATH II I & MATIlI12)

10 2 unit HSC Mathematics 5 MATIl201 MATH203 5 MATIl204' 5 MATH206 MATIl103 5 MATIl103 MATIl21B' 5 (MATH 102 & MATIlI03)

or (MATIlIlI & MATIll12 & MATIlI03)

5 (MATH 102 & MATH 103) or (MATIlIlI & MATH 112 & MATIlI03)

5 MATIl102 or MATIlI03 or (MATH 111 & MATIlIl2)

5 (MATH! 02 & MATIlI03) or (MATH III & MATIl1l2 & COMPIOI) or (MATH II I & MATHI12 & MATIlI03)

10 MATIl103 PHYS 113 PHYS114B

Code

PHYS202

PHYS203 PHYS205

PHYS30l

PHYS302 PHYS303

PHYS304 PHYS305

Name

Fecully of 8010_ ond Mo"'_U ..

Mechanics & Thennal Physics

Solid State & Atomic Physics Scientific Measurement Principles Processes and Applications • Mathematical Methods & Quantum Mechanics Electromagnetism & Electronics Atomic. Molecular & Solid State Physics Statistical Physics & Relativity Nuclear Physics & Advanced Electromagnetism

Q>

10

10

10 10

10

10 10

10 STATISTICS

STAT20l Mathematical StatisUcs9 10

STAT202 Regression Analysis 10

STAT205 Engineering Stattstics9 STAT206 Design and AnalysIs of

5

Experiments and Surveys 10 COMPUTER SCIENCE COMP221 Comparative Programming 10

Languages

COMP222 Theory of Computation COMP223 AnalysIs of Aigortthms

10

COMP224 The Unix Operating System 10 10

COMP225 ArtifiCial Intelligence 2 10

COMP32I Software Engineering & Project 20

COMP322 Computer ViSion and Robotics 10

COMP323 Computational Logic 10 COMP324 Parallel Processing COMP325 Database Systems

10

COMP326 Data Security 10 10

COMP327 Principles of Operating Systems 10

SectIon Th,..

Prerequlaltu

MATIlI02 PHYS113 PHYS114" PHYS20l

PHYS112 PHYS20l MATIl20l MATIl203 PHYS20l MATIl20l

PHYS203 PHYS30 I PHYS202 MATIl20 1

PHYS302

MATH 103 or STATlOl

Undergr.duate Degree end Dlplol11ll Rul ••

& MATIlIl2 (or equivalent level of Mathematics) STAT2010rSTATlOI & MATHlI2/MATH102 (or equivalent level of Mathematics] MATH 112 or MATIl102

STAT201

COMPlll (Assumed Knowledge COMP1l2 or COMPlI3] COMPIl2 & COMPI13 COMP112 Assumed Knowledge COMPlll COMPll3 (Assumed Knowledge COMPI12) COMPIII (Assumed Knowledge COMP221 and COMP224) COMP225 (Assumed Knowledge MATIlI12) COMP222 COMP223 & ELEC 170 COMPI12 COMP1l2 (Assumed Knowledge COMP325) ELEC 170 (Assumed Knowledge COMP223 & COMP224)

Faculty of Selene. and Mathematic.

Section Three Undergraduate DegrH and Diploma Rule.

Code Name Cp Prerequlsltu Conoqulsltes

COMP328 Computer Networks 10 COMPIl2 & ELECI70 (Assumed Knowledge COMP223 & COMP224)

COMP329 CompHer Design 10 COMP221 (Assumed Knowledge ELEC 170)

COMP330 Graphic User Interfaces 10 COMPIl2 (Assumed Knowledge COMP221 &COMP224)

COMP33I Geometric Data Structures 10 COMPIl2 (Assumed Knowledge COMP223)

COMP332 Computer Graphics 10 COMPIl2 & MATIlll2 (Assumed Knowledge MATIl217)

Footnotes

The normal pattern for the Bachelor of Mathematics Degree Is 80 credit points at 100 level. SO credit points at 200 level and 80 credit points at 300 level.

Leave of Absence - For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards. a candidate shall be deemed to be In good standing if. at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course. that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.

• , •

7

•

Credit cannot be obtained for both MATIll12 and MATH 102.

Entry requirement - HSC 3 Unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150.

Thts option Is for students who take MATH 103 in second semester.

MATIl208 In 1990.

Students who have passed Mathematics I In 1989 or before do not need MA1l-I204.

Advisory entry requirement: HSC 2 unit Mathematics with performance In the top 30% of candidature.

AdviSOry entry requirement: HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/1SO and 2 Unit PhYSiCS or 4 Unit Science with a perfonnance In the top 500/0 of candidature for these subjects.

Students achieving a Credit level or better In PHYS 101 and PHYSI12 may be admitted with approval of the Head of Department.

Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT20 I and STAT205.

Other approved subjects may be chosen from the schedules for the degrees offered elsewhere In the University, if approved by the Dean.


SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (PSYCHOLOGy)

1

2

3

4

interpretation

In this schedule "cIItoclpUne" means a branch oflearnlng recognisedas such by the Faculty Board.

QuaHftcation for the Degree

To qualify for admission to the degree, a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 320 credit points from the Itst of Approved Subjects and comprising -

(a) at least 60 credit points from 100 level subjects of which -

(I) 20 credit points shall be grom Group A subjects; and

(II) 40 credit points shall be comprised of20 credit points from each of two disciplines;

(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects ofwhtch 40 credit points shall be grom Group A subjects;

(c) at least 80 credit points from 300 level subjects of which 60 credit points shall be from Group A subjects; and

(d) 80 credit points from 400 level subjects taken from Group A subjects.

Grading of the Degree

(I) Thedegree shall be conferred as an Ordinary Degree except that, where the performance of a candidate has reached a standard determined by the Faculty Board to be of sufficient merit. the degree shall be conferred with Honours.

(2) There shall be three classes of Honours, namely Class I. Class Il and Class Ill. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.

Credit

4. (I) A candidate may be granted credit:

(a) for up to 160credit points in recognition of subjects completed at another tertiary Institution which have not been previously counted towards a completed award;

(b) for as many credit points as the Faculty Board determines In recognttton of subjects completed In the Universltywhtch have not

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Rula.

been previously counted towards a completed award; and

(c) for up to 110 credit points In recognition for subjects completed and previously counted towards a completed award.

(2) Except with the permission of the Dean. candidates granted credit In recognition of workcompletedatanotherfnstttutton must completeatleast40credltpolntsat the 300 level at the University.

5 TIme Requirements

(I) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board.,acandtdate shall complete thecourse within eleven years of study, from Its commencement.

(2) A candidate who has been granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credit Is granted.

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subJects approved by the Facul ty Board for the award consist of the followtng prescribed Group A


Section Thr ..

and Group B subjects:

GROUP A SUBJECTS

Code Name Cp Prerequisites 100 Level

PSYCIOI Psychology Introduction I 10 See' PSYCI02 Psychology Introduction 2 10 PSYCIOI

200 Level

PSYC202 Basic Processes 10 PSYCI02 PSYC205 Applied Topics in Psychology I Not In 1994 PSYC 102 PSYC206 Applied Topics In Psychology 2 Not in 1994 PSYC 102 PSYC207 Experimental Methodology 10 PSYCI02 PSYC20B Psychobiology 10 PSYCI02 PSYC209 Personaltty and Social Processes 10 PSYCI02 PSYC210 Developmental Psychology 10 PSYCI02 300 Level PSYC301 Advanced Foundations for

Psychology 10 PSYC201 or PSYC207 PSYC302 Independent Project 10 PSYC2010rPSYC207 PSYC303 Basic Processes 1 10 PSYC2010rPSYC207 PSYC304 Basic Processes 2 10 PSYC201 or PSYC207 PSYC305 Individual Processes 10 PSYC201 or PSYC207 PSYC306 Advanced Social Processes 10 PSYC20lorPSYC207 PSYC307 Advanced Applied Topics in

Psychology 1 10 PSYC201 or PSYC207 PSYC308 Advanced Applied Topics In

Psychology 2 10 PSYC201 or PSYC207 PSYC309 Topics tn Neural Science Nolin 1994 PSYC201 or PSYC207 400 Level PSYC401 Psychology Honours 40 I 40 See lO

PSYC402 Psychology Honours 402 40 PSYC403 Psychology 403 30 Consult Dept. PSYC404 Psychology 404 50 Footnotes

Undergraduate Degr .. and Diploma Rula.

Corequlsltes



PSYC301

PSYC40l

PSYC403

Students who are not enrolled In a Bachelor of Science (Psychology), Bachelor of Arts (Psychology) or Bachelor of Social Work are eltgtble to enrol In PSYCIOI only on achieving a Tertiary Entrance Rank (or eqUivalent) equal to or greater than theTER required for admission to either the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) of Bachelor of Arts (Psychology). whichever Is the lesser.

10 Enby to PSYC40 1 and PSYC402 in the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) degree reqUires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining a Credit grade In each of four 300 level subjects including PSYC30 I and PSYC302. Additional conditions apply; see the Department for details.

@ PSYC201 may be substituted for PSYC207.

GROUP B SUBJECTS

Group B Subjects are In the followtng disctpltne areas: Biological Sciences, Chemistry. Geography, Geology. Mathematics and Physics: they are referred to In the Bachelor of Science Schedule of Approved Group A Subjects (excepting the discipline of Psychology).

Faculty of Science and Math.matlc.

SCHEDULE - DIPLOMAINAVlATIONSCIENCE

I guaUficatioD for the Diploma

(I) To qualify for admission to the diploma a candidate shall pass subjects totalltng 160 credit potnts from the list of Approved Subjects and comprtslng -

(a) atleast 60 credit points from 100 level Group A subjects; and

(b) at least 60 credit points from 200 level subjects Including at least 50 credit points from Group A subjects.

2 Grading

(2) In cases where a candidate's performance in the course has reached a level detennined by the Faculty Board. on the recommendation of the Board of Studies In Aviation, the Diploma may be conferred with Mertt.

3 Time Requirements

(I) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. acandidate shall complete the course within six years of study.

(2) A candidate who has been granted credit shall be deemed to have commenced the course from a date determined by the Dean at the time at which credtt Is granted.

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are:

Section Thr .. Undergraduate Degree and Diploma Rul ••

Faculty of SCience and Mathematic.

GROUP A SUBJECTS

Code Name 100 Level

AVIAI09 Introductory Meteorology AVIAIIO Introductory Navigation AVIAlIl Introductory Aerodynamics AVIA II 2 Introductory Human Factors AVIA II 3 Aircraft Performance & Systems AVIA1I4 Flight Rules & Procedures AVIA1I5 Reciprocating Engines AVIA1I6 Commercial Meteorology AVIA II 7 Navigation AVIAl18 AerodynamiCS AVIAl19 Aviation Psychology & Medicine AVIA120 Aviation Law. Commercial Flight

Rules and Procedures AVIA12 I Aircraft Systems & Propulsion AVIA123 Aircraft Performance & loading 200 Level AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology AVIA208 Instrument Navigation AVIA209 Long Range Navigation AVIA211 Jet Engines AVIA212 Human Factors AVIA213 Aircraft Structures & Matertals AVIA214 Jet Aircraft Flight Planntng AVIA218 Advanced Aircraft Performance AVIA219 High Altitude Meteorology and

Forecasting AVIA221 Human Performance In Multi-Crew

Operations GROUP B SUBJECTS AVIA210 Compressible Aerodynamtcs AVIA220 Aircraft Fatigue Management AVIA222 Management of Aviation

Cp

5 5 5 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

10 5 5

5 5 5 5 10 5 10 5

5

5

5 5 5

AVIA223 Aviation Computing and Electronics 5 Footnotes

Section Thr ..

Pre""lulsltea

AVIAI09 AVIA110 AVIAllI AVIA1I2

AVIAl14

AVIA1I3

AVIAl16 AVIA II 7 AVIA II 7 60 cp A VIA I 00 Level AVIAI19 60 cp AVIAIOO Level AVIA1I7 AVIA123

AVIA207

AVIA212

AVIA1I8 AVIA213 AVIA120 AVIAI21

Undergraduate Degree and Diploma Rul ••

The normal pattern for the Diploma In Aviation Science course Is 80 credtt points at 100 level and 80 credtt points at 200 level.

Leave of Absence - For the purposes of Rule 10 ofthe Rules Governing AcademiC Awards, a candidate shall be deemed to be In good standing if, at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment in the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions .

• Refers to the list of approved subjects In the Schedule - Bachelor of Science Group A Subjects.

section four

Approved Subjects for the Bachelor Degrees

List Of Approved Subjects Referred To In Bachelor Degree Schedules

F = Full Year; Sl = Semester 1; 82 = Semester 2

APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

EDvirolllDenta) Aue •• ment IUld Management .ubJeeu AvaUable onJy to Bachelor of AppUed Science Environmental Aue .. ment IUld Management clUldJdatu

Prerequiute. Corequleltee Number Subject PoiDt. Whe .. H/W 1994 19915 1994 EAMC2Q3 Environment and Human

Values II 10 SI 3 EAMCI03 EAMCI13 EAMC213 Development and Social

Impact Assessment 10 S2 3 EAMC 103 EAMC 113 EAMC203

EAMC303 Occupational Hygiene & TOxicology 10 F 3 EAMC203

EAMC313 Social Aspects of Environmental Health 10 S2 3 EAMC203 EAMC213 EAMC303

EAMS201 Agricultural Systems 10 SI 4 EAMS101 EAMSlll EAMS211 Industrial and Urban

Systems 10 S2 4 EAM8101 EAMSlll EAM8201 EAMS202 System Dynamics and

Data Analysts I 10 SI 5 EAMSI02 EAMSI12 EAMS212 System Dynamics and

DataAnalysls II 10 S2 5 EAMS 102 EAMSl12 EAMS202 EAMS290 Hydrology and 801ls

Analysis 10 SI 4 EAMSI02 EAMS112 EAMS291 Water Resources

Management 10 S2 4 EAMSI02 EAMS112 EAMS292 Plant Systematics and

Plant Ecology 10 SI 4 EAMSlOl EAMSlll EAMS293 Animal Systematics and

Animal Ecology 10 S2 4 EAMS101 EAMSlll EAMS292

NIUI1ber

EAMS301

EAMS311

EAMS302

EAMS304

EAMS314

EAMS390

EAMS394

AVIATION

Faculty of Scle~ and Math.."atlea

Subject PoIDto

Environmental Management I 10 Em.1ronmental Management II 10

Specialist Study 20

Regional and National Environmental Issues 10 Environmental Impact Assessment 10 SoU Conservation and Management 10 Flora and Fauna Component of Environ-mental Impact Assessment 10

Whe ..

SI

S2

F

SI

S2

F

F

Section Four Approv.d Subjecta for Bachelor Degree.

Pz'erequlaltu CorequIHte. 1994 H/W 1_ 19915

4 EAMS201 EAMS211

4 EAMS201 EAMS211 EAMS301

4 All Prescribed 200 level subjects

4 EAMSI04 EAMS114

4 EAMSI04 EAMS114

2 EAMS290

2 EAMS292 EAMS293

AvaUable only to Bachelor of Science (AvlaUon) candldatu

AVIAI09 Introductory Meteorology 5 SI 3

AVIAll0 Introductory Navigation 5 SI 3

AVIAlll Introductory Aerodynamics 5 SI 3

AVlAl12 Introductory Human Factors 10 SI 4

AVIA113 Aircraft Perfonnance & Systems 5 SI 3

AVlAl14 Flight Rules & Procedures 5 SI 2

AVIA115 Reciprocating Engtnes 5 SI 2

AVIAl16 Commercial Meteorology 5 S2 3 AVlAI09 AVlA1l7 Navigation 5 S2 3 AVlAllO AVIAllB Aerodynamics 5 S2 3 AVIAlll

AVIA119 Aviation Psychology & Medicine 5 S2 3 AVIA112

AVIAI20 Aviation Law, Commercial Flight Rules and Procedures 10 S2 4 AVIA1l4

AVIAI21 Aircraft Systems &

Propulsion 5 S2 3

AVIAI23 Aircraft Perfonnance & Loading 5 S2 3 AVIA113

AVIA207 Aviation Meteorology 5 SI 3 AVIAl16 AVIA208 Instrument Navtgation 5 SI 3 AVIA1l7

AVIA209 Long Range Navigation 5 SI 3 AVIA117

AVIA210 Compressible Aerodynamics 5 SI 3 AVIAllB

AVIA211 Jet Engtnes 5 S2 3 60 cp AVlAlOO Level AVIA212 Human Factors 10 SI 4 AVIA119

AVIA213 Aircraft Structures &

Materials 5 SI 3 60 cp AVIA 100 Level

AVIA214 Jet Aircraft Flight Planning 10 S2 6 AVIA1l7 AVIA2IB Advanced Aircraft

Perfonnance 5 SI 3 AVIAI23


Section Four Approvod SubJects for Bachelor Degr ...

N1IJIIber Subject PolDto Whoa R/VI

AVIA219 High Altitude Meteorology

AVIA220 AVIA221

and Forecasting 5 Aircraft Fatigue Management 5 Human Performance in MulU-Crew Operations 5

AVIA222

AVIA223

Management of Aviation 5 Aviation Computing and Electronics 5

AVlA305

AV1A306

AV1A308

AV1A31O AV1A311

Aircraft Design 5 Advanced Aircraft. Operations 10 Aviation Instntction 10

Advanced Navigation 10 Advanced Aviation Instruction 10

AVIA312 AV1A314

Applied Aerodynamics 5

Directed Study 10

AV1A315 Advanced Aviation

Management 5 AV1A316

AV1A317 AV1A3IB

Fl1ght Deck Perfonnance 5 Aviation Climatology 5 Aircraft Stabil1ty and Control 5

AVIA320 Aviation Instruction

Practicum I AVIA321 Aviation Instntction

Practicum II

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

BIOL101 Plant & Antmal Biology

BIOLI02 Cell Blology. Genetics &

Evolution BI01..201 Biochemistry

BI01..202 Animal Physiology BI01..204 Cell & Molecular Biology 8101..205 Molecular Genetics BI01..206 Plant Physiology BI01..207 Ecology

BI01..208 Biochemistry 208 BIOL302 Reproductive Physiology BI0I.303 Environmental Plant

PhYSiology 8101.305 ImmWlology

5

5

10

10 10

10

10

10 10

10

10 10

10 10

52 52

52

52

52

51

51 51

51

52

52 FY

52

52 51 51

51

52

51

52 51

3 3

3

3

3 3

4

4

4

4

3 2

3

3

3 3

2

2

6

6 6

51 6

52 6 51 6 52 6

52 6

52 6

52 6 Not in

1994 6 52 6

Prereqalolt .. 1l1li4 1995

AVIA207 AVIA213

AVIA212

AVIAI20

AVIAI21

AVIA213

AVIA214 60 cp 200 Level AVIA209

AV1A308

AVIA318 AVIA223

AVIA222

AVIA221

AVIA207 AVIA118

AVIA308 AVIA320

CorequiUtM 1994

AV1A3IB

At least two of the following

AVIA306 AVIA308

AV1A31O AVIA311

AV1A316 AVIA31B

AVIA308

AV1A311

BIOLIOI BlOLI02 BIOLIOI CHEMIOI CHEMI02 BlOLI02

CHEMIOI CHEMI02

BIOLIOI BIOLI02 BIOLIOI BIOLI02 BIOLIOI BIOLI02 BlOLIOI BlOLI02 BIOLI0l BIOLI02

Bl0L201 Two BI0L200

Two BI0[.200 TwoBI0[.200


SecUon Four Approvod SubJects for Bachelor Degr ...

Prereqalolt .. N1IJIIber SubJoct Point. When B/W 1l1li4 1995

CorequiUtee 1994

Bl0I.309 Molecular Biology 8101.310 Microbiology

BI0l.311 Environmental Biology BI0l.312 Animal Development

8101.313 Cellular Biochemistry

BI0l.314 Plant Development

Bl0L315 Plant Molecular Biology

BI0l.316 Cell Biology

CIIEMISTRY

CHEMI01 Chemistry 101 CHEMI02 Chemistry 102 CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry CHEM231 Organic Chemistry CHEM241 Physical Chemistry CHEM251 Applied Chemistry

10

10

10 10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10 10 10

CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry 10

CHEM311 Analyttcal Chemtstry 10 CHEM312 Chemometrtcs 5 CHEM313 Industrial Chemical Analysis 5 CHEM314 Trace Analysts tn

Environmemtal Systems 5 ,CHEM321 Inorganic Chemistry 10 CHEM322 Metal-Metal Bonding &

Cluster Chemistry 5 CHEM323 Bioinorganlc Co~ordtnation

Chemistry 5 CHEM331 Organic Chemistry 10

S2 SI

SI Not In 1994

52

SI

S2

SI

SI S2 S2 SI

6

6

6 6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6 51 6

52 6 Not in 6 1994

SI 6 SI 6 51 3

S2 3 Not in 1994 3

SI 6

52 3

S2 3 51 6

BI0L201 & BI0L205 BI0L201 & one other BIOL200 (Bl0L204

advisable' BI0L207 Two BlOL200

BI0[.201 & one BI0[.201

BI0L200. Students BI0L208 who have completed BI0l.301 are not e1tg1ble to enrol in this subject. 1\vo BI0L200. Students who have completed BIOL304 are not eltglble to enrol in this subject. Two BI0L200 Including one of BI0L204 BI0L205 BI0L206 BIOL208. Students who have completed BI0L307 are not eligtbJe to enrol In this subject. TwoBI0L200

CHEMIOI CHEMI02 CHEMIOI CHEMI02 CHEM101 CHEMI02 CHEMIOI CHEMI02 CHEMlOl CHEMI02

CHEMIOI CHEMI02 CHEM211 CHEM211 MATHI02 (or MATHlI2) CHEM211

CHEM211 CHEM211

CHEM22I

CHEM221 CHEM23 I


Section Four Approved Subjects for Bachelor Degr ...

Number SubJeet PolDt. When H/W

CHEM332 Heterocyclic Chemtstry 5

CHEM333 Organic Reaction Mechanism 5 CHEM334 Identtftcation of Natural

Compounds 5 CHEM335 Organic Spectroscopy 5 CHEM341 Physical Chemistry 10

CHEM342 Electrochemtcal Solar Energy Conversion 5

CHEM343 Molecular Spectroscopy 5 CHEM361 Environmental Chemistry 10

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE SUBJECTS

Not In 3

1994 52

52

52

51

52

52 52

3

3

6

3

3 6

Proroqalolt .. 1984 19911

CHEM231

CHEM231

CHEM231

CHEM231

CHEM241 MATH102 (or MATIl112)

CHEM241 MATH102 (or MATH 112)

CHEM24 I CHEM261

corequlaltu 1984

Available only to Bachelor ofEDvlroDmeatal Scienee Dear- eandldat .. who eODUD.ellee In 1994 or thereafter. CoIl8u1t DepartmeDtal Usts for other preserlbed subjects required.

(See Award Rules'

Number Subject Point. When H/W

EMGTI01 Foundations of Environmental Management 10

EMGT102 Social Development and the Environment

ENVI02 Environmental Values and Ethics

ENVI03 Environmental Issues and Problems

10

10

10

51 4

52 B

51 B

52 5

Prerequlllltee 1994 1995

Available only to Bachelor of Environmental Science Degree candidates who commenced prior to 1994

SCEN20 1 Environmental Investtgattons II

SCEN202 Environmental Planning

& Pollutton Control SCEN203 Water Resources

Management SCEN30 1 Environmental Project SCEN302 Environmental Impact

Assessment Techniques

GEOGRAPHY

GEOGIOI Introduction to Physical

10

10 10

10

10

Geography 10 GEOG 102 Introduction to Human

Geography 10 GEOG201 Methods tn Physical

Geography 10 GEOG202 Methods tn Human

Geography 10 GEOG203 Biogeography & Climatology 10

F

51

52

3 days F

3

4 4

52 4

52

51

52

51

51

4

4

4

4

4

5CEN101

SCEN201

SCEN202

see'

see'

GEOG101

GEOG102

GEOG101


SacUon Four Approved Subjects for Bachelor Degr ...

Prerequlaltee Number SubJeet Point. When B/W 1984 19911

Corequlaltee 1994

GEOG204 Geomorphology of Australia 10

GEOG207 Population. Culture & Resources

GEOG208 Cities & Regions GEOG301 Advanced Methods tn

Physical Geography

oEOG302 Advanced Methods tn Human Geography

GEOG304 The Biosphere &

Conservation GEOG305 Climatic Problems GEOG306 Geography of Australta

An Htstol1ca1 Perspective

GEO0309 Society & Space

0000310 Directed Studies tn Human Geography

GEOG311 Hydrology GEOG315 Productton. Work

and Territory

GEOG316 Directed Studies in Physical Geography

. Footnote

10 10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10 10

10

52

52 51

51

52

51

52

51

82

Slor 52

52 51

Slor 52

4

4 4 4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4 4

4

GEOG 10 1

GEOG102 GEOG102 GEOG20 1 plus either GEOG203 or GEOG204 GEOG202 plus either GEOG2070r GEOG208

GEOG201 GEOG203

GEOG204 GEOG20 1 GEOG203

GEOG202 plus etther GEOG207or GEOG208

GEOG202 plus etther GEOG207or GEOG208 GEOG202 plus etther GEOG207or GEOG208

GEOG20 I GEOG203 GEOG202 plus either GEOG207or GEOG20B GEOG20 1 plus etther GEOG203or GEOG204

Students should note that GEOG101 and GEOGI02 are prerequisites for a major study in Geography. and Geography Honours GEOG401. GEOG402.

GEOLOGY

GEOLI0l 'Ihe Environment GEOL102 Earth Matertals GEOL211 Opttcal Mineralogy GEOL212 Introductory Petrology

GEOI..213 Ancient Environments

10

10

5 10

& Organisms 10 Geological Structures & Resources 10 Geology Field Course 215 10

Geology Field Course 216 5

Igneous Petrology & Crustal Evolution 10

51

52

51 52

52

51 51

52

52

6

6

3 6

GEOLlOl GEOL102 GEOL211

Advisory CHEMI02

6 GEOL102

6 GEOL102

14 GEOL102

days 7 GEOL215

days

6 GE0L312

GEOL214


Section Four Approved Sub) .. .. for Bachelor Degr .. .

PrerequJoIt .. Number Subject Polut. When HIVI 1994 1995

CorequlaitOl 1994

GEOL312 Metamorphic Petrology 10 GEOL313 Structural Geology &

Geophysics 10 GEOL314 Stratigraphic Methods 10 GEOL31S Sedimentology 10 GEOL316 Geology of Fuels 10 GEOL317 Resource & Exploration

Geology 10 GEOL318 Geology Field Course 318 S

GEOL319 Geology Field Course 319 S

GEOL320 Geology of Quaternary Environments

MATHEMATICS

MATIi III Mathematics 111 #MATH112Mathematlcs 112 #MATH102Mathematlcs 102 MA11n03 Mathematics 103

MATH201 Multivariable Calculus

MATH202 Partial Differential

10

10

10

10 10

5

Equations 1 5 MATH203 Ordinary Differential

Equations 1 5

MATH204 Real Analysis 5

MATIi205 Analysts of Metric Spaces 5 MATH206 Complex Analysts 1 5

MATIi207 Complex Analysis 2 MATH209 Algebra MATIi210 Geometry 1

5 5

5

51

51 52

52 51

51 51

6

6 6 6

6

6 7 days

GEOL212

GEOL214 GEOL213

GEOL212 GEOL213 GEOL213

GEOL212 GEOL214 GEOL213

52 10 GEOL216 GEOL313 days

52 6

81.52 6 81.52 6 51 6 52 6

51 2

52

52

51

52 51

52

51

52

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

GEOL213 or GEOG204

2 unit H8C Math MATHlll

see2 or MATHlll MATIl102 or (MATHlll &

MATH 112) or penntsston of H.O.D. of Mathematics (MATHI02 & MATHI03)

or (MATIllll & MATIl112) or

MATIil02 & Per-mission of H.O.D.3)

MATH201

(MATHI02 & MATHI03)

or (MATIil11 &

MATIi112) or (MATHI02 & Permission of H.O.D.3 (MATHI02 & MATHI03) or (MATH 1 11 &

MATH1l2 & MATH 103)

MATIi2041

(MATHI02 MATHI03)

or (MA11-Il11 &

MATI-I112) or MATIi 102 & Permission of H.O.D.3) MATH206 MATHI03

MATH 103 (MATHI02 MATHI03)

or (MATHIIl & MATH 1 12 & MATHI03)


Section Fou r Approved Subjects for eachelor Degree.

Prerequlalt .. Number Subject

MATIi2)) Group Theory

PolDte When HIVI 1994 1995 CorequJalt ..

1994 5

MATH212 Discrete Mathematics 5

MATH213 Mathematical ModelUng 5

MATH214 Mechanics 5

MATII215 Operations Research 5

MATH216 Numerical Analysis 5

tMATH217Unear Algebra 1 5

'. tMATIi218Ltnear Algebra 2 5

MATH30 1 Logic & Set Theory 10

General Tensors & Relativity 10 Variational Methods and 10 Integral Equations Ordinary Differential 10 Equations 2

Partial Differential 10 Equations 2 Flutd Mechanics 10

Quantum & Statistical 10 Mechanics Geometry 2

Com blnatorics

Ftmctional Analysts 1 Measure Theory

& Integration

10

10

10

10

SI 2

51 2

S2 2

51 2

52 2

52 2

51 2

51 2

SI 3

52 3

Not In 3 1994

SI 3

Not In 3

1994

Not in 3 1994

Not In 3 1994

51 3

Not In 3 1994

52 3

52 3

(MATHI02 & MATHI03) or (MATHlll &

MATH 112 & MATH 103) MA11-II02 or MATHI030r

(MATHlll & MATH1l2) (MATH 102 & MATH 103) or (MATHIIl & MATH1l2)

(MATH 102 & MATH 103)

OT (MATHlll &

MATHI12 & MATHI03) MATHI02 or MATII)03 or (MATH 111 & MATHI12) (MATH 102 & MATHI03) or (MATH1)1 & MATH112 & COMPlOl) or

(MATHlll & MATHlI2 & MATH 103)

MATH 102 or (MATHl)1 & MATH 112)

(MATHI02 MATH 103)

or (MATHlll &MATHll2 & MATH 103)

20cp from 200 level MATH Incl. one of MATH204 MATH209

MATH211 MATH212 MATH21B4'

MATH201 MA11i21S4

MATH201 MATH203 MATH2041

MATH201 MATH203 MATH204IMATI-I21S4

MATH201 MATH202

MATH203 MATI-l2041

MATH201 MATH203 MATH2041 MATH206

MATH201 MATH203 MATH206

20cp from 200 level MATH Incl. one of MATH209 MATH211 MATH218'

MATH218'

MATH205

MATH205

Mvtsory MATH207

Faculty of Sclance and Mathematics

Section Four Approved SubJocts for eachelor Degrees

Prerequlolt .. Corequialtee Number Subject PoiDt. Whoa H/W 1884

MATH312 Algebra 10 Not in 3 MATH211 MATH218' 1994

MATH313 Numerical Analysis O'heory) 10 52 3 MATH201 MATH203 MATI-l204' MAm2184

MATIl314 Optimtzation 10 51 3 MATH201 MAlli218' MATH315 Mathematical Biology 10 51 3 MATH201 MATH203

MATH213 MATH316 Industrial Modelling 10 52 3 MATH201 MATH202

MATH203 MATH213

MATH216 & Per-mission of H.O.D.

MATH317 Number lbeory 10 52 3 30cp from MATH200 MATH318 Topology 10 Not in 3 MATH204'or

1994 MATIl205

Footnote. Entry requirement - HSC 3 Unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 120/150.

1bis option Is for certain students who take MATH 103 in second semester

MATH208 In 1990

Students who have passed Mathematics I in 1989 or before do not need MATI-I204

# Credit cannot be obtained for both MATIIl12 and MATIi102

t Credit cannot be obtained for both MATII217 and MATIi21B

DIVlSION OF QUANTITATIVE METHODS

Not In MAQM214°Quantttative Methods 10 1994 4 INFOIOI & 5TATIOI

credit cannot be obtained for both MATII215 and MAQM214.

1995 1994

Subjects provided by the Dlvllllon or Quantitative Methode to Bachelor or Education counee In the Facult, or Education In 1994.

Theae subject. are avallable only to Bachelor or Education .tudents.

H.Ed (Mathematic. Education)

MAQM 135 Mathematics 1A 20 F 4 MAQM 136 Mathematics 1 B 20 F 4 MAQM235 Mathematics lIA 20 F 4 MAQMI35 MAQM236 Mathematics lIB 10 F 2 MAQM237 Mathematics IIC 10 F 2 MAQM335 Mathematics lIlA 20 F 4 MAQM235 MAgM336 Mathematics IllS 15 F 3 MAQM337 Mathematics mc 15 F 3 MAQM435 Mathematics N A 10 F 2 MAQM436 Mathematics NB 10 F 2 MAQM437 Mathematics IVC 10 F 2

H.Ed (Primary Education)

MAQMl46 Foundatton Studies In

Elementary Mathematics 15 F 3

Faculty of Sclance and Mathematic.

Number Subject PolDt. Whoa

B.Ed (Early Childhood)

MAQM147 Mathematics IEC 10' 51

PHYSICS

PHYSll1 Phystcs III 10 51 PHY5112 Physics 112 10 52 PHY5113 Physics 113 10 51 PHYS114 Physics 114 10 52 PHY5201 Quantum Mechanics & 10 51

Electromagnetism PHY5202 Mechanics & Thennal 10 51

Physics PHY5203 Solid State & Atomic Physics 10 52 PHY5205 Sctenttfic Measurement

Principles. Processes and 10 52 Applications

PHY5301 Mathematical Methods & 10 51 Quantum Mechanics

PHY5302 Electromagnetism &

Electronics 10 51 PHY5303 Atomic. Molecular & Solid

State Physics 10 52 PHYS304 Statistical Physics &

Relativtty 10 52 PHY5305 Nuclear Physics &

Advanced Electromagnetism 10 52

Footnote.

Section Four Approved SubJects for eachelor Degree.

l'rerequJllltu CorequJ.ltu H/W 1884 1995 1994

4

6 See' 6 PHYS 111 or See8 6 5ee' 6 PHYS1l3 6 MATHI02 PHY5113

PHYS1l48

6 MATHI02 PHY5113 PHYS1148

6 PHYS201

6 PHY5112

6 PHYS201 MATH201 MATH203

6 PHY5201 MATH201

6 PHYS203 PHYS30 I

6 PHY5202 MATH20 I

6 PHY5302

Advtsory entry requirement - HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a perfonnance In the top 30% of candidature.

Advtsory entry requirement - HSC 3 unit Mathematics with a mark of at least 110/150 and Physics 2 unit or Science 4 In the top 50% of candidature for these subjects.

Perfonnance to an acceptable level in PHYSlll and PHYSl12may substitute forPHYS113andPHYSI14wtth the approval of Head of Department. MATH111 and MATH112 may substitute for MATIl102.

Psychology Introduction 1 10 51 5 5ee" 102 Psychology Introduction 2 10 52 5 PSYCIOI

Basic Processes 10 51 4 PSYCI02 PSYC207@ Applied Topics In Not In Psychology 1 10 1994 4 PSYC102 PSYC207@ AppUed Topics In Not in Psychology 2 10 1994 4 PSYCI02 PSYC207@ Expertmental Methodology 10 51 4 PSYCI02 Psychobiology 10 51 4 PSYCI02 PSYC207@ Personality and Social

Processes 10 52 4 PSYCI02 PSYC207@ Developmental Psychology 10 52 4 PSYCI02 PSYC207@

Number

PSYC301

PSYC302 PSYC303

PSYC304

PSYC305

PSYC306 PSYC307

PSYC308

PSYC309

PSYC401 PSYC402

PSYC403

PSYC404

Footnotes

Faculty of Scl.~ and Mathematic.

Subject PoIDt.

Advanced Foundations

for Psychology 10

Independent Project 10

Basic Processes 1 10

Basic Processes 2 10

Individual Processes 10

Advanced social Processes 10

Advanced Applied Topics

in Psychology 1 10

Advanced Applied Topics

in Psychology 2 10

Topics tn Neural Sctence

Psychology Honours 401 40


Psychology 403 30

Psychology 404 50

WheD

51

F 51

52

52

51

51

52

Not in 1994

F F

F

F

section Four Approved Subjects for Bachelor Degree.

her_qulut .. CorequlaJtee

B/VI 191M 19911 1994

4 PSYC20 I or P5YC207

2 PSYC20 I or P5YC207 PSYC301

4 PSYC201 or PSYC207

4 PSYC201 or P5YC207



4 PSYC201orPSYC207


4 PSYC2OIorP5YC207

12 See10

12 PSYC401

8 Consult Dept.

16 PSYC403

students who are not enrolled in a Bachelor of ScIence (Psychology), Bachelor of Arts (Psychology) or Bachelor of Soctal Work are eligible to enrol in PSYC 1 0 1 only on achteving a Tertiary Entrance Rank (or equivalent), equal to or greater than the TER required for admission to either the Bachelor of Sctence (Psychology) or Bachelor of Arts

(Psychology). whichever is the lesser.

10 Entry to PSYC40l and PSYC402 in the Bachelor of ScIence (Psychology) degree requires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining a Credtt grade in each of four 300 level subjects including PSYC30 1 and PSYC302.

Additional conditions apply; see the Department for deta1ls.

@ PSYC20 1 may be substituted for PSYC207.


Section Four Approved 5ubjects for Bachelor Degr ...

LlST OF OTHER APPROVED SUBJECTS FROII GROUP B

COIlPUTER SCIENCE

IfUJDber Subject PolDts

COMPllO Introduction to

Programming

COMPlll Introduction to Computer

Science 1

COMP1l2 Discrete Structures

COMP1l3 Introduction to Artifical Intelligence

COMP221 Comparative Programming

Languages

COMP222 lb.eory of Computation

COMP223 Analysis of Algorithms

COMP224 lb.e Unix Operating System

C0MP225 Art:Lflctal Intelligence 2

COMP32l Software Engineering &

Project

COMP322 Computer Vision

and Robotics

COMP323 Computational Logic COMP324 Parallel Processing

COMP325 Database Systems

COMP326 Data Security

COMP327 Prlnctples of Operating

Systems

COMP328 Computer Networks

COMP329 CompUer Design

CC'MI'32Kl Graphic User Interfaces

5

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

20

10

10 10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Geometric Data Structures 10

CO'M1'3,'2 Computer Graphics 10

WheD

51

51

2

F 51

52

51 52

51

F

52

51

52 51

52

51

52

51

52

51

52

B/VI PrerequJeJt ..

191M 1995

COMPlll & (MATH III with MATH 112 asa

corequ1stte) or (MATH I 02)

COMPIIl (Assumed

Knowledge COMP112

or COMPI13)

COMP1l2 COMP1l3

COMP1l2 Assumed Knowledge

COMPlll COMPl13 (Assumed

Knowledge COMPI12)

OMPll1 (Assumed

Knowledge COMP22l and COMP224) C0MP225 (Assumed

Knowledge MATH112)

COMP222

COMP223 ELECI70 COMP1l2

COMPl12 (Assumed

Knowledge COMP325)

ELEC 170 (Assumed Knowledge COMP223

& COMP224)

COMP1l2 ELEC170

(Assumed Knowledge COMP223 COMP224)

C0MP22l (Assumed

Knowledge ELEC 1 70)

COMPll2 (Assumed Knowledge COMP22l

&COMP224) COMPll2 (Assumed

Knowledge COMP223)

COMP1l2 MATH1l2

(Assumed Knowledge MATH217)

Corequkltes 1994

COMPlll

I! I' I'.


Section Four Approvod SubJocts for eachelor DegrNs

Number Subject

INFORMATION SCIENCE

INFOIOI Introduction to Information Systems

LAW

Compw.OJT Subject.

Polat. When H/W

10 51.52 5

Prerequloltee 1994 19915

Corequlaltee 1994

The following subjects are compulsory for candidates enrolled in the combined Bachelor of Science/Bachelor of

Laws degree: consult the Faculty of Law Handbook for further details.

LL.B. 101 Legal Systems and Method 20 LL.B.I02 Criminal Law and Procedure20 LL.B.201 Torts 20

LL.B.202 L1.B.301 LL.B.401 LL.B.402 LL.B.403 LL.B.404 LL.B.405 LL.B.406 LL.B.407 L1.B.408

Property I Contracts Constitutional Law I Administrative Law I Equity and Trusts Clvtl Procedure Evidence Company Law I Jurisprudence Professional Conduct

PHILOSOPHY

PHIL207 Scientific Knowledge and

Scientific Method

STATISTICS

5TATIOI Introductory Statistics

5TATl03 Introductory Mathematical

Statistics' 5TAT201 Mathematical Statistics·

STAT202 Regression Analysts

5TAT205 Engineering Statistics·

5TAT206 Design and Analysis of Experiments and Surveys

STAT301 Statistical Inference

STAT302 Study Design 5TAT303 Generalized Linear Models

5TAT304 TIme Series Analysis

STAT310 Total Qualtty Management Footnote

10

20

10

10 10

10

10 10 10

10

10

10

10

10

10

5

10 10

10

10

10

10

Not in

1994

51.52 5

52 5

51 4

52 4

51 2

52 3

51 3

52 3

51 3

52 3

52 2

Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT201 and STAT20S Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT}OI and STATI03

Advisory MATH }02 and INFOIO} MATH 103 or STATIO} & MATIll12 (or equiv. level of Mathematics)

5TAT20IorSTATIOI MATH 1l2/MATH 102

(or equivalent level of Mathematics) MATH112 or MATI-l102

STAT201 5TAT201 & MATH20 I

5TAT20 I & 5TAT202

5TAT20 I & 5TAT202 Advisory STAT301 5TAT201 & 5TAT202

Advisory STAT301 Pennlsslon of Head of Department

section five

Undergraduate Degree Subject Descriptions

Guide to Undergraduate Subject Entries

Subject outlines and readJng Itsts are set out in a standard fonnat to facilitate easy reference.

An explanation is given below of some of the technical tenns used in this Handbook.

(a) Prerequisite. are subjects which must be passed at a Pass level or better before a candJdate enrols in a particular subject.

(b) Where a subject is marked Advisory it generally refers to a pass In the Higher School Certificate. In such cases lectures will be given on the assumpUon that a pass has been achieved at the level indicated.

(c) Preparatory subjects are those whIch candIdates are slrongiy advtsed to have completed before enrollIng In the subject for whIch the preparatory subject Is recommended.

2 Corequillite. refer to subjects or topiCS which the candJdate must either pass before enrolling In the particular subject or be taking concurrently.

3 Underexamtnatlon rules "ezaminalioD" includes mtd-yearexaminatlons, assignments, tests or any other work by which the final grade of a candidate tn a subject Is assessed. Some attempt has been made to Indicate for each subject how assessment Is detenntned.

4 Tuts are books recommended for purchase.

5 R4iferences are books relevant to the subject or topic which need not be purchased.

I

Feculty of Science end Mathematics

Applied Science And Technology

BACHELOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT

APPLIED SCIENCE ASSESSMENT AND

EAMS/EAMC subjects are avatlable only to candidates who commenced the Bachelor of Applied Science EnVironmental Assessment and Management degree prior to 1994.

EAMS201 AGRICULTURAL SYSTEMS lOep

Prerequisite EAMS 10 I, EAMS Ill.

Hours 4 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination ASSignments and final examlnatton.

Content

The effect of human disturbance of natural ecosystems is studied using agriculture as the focus. Systems concepts are further developed using a series of agricultural systems of increasing complexity and energy demand.

Text

Kupchella. C. and Hyland. M. 1989. Environmental ScIence Uvlng within the SystemoJNature. Allyn and Bacon.

References

Wilson.J. 1988. ChanglngAgriculture.AnIntroductJon to Systems Th!nldng. Kangaroo Press.

Checkland. P. 1981, Systems Thinking. Systems Practice. Wiley.

Checkland. P. and Scholes. J. 1990. SoJt Systems Methodology In Action. Wiley.

EAMS211 INDUSTRIAL AND URIlAN SYSTEMS

Prerequisite EAMS 101. EAMS III.

Corequisite EAMS20 I.

lOep


EXamination Assignments and final examlnatton.

Content

Industrial and urban systems are the focus for further studies of the impact of humans on the natural environment. The notton of Human Acttvlty Systems Is developed as an approach to the improvement of complex, envtronmentallssues.

Text

Kupchella. C. and Hyland. M. 1989. Environmental Sctenoe living within the System oj Nature. Allyn and Bacon.

Section Five

References

Applied Sclonce & Toch· nclogySUbJoctDescrlpHolUI

Wilson.J.I988. ChanglngAgriculture.AnIntroduction to Systems Th!nldng. Kangaroo Press.

Checkland. P. 1981, Systems Th!nldng. Systems Practice. Wiley.

Checkland. P. and Scholes. J. 1990. Soft Systems Methodolog!l inAction. Wiley.

EAMS202 SYSTEMS DYNAMICS AND DATA ANALYSIS I lOep

Prerequisite EAMSI02. EAMS1l2.


Examination Progressive assessment and final examlnatton.

Content

This module develops system dynamics theory using Forresters system dynamics language as applied to natural and man made systems. Itexamlnesposlttve and negative feedback control loops, rates. levels, aUxiliaries. sources, sinks. Information feedback and system boundaries. Models are developed taking account of perspective, reference modes. time horizons and policy choices. Emphasis is placed upon the Importance of group work and action research.

Models of a chosen catchment are developed as part of an ongoing catchment management study.

The data analysts program runs parallel. It reviews and further develops tests of stgntftcance using the mtnitab software program.

References

Roberts. N .• et al 1983. Introduction to Computer SfmuJatfon A system dynamics modelling approach. AddIson Wesley.

Ryan. B. et al 1985. Mlnltab Handbook. 2nd edn. PSWKent.

EAMS212 SYSTEM DYNAMICS AND DATA ANALYSIS II lOep

Prerequisite EAMS 102. EAMS 112.

Corequislte EAMS202.


Examination Progressive assessment and final examination.

Content

Further development of system dynamics modelS.


Introduction to computer modelling. rate and level equations. Dynamo language.

Data analysis runs parallel and involves computer applications of group developed model~ and their analysts.

Reference

Roberts. N. et al 1983. Introduction to computer s!rnulatlon A system dynamics modelling approach, Addison Wesley.

EAMC203 ENVIRONMENT AND HUMAN VALUES II lOep

Prerequisite EAMCI03. EAMC1l3.


Emmination 1Utorlalassessment. essay. take-home examination.

Content

Public policy and environmental issues; eg energy policy. ecolOgically sustainable development. ethics and a sustainable society, ethics and acceptable risk, Ideology and green political thought In the national and international contexts.

References

An extensive set of references for this subject will be given to students at the commencement of the semester.

EAMC213 DEVELOPMENT AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT lOep

Prerequisites EAMCI03. EAMC1l3.

Corequisite EAMC203.


Examination1Utorial assessment, essay, take-home examination.

Content

The role of Social Impact Assessment (SIA) in Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). theory and methods ofSIA. social variables studies by SIA. Heritage considerations and the National Estate. Cultural values and SIA.

References

An extensive set of references for this subject will be given to students at the commencement of the semester.

Section Five

EAMS290 HYDROLOGY AND SOILS ANALYSIS lOep

Prerequisites EAMSI02. EAMSI12.

HOUTS 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals, field work and dlrected reading.

Examlnaiion ProgreSSive assessment plus final examination.

Content

BaSic components of the hydrologic cycle and so11 classtftcatlon and Identification. Topics Include raInfall/runoff analysIs (RATIONAL method). soil moisture and penneabiltty, Interception, flood analYSiS, solute mixing. pollutant loading, Instrumentation and small catchment hydrology.

ReJerences

Dunne. T. and Leopold. L. 1978. Water In Environmental Planning. Freeman.

Instttutton of EngIneers. 1987. Australian RalnJall and Runoff, lEA.

McDonald. R.C. Isbell. R.F. et al 1990. Australian SoIl and Survey. FIeld Handbook. 2nd edn. Inkata Press.

EAMS291 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT


CorequisUe EAMS290.

lOep

Hours 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals. field work and dtrected reading.

Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination.

Content

Examination of many of the major environmental issues associated With water resources development Topics covered Include reservoir and catchment management. water use. entroph1catlon. thermal strattfication of storages, floodplain management, Irrlgatlon/ salintsatlon and wastewater disposal to land and water bodies.

References

Petts. G.E.1984. Impowu/ed Rivers Perspective Jor Ecological Management. John Wiley.

ptgram. J.J. 1986. Issues In the Management oj Australia's Water Resources, Longman Cheshire.

Carter. L. 1986. Environmental Impact oj Water Resources PrqJects, lewis Publishers.

Faculty of Science end Mathemetlcs

EAMS292 PLANT SYSTEMATICS ~P~T~O~Y l~p

Prerequlsttes EAMS 10 I. EAMS Ill.

HOUTS 4 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination Assignments. laboratory and field reports, and final examination.

Content

A study of botanical concepts and principles with particular emphasis upon Australian species and ecosystems. Students will acquire skills In plant Identification and classification. Physiological processes and evolutionary adaptations will be studied along with checklists. distributions. and plant associations reflecting environmental factors. CUrrent theories In plant ecology will be examined.

Text

To be advised.

Reference

Beadle. N.C.W. Evans. et al 1981. Flora oj the Sydney Region. 2nd edn. A.H. & A.W. Reed.

EAMS293 ANIMAL SYSTEMATICS AND ANIMAL~O~Y

Prerequisites EAMS 101. EAMS Ill.

Corequlslte EAMS292.

l~p


&:aminatfon Assignments. laboratory and field reports and final examination.

Content

A study of the systematics. evolution. ecology and distribution of the Australian fauna. The identification of Australian vertebrates to at least the level of sub-class or order. Diagnostic structures such as skeletal and dental features Will be studied along with trapping and tagging techniques to estimate population size and distribution. Terrestrial and aquatic systems will be examined for Ufe histories and ecological relationships.

Text

To be advised.

EAM8301 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT I l~p

Prerequisites EAMS20 I. EAMS211.


Section Five Applied Science' TechnologySubJectDescrlptione

ExamInation Assignments. field reports and final examinatlon.

Content

The sldlls. attitudes and knowledge needed for environmental management practices wtll be developed through experiential and team learning strategtes. The economics of the ecologically sustainable utlltsation of natural resources will be a prime focus. Management practices in Australia and selected foreign countrles will be studied.

Text

To be advised.

References

IUCN. WWF. and UNEP. 1991. CaringJortheEarth. United Nations Environment Program.

World Commission on Environment and Development. 1987. Our Common Future, The Brundtland Report. UNEP.

Dorney. L.C. 1987. The ProJessional Practice oj Environmental Management, Springer-Verlag.

EAM8311 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT n l~p

Prerequisites EAMS20 I. EAMS211.

Corequlslte EAMS30 1.


&:amlnation ASSignments. field reports and final examination.

Content

The principles of land management and people management will be explored in relation to the Impact of developments in Australta. Restoration and rehabtlttation techniques and practices will be studied In conjunction with cost/benefit analysIs and the maintenance of biological diversity, freshwater. son and marine resources.

Text

To be advised.

References

IUCN. WWF. and UNEP. 1991. CaringJor the Earth. United Nations Environment Program.

World Commission on Environment and Development. 1987, Our Common Future, The Brundtland Report. UNEP.

Dorney. L.C. 1987. The ProJesstonal Practtce qf Environmental Management, Springer-Verlag.

Feculty of Science and Mathematics

EAM8302 S~IALIST STUDY 2~p

Prerequlstte All prescribed Level 200 subjects.

HOUTS 4 Hours per week (minimum) for one year.

&:amination Maintenance oflogbook', performance at viva, and submission of final report.

Content

The student Is assigned to a co-operating host organisation and placed In a problem solving or team situation to study an issue or set of Issues currently being addressed by that organisation. The studentwtIl report on the structure and functions of the host organisation and on progress made towards the resolution of the particular Issue(s} under study.

References

Lists win be provided by the student's supervisor and by the host organisation.

EAMS304 REGIONAL ~ NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES I~p


HOUTS 4 Hours per week, field work and directed reading.

&:amination Progressive assessment plus final examination.

Content

This course examines case studies of regional and national environmental Issues which highlight the major types of environmental assessment. The Commonwealth environmental legislation and environmental law are also covered.

Reference

Thomas.!. 1987. EnvlronrnentalImpactAssessment Australian Perspectives and Practice. Monash University.

EAMS314 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT l~p

Prerequisites EAMSI04. EAMSIl4.

HOUTS 4 Hours per week, field work and directed reading.

&amination ProgreSSive assessment plus final examination.

Content

This course covers the rationale and methodology of environmental Impact assessment (EIA). Also covered are Impact assessment techniques In the

Section Five

practice, the role of International Aid agencies, current developments In environmental management, environmental audits and risk analysts.

Texts

Wathern. P.(ed) 1988. Environmental Impact Assessment Theory and Practice. Unwto Hyman.

Beder. S. (ed)I990. EnulronmentalImpactStatements Selected ReadingS. Sydney University.

Reference

Buckley. R 1991. A HandbookJor environmental Audit AIDAB.

EAM8390 SOIL CONSERVATION ~ MANAGEMENT 10ep

Prerequisites EAMS290. EAMS291.

Hours 4 Hours per week lectures and practicals. field work and directed reading.

&:amlnatfon Progressive assessment plus final examination.

Content

Examination of soils, land use and conseIVation, particularly in relation to sons of NSW. Son and water management princtples for various types of land use including urban development. Practical analysiS of control structures, sizing and prediction. Use of soils for domestic and industrlal wastewater disposal and site rehabilitation.

Text

Charman. P.E.V. and Murphy. B.W. 1991. So!ls Their Properttes and Management, Sydney U.P.

Reference

McDonald. R.C .. 'sben. RF. et al 1990. Australian SOU and Land Survey. FIeld Handbook. 2nd edn. Inkata Press.

EAMS394 FLORA AND FAUNA COMPONENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT l~p

Prerequisites EAMS292 and EAMS293 (orequivalent)

HOUTS 2 hours per week over two semesters

Assessment AsSignments, field reports; and final examination

Content

A study of the skills and knowledge required for competence in the compilation of flora and fauna

Faculty of Selene. and Mathematics

sUJVeys in connection with environmental impact studies and plans of management in connection with forestry operations. development projects. rehabilitation after mining. and the conseJVation and management of natural ecosystems. The use of relevant field techniques of transect studies. species composition analyses. assessment of animal populations. and monitoring ofphys!ca1 andchem!cal factors will be studied. Fluctuations In plant and animal populations due to such factors as seasonal change. drought. fire. migration. competition due to introduced flora and fauna. and developmental Impact will provide a major focus for theoretical stucUes and field obselVations. Some existing EISs will be selected as case studies. The work will be set against the background of the needs for development and for the maximum retention of global biodiversity.

Text

No set text.

References

Australian SUJVeytng and Plant Infonnation Group (AUSLIG) 1990. Atlas oj Australian Resources: Vol6 Vegetation, Government Prlnter. Canberra.

Groves. RH. (ed.) 1981. Australian Vegetation. Cambridge University Press.

Kennedy. M. (ed.) 1990. Australia's Endangered Species. Simon Schuster.

Ktohtll Engineers 1992. EnvlronmentaJlmpactStudy Jor the Proposed Forestry Operations in the Mount Royal Management Area.

Readers D!gest 1988. Complete Book oj Australian Birds, Readers Digest Services.

Strahan, R (ed.) 1983. Complete Book oj Australian Mannals, Angus and Robertson, Sydney.

EAMC303 OCCUPATIONAL HYGIENE AND TOXICOWGY lOcp

Prerequisites EAMC203, EAMC213 or eqUivalent.

Hours 2 hours per week for one year.

&amlnatton 1\vo major written asslsgnments and an examination at the end of each semester.

Content

A study of human organ systems and the nature of environmental pollutants and their adverse effects on human health. This subject also studies hazard Identificatton, hygiene standards and the control of environmental conditions In the workplace. Visits

Section Five Applied Science & TechnologySub)ectDescrlptions

to industr1al sites are undertaken together with practice in the use of mOnitoring and protective devices.

Ten

Harringion. J.M. and GUI. F.S. 1987. Occupattonol Health Pocket Consultant, 2nd edn, Blackwell Sc\entiftc Publications.

References

An extensive 11st of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.

EAMC313 THE SOCIAL ASPECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH lOcp

Prerequisites EAMC203. EAMC213.

CoreqU/Slte EAMC303

Hours 2 hours per week for one semester.

Examination Tutorial assessment. essay. take-home examination.

Content

The social origins of disease. case studies and history. social fonns of disease conteol. eg the sanitation movement. ltfestyle related disease. standards of living and health. environmental degradation and health. ecologically sustainable development and health. the social construction of health related terminology, eg ·risk·. risk-taking and risk-imposition. health protection poltcy. Justice and the political economy of health at national and tntematlonallevels.

References

An extensive list of references will be provided at the commencement of lectures.

Faculty of Science end Mathematici

Aviation Subject Descriptions

AVIA subjects are available only to candidates enrolled In the Bachelor of Science (Aviation) degree

100 Level Aviation Syllabus

The aviation syllabus Is based upon four broad areas of study

1 Aeronautical Englneerln, (aerodynamics. engines. systems and design);

2 Aviation ScIence (meteorology and navigation);

3 Human Factors (aviation psychology. medicine. and ergonomics);

4 Aviation Management (aviation law. administration. and computer applications).

The syllabus has a spiral design with a broad foundation In first year proceeding to In-depth and more Individualised study In the third year. The project In third year Is designed as background to pursue a postgraduate BachelorofSclence (Aviation) Honours program. Group or Individual projects are problem-based and require students to gain Industry experience to link theory and practice.

The sequence and scheduling of aviation subjects Is determined by the needs of integration with flight training and commercial pilot licensing over the first two years of the degree.

AVIA109 INTRODUCTORY METEOROLOGY 5cp


&amination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Introduction to atmospheric pressure. wind. humidi!)'. thermodynamics. cloud. precipitation and Icing; Structure of the atmosphere; Introduction to Aviation forecasts and meteorological reports.

Text

P.P.L Meteorology

Bureau of Meteoroiogy. Manual of Meteorology Part I. General Meteorology. Part 2 AviaUon Meteorology.

AVIAll0 INTRODUCTORY NAVIGATION 5cp


Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and tutorials plusa 2 hourexamlnaUon.

$ecUon Five

Content

Avladon Subject Descriptions

Practical methods of pllot navigation f1tght p1anntog. The theoretical aspects of navigation; the form of the earth; map projections, scale and scale variation. conformaltty: navigational astronomy; the vector triangleandltssolution byplottlngand bycomputtng; flight and navigational Instruments. theoretical aspects. accuracy. errors and use.

Ten

To be advised

AVIAlll INTRODUCTORY AERODYNAMICS 5cp


Examination Progressive assessment plus examination.

Content

Basic fluid mechanics of an Incompressible flow. Reynold's No .• Bernoulli's equation. The generation onift. drag. induced drag. lift-augmentation devices, downwash and wake turbulence. Properties of aerofoHs. three dimensional effects on section characteristics. Aerodynamic factors influencing aircraft performance drag index. LID ratios. configuration and altitude effects. climb and descent.

References

Anderson.J.D. 1989,Introduction toFllgh~ 3rdedn. McGraw-Hill.

Shevell. RS .. 1987 FUndamentaJsoJFllgh~ 2ndedn. Prentice-Hall.

Oole. C.E .. 1988 flight TheoryJor PIlois, 2nd edn.

AVIA112 INTRODUCTORY HUMAN FACTORS lOcp


Examination Progressive assessment based on class tests. seminars. aSSignments and a 2 hour examination.

Content

Information processing; vision/balance; spatial disorientation; perception; memory: decision making; motor control.

Text

Trollip. S. & Jensen. R 1991. Hum.o.n FactorsJor General Aviatton. Jeppeson Sanderson.

I

Reference

Faculty of Science and MathemetlcI

Green, R 1991, Human FactorsforPUots. Gower.

AVIA113 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEMS llep

Hours 3 Hours lectures and 2 Hours tutorial a week for one semester.

&amination Progressive assessment plus a final examination.

Content

(a) Princlplesof operation of aircraft fuel, hydraulic and electrical systems. undercarriage and flight controls. The application of mechanical linkages, and electrical circuits to these systems. Basic circuit theory.

(b) Aircraft weight and balance. perfonnance and structural weight ltmltations. detennination of take-off andlandlngwelghtand centre of gravity, aerodynamics reasons of centre of gravity ltmitations. use of aircraft loading systems (mathematical and graphical approaches). adjustment of weight and centre of gravity, regulatory requirements.

(c) International Standard Atmosphere. factors affecting aircraft performance. use of perfonnance charts for take-off and landing. ltmltatlons and safety considerations. regulations and reqUirements for Authonsed Landing Areas.

Texts

clva AviatfDn RegulatfDns CM.

clva AviatfDn Orders 20·99 CM

Aeronautical Information Publication CM.

AVIA114 FUGHT RULES AND PROCEDURES 5cp


&amlnation Progressive assessment plus a final examination.

Content

OvelView of International aviation regulation. Australian Civil Aviation Regulations and Orders governing aircrew procedures and the airworthiness of aircraft and their design standards. Aircrew licensing requirements. Air Traffic Control procedures and ptlot'sairworthiness responsibtltties. Thecourseintroduces CAA requirements to the level

Section Flv. Avletlon Subject Descriptions

of the Private Pilot Licence and addresses the international and local regulations of aviation actlvitles.

Texts

clva Aviation RegulatfDns CM.

clva Aviation Orders 20-99, 100, 101, 104, CM.

Enrou/e Supplement - Australia CM.

Aeronautical lriformation Publication CM.

Aerodrome Diagrams CM.

AVIA115 RECIPROCATING ENGINES 5cp


EKaminatlon. Progressive assessment based on aSSignments plus end of semester examination.

Content

Air standard thennodynamlc cycles. two and four stroke cycles. petrol and diesel engines. construction features. induction. lubrication andcooltng. engine Instrumentation. effect of altitude and mixture on combustion. power output, aircraft engtneoperatlon. turbo/superchargers. thermodynamic effiCiency. vibrations and balancing.

Text

Bent, RD. & McKinley, J.L. 1985, Aircraft Powerplants, 5th edn, McGraw-Hill.

AVIA116 COMMERCIAL METEOROLOGY 5cp

Prerequisite AVIAI09.


&amination Progressive assessment based on aSSignments. tutorials. seminars. anda 2 hourftnal examination.

Content

Atmospheric pressure; wind. humidity and thennodynamics; cloud. precipitation and icing; orographic effects; thunderstorms; tropical meteorology; synoptic situations and fronts; jet streams. Hazardous weather wtndshear. mlcrobursts and macrobursts.

Text

Manual of Meteorology Parts I and 2 (A.G.P.S.).

AVIA117 NAVIGATION

Prerequisite AVIAllO.


5cp


&amtnation ProgreSSive assessment based on aSSignments. tutorials presentations and a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Theoretical aspects of Rhumb line navigation. The development of pHot navigation techniques from air plot and track plot methods. The development of metal ORand of orientation systems. Pilot navigation radio aids. Their basic prinCiples. Signal propagation. use. errors.

Flight planning for twin piston engtned aircraft. The point of no return and critical point.

Text

To be advised.

Reference

Pallet, E.J. 1981, Aircraft Instrument, 2nd edn. Longman. Harlow.

AVIAIIS AERODYNAMICS

Prerequisite A VIA 111.

5cp


&aminatton Progressive assessment based on laboratory reports and assignments plus a final examination.

Aircraft stability and control; longttudinalandlateral stabtltty. aerodynamiC coupling. CG effects on stabtlity. gyroscopiC coupling; effect of aircraft configuration on stability, wing sweep, dihedral, canards. AerofoH characteristics. Boundary layer -laminar and turbulent and transition. Wind Tunnel experiments. Incompressible fluid dynamics. VortiCity. Propeller analYSis hlade element and disc theones. propeller effiCiency and sizing. constant speed units.

Shevell, RS. 1989, FUndamentals ofFlfght 2nd edn, HalJ.

Houghton. E.L. and Carruthers. N.B. 1989. Aerodynomics for Engineering Students, Arnold.

AVIA119 AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY AND MEDICINE


5cp


&amination Progressive assessment baseclon class tests. aSSignments. tutorials and a 2 hour examination.

Section Flv. Aviation Subject Descriptions

Medicine altitude. atmosphere and respiration; acceleration. vision. heartng. air sickness; health. drugs; first ald, pUot fitness; fatigue; Psychology attention. workload. stress. personality. communications.

O'Hare, D. and Roscoe, S. 1990, Fltghtdeck Performance - The Human Factor Iowa U.P.

Harding & Mills 1988, Aviation Medicine, British Medical ASSOCiation. London.

AVIA120 AVIATION LAW. COMMERCIAL FUGHT RULES at PROCEDURES


IOcp


&aminatfon Progressive assessm~nt based on assignments and tutorials plus a 2 hour final examination on PartAand a 3 hour final examination on Part B.

Part A The origins of Law In Australia; Legal Institutions in Australia; Constitution; Tort (Negligence); Criminal Law; Contract (Hire & Insurance); Criminal Law; Deregulation of the Aviation Industry; International Conventions; Administrative Law. Part 8 Australian Civil Aviation Regulations and Orders governing alrcrew licensing and procedures to the level of Commercial Pilot Licence.

clva AvialfDn RegulatfDns CM.

ClvaAviatfDnOrders 20-99,100, CM.

AVIA121 AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS AND PROPULSION 5cp


Examination Assessment based on assignments and laboratory reports plus a final examination.

Content

Hydraulic and mechanical systems on aircraft. afr conditioning and pressurlsatlon Including thennodynamlcs. tce protection and fire systems. undercarriage and fltghtcontrols. Electrical systems. analog devices. basic circuit analysiS using Kirchoff and Thevenln methods. tuning circuits. filters. Introduction to database and spreadsheet software.

References

Smtth. R.J. 1987. Electronics Circuits and Devfces. Wiley.

I


Pallet, Aircraft Electrical Systems,

Lombardo, D,A. 1988, Aircraft Systems Understanding Your Aeroplane. TAB.

Basic Functlcna! Devices and Systems, CAA.

AVIA123 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE AND LOADING 5cp



Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination.

Content

(a) Mean Aerodynamic Chord; advanced use of loading charts; adjustmentofwelghtandcentre of gravity.

(b) Multi-engine operations and performance considerations; use of take-ofT enroute; and landingperformancechartsforstngleandmultiengine aircraft. knowledge of the performance and operation of the Echo MK IV aeroplane.

Texts

clva Aviation Regulations CAA.

clva Aviation Orders 20·99 CAA.

Aeronautical Infonnatlon Publication CAA.

Abridged Performance and Operation Manual for Echo Mk IV.

AVlA207 AVIATION METEOROLOGY IIcp



Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Operational meteorology. tropical meteorology. complex thermodynamics. micro and meso-scale winds. surface synoptic charts. dynamics of lows and highs, visibility, fog, hazardousweatheranalysls.

Text

Bureau of Meteorology, Manual of Meteorology Paris 1 arul2

Department of AViation Meteorology Handbook

AVlA208 INSTRUMENT NAVIGATION 6cp



Section Five Aviation Subject Descriptions

EIcamtnation Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Radio NavigationSystemsandAlds; RadloNavigatlon techniques using conventlonal aids; ADF /NDB, VOH, DME, ILS, F1lght Director, Radar; Prlnclples and errors oC radio and radar aids.

Instrument Flight Procedures. Airspace. and Air Traffic Control; Departure Procedures; Enroute Procedures; Holding Procedures; Instrument Approach Procedures; Emergency Procedures; IFR Flight Planning

Texts

Enroute Charts CAA.

Departure and Approach Procedures CAA.

Terminal Area Charts.

clva Avlaton Orders CAA.

Enroute Supplement· Autralla CAA.

Aeronautical Infonnatlon Publication CAA.

References

Heel, S. 1992, Instrument Rating Course, Action Aviation Supplies.

Thorn, T. 1992, Instrument Rating Manual, VoL 1& 2, Aviation Theory Centre.

AVlA209 LONG RANGE NAVIGATION 6cp


HoLUs 3 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination ProgreSSive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.

Content

The construction properttesand useoC orthomorphlc charts suitable for long range navigation. The calculation of great circle tracks and distances. Grid navigation; navigation in polar regions; naVigation on the climb and descent; high speed/high altitude navigation including the use of radio aids and area navigation systems; weather radar; Inertial navigation systems; operational problems Including the use of ofT track alternates; searches.

Text

To be advised.


AVlA210 COMPRESSmm AERODYNAMICS


5cp


ExaminattonProgresslve assessment, tutorials plus a final examination.

Content

ThermodynamiCS of a compressible perfect gas. effects of compressibility on 11ft, Prandtl·Glauert equation, critical mach number, shock stall and dragofvergence. Supersonic and transonlcaerofotls and wings. wave drag. area ruling. Vortex 11ft at low speeds from delta wings and strakes.

References

Houghton, E.L. & Carruthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics for Engineering Students, 3rd edn, Arnold.

Shevell, R.S. 1989, FUndamentaLs oj !'light, 2nd edn, Prentice-HalJ.

McCormick, B. W. 1979, Aerodynal)lics, Aeronautics and !'light Mechanics. Wiley.

AVlA211 JETENGINES IIcp

Prerequisite 60 credit points AVIAlOO level.

HOUTS 3 Hours per week for one semester plus field trlp.


Content

Characteristics of gas turbine engines and basic thermodynamic analysts. requirements for combustion. fuel specifications. combustion chambers, turbines, compresor design features, materials employed In aviation gas turbines. turbojets. turbo-Cans. turbo-props. ramjets. requirements for supersonic intake and nozzle designs. developments in transonic. supersonic and hypersonic propulston systems. Jet and Turboprop operations with application to In-service aircraft engines.

Text

1987, Gas 1Urblne Powerplants and Their Malnte· nance on Aircraft, AGPS-DTC-CAA Malnt Text 6.

Reference

Rolls Royce 1986, Rolls Royce, The Jet Engine, 4th edn, Derby.


AVlA212 HUMAN FACTORS lOcp

Prerequisite AVIA119.


~n Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour examination.

Content

ErgonomiCS; displays; aircraft control; automation; simulation; training; stress/arousal; I1!ght phobia; fatigue.

Text

Weiner, E.L. & Nagel, P. 1988, Human FaclDrs In Aviation. Academic Press.

Reference

O'Hare, D. & Roscoe,S. 1990,!'llghtdeckPeljormance - The Hwnan Factor. Iowa U.P.

AVIA213 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURES AND MATERlALS

Prerequisite 60 credit point AVIAIOO level

6cp

Hours 3 Hours per week Cor one semester

Examination Progressive assessment based on assignments and lab reports plus examination

Content

Properties of materials commonly used In aircraft construction and typical fabrication methods. Loads applied to aircraft structures. the Manoeuvre Envelope, Gust Loads. Material stress and strain. strength and ductility. Introduction to Metallurgy. Metal corrosion and methods employed In protection. Introduction to sandwich and fibre -matrix composite structures.

References

Shigley, J.E. 1985, Mechanical Engineering Design. Metric edn, McGraw-Hill.

Dole, C.E., FundamentaLsofAlTcraftMaterialFaclDrs, Aviation Books

AC 43.13 Accepuwle Methods, Techniques and Practices, FAA/lAP

US FAR 23 FAA Regulatory Data

AVIA214 JET AIRCRAFT FLIGHT PLANNING lOcp

Prerequisite AVlAII7.



Examination Progressive assessment and a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Thiscourse provides the core component of the study of tlight plannIng. bringIng together Jet aIrcraft performance; safety requirements; legal requirements; the economics of aircraft operation; the route structure. The requirements for an stages of the fltght. (Including emergency operations) are considered and evaluated.

Text

B727 Performance Manual. CM canberra.

AVIA218 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE

Prerequisite AVlAI23.

5cp


Examination Progressive assessment plus a flnal examination.

Content

AppUcatlon of knowledge and skills gaIned In principles of flight; engines. systems. and Instrumentation; aircraft performance and operations; navigation; meteorology; and flight rules and procedures to the operation of charter flights in multi-engine aeroplanes.

(a) Concepts and considerations which are distinctive to multi-engine flight.

(b) Determining the performance that can be expected following an engine failure and explaining the aerodynamic factors and piloting technIques Involved wIth sIngle-engIne flIght.

(c) Fuel requirements. fuel planning for holding or alternate requirements. fuel planning for multistage flights, finding the minimum or maximum fuel.

(d) DetermInIng the maximum take-off weIght. esablishtng a performance limited or landing weIght. findIng the maximum payload. plcktng upordroppingof[weightatintermedlate landing poInts.

(e) Welghtand Balance. addtngwelghtwhUe keepIng the centre of gravity constant. shifting weight to place the C of G on forward or aft limits.

(f) Flight planning and operations requirements, critical point. planning for alternate and/or holding reqUirements. use of flow charts.


(g) Overwater flytng. mountaIn flytng and float flytng.

T...rs

Clva Av!atIon Regulations CM.

Clva Aviation Orders 20-99 CM.

Aeronautical Infonnatlon Publtcatlon.

Abridged Performance and Operatton Manual for Echo Mk IV.

DIfferent Twtn EngIne Aircraft PUot Operating Handbooks.

AVIA219 mGU ALTITUDE METEOROLOGY AND FORECASTING 5cp

PrerequisIte A VlA207.


Examination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour flnal examination.

Content

Upper air meteorology. jet streams, clear air turbulence. complex flows, thermal winds. wind shear. forecasting using radar, use of satellites. forecasting meso-scale phenomena.

Text

To be advtsed.

AVIA220 AIRCRAFT FATIGUE MANAGEMENT 5cp

PrerequisIte AVlA213.

Hours 3 Hours a week for one semester.


Content

Concepts of safe life. fail safe and damage tolerance. The mechanism of fatigue; stress concentration. dynamiC load spectra, crack propagation. fatigue Ufe detennlnatton.Umltatlonsoffatlgue test methods. non-destructive Inspection techniques. damage tolerance ratings. certification requirements. aircraft structural Inspection programmes, managing the "aging aircraft" fleet. Static structural overload column and sheet Instabflttles. Failures In composites.

References

Shigley J.E. 1985. Mechanical Engineertng Design. metric edn, McGraw HUl.


AVIA221 HUMAN PERFORMANCE IN MULTI-CREW OPERATION8 5cp

Prerequisite AVlA212.

Hours 3 Hours for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars, exercises (including demonstrated Instruction). assignments and a final examination.

Content

Personality; communications; group processes; leadershtp; cabIn safety.

Text

WIener E.L. & Nagel D.C. 1988. Human Factors In Aviation. Academic Press.

AVIA222 MANAGEMENT OF AVIATION 5cp

Prerequisite AVlAI20.


Examination ProgreSSive assessment based on seminars, projects. exercises, plus a final examination.

Content

Managementofacharterairlineoperation. Industrial Relations. Financial Management, Human Resource Management. Industrial safety Including legal reqUirements and management responslbtlitles. Airworthiness regulatory requirements for the establishment and operation of organisations Involved In varlous aviation activities.

References

Clva Avlation Orders 80 and 82. 100 - 104 sertes CM.

Clva Avlation Regulations CM.

AVIA223 AVIATION COMPUTING AND ELECTRONICS 5cp



Examination Progressive assessment plus a final examination.

Content

Amplification and switching circuits using p-n junctions. Boolean logic, logic gates. TIL and CMOS logiC devices. mUltiplexers, comparators. analog-digital convertors. computer architecture, Interfacing standards. The application of electronic circUits and computers in the control of aircraft

Section Flv. Aviation Subject Descriptions

systems; an overview of the glass cockpit. Transducers; the application of electronic circuits and computers In data acquisition and the control of servo devices.

References

Smith. R J. 1987. Electronics Circuits and Devices. 2nd edn. Wiley.

Lancaster. D. 1989. TIL Cookbook. Howard Sams.

UnIted AlrUnes 1987. United Airlines Avionics FUndamentals. lAP.

Mitchell 1989. 1ntroduction to Electronics Design.

AVIA305 AIRCRAFT DESIGN


Corequislte AVlA318.

5cp


Examination Progressive assessment based on Individual and syndicate tasks plus final examination.

Content

Parametric design of aircraft. performance esUmation. power requirements, tntemationaldestgn standards, market feaSibility studies. aircraft development case studies. The syllabus addresses the various roles the profeSSional pilot may play in the multi-disciplimuy process of aircraft design and deVelopment.

References

CMI Avtatlon Orders 101. 103. 108 series

Sttnton. D. 1985. The Design of the Aeroplane. Colltns.

Raymer D.P. 1989. Aircraft Design A Conceptual Approach. AIM.

AVIA306 ADVANCED AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS lOcp



Examination Progressive assessment by class tests, tutorial presentations and assignments.

Content

Standard and computertzed fltght plannIng. The evaluation of aircraft types for particular types of operation. The development of operational procedures and policy.

Text

To be advised.

References

Foculty 01 Sclonoo and Mathematics

Performance Manuals and Flight Planning Dala of Current Aircraft Types.

Wagenmakers. J. 1991, Aircraft Performance Engineering. Prentice Hall. N.Y.

AVIA308 AVIATION INSTRUCTION lOcp

Prerequisite 60 credit points AVIA200 level

HoLUS 4 Hours lecture and 2 Hours tutorial a week for semester one.

Examination Progressive evaluation based on seminar preparation and presentation, practice teaching. assignments and examinations.

Content

The psychology oflearnlng, instructional methods. evaluation of instruction and learning. lesson planning. use and preparation of teaching aids. Teaching In the aviation environment.

Texts

Telfer, Rand BlggsJ. 1988, The Psyclwlogy oJFllght 1raInlng, Iowa Slate U.P.

CAA flight Instruclnr's Manual, 1988, CAA.

References

Cole, P & Chan, L. 1989, Teaching Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall

Cooper, J.M. et al 1990, Classroom Teaching SkUls, Heath.

AVIA310 ADVANCED NAVlGATION

Prerequisites AVIA209.

lOcp

Hows 4 Hours per week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment by class tests, tutorials, presentations and assignments.

Content

This course Covers the spectrum of navigation aids. methods and systems. past. present and projected. The mathematical and physical basis of navigation and navaids. System accuracy and reliability requirements.

Text

To be advised

Socllon Flv.

ReJerences

AvloUon Subjecl Descriptions

Kayton,M.andFl1ed. W.R 1969, AvionlcsNavlgat/on. Wlley,N.Y.

AVIA311 ADVANCED AVIATION INSTRUCTION lOcp

Prerequisite A VlA308.

Hours 4 Hours of lectures and 2 Hours of tutorials a week in semester two.

.&:amination ProgreSSive assessment based on seminar preparation and presentations. practice teaching. assignments and examination.

Content

Instructional design. problem-based learning. computers in instruction, simulation. training environments. student stress and training. aircrew perfonnance assessment.

Text

Telfer, RA. (ed) 1993, Aviation Instructton and Training. Ashgate.

AVIA312 APPLlED AERODYNAMICS 50p

Prerequisites AVIA318, AVJA223

Hours 3 Hours per week for one semester

Examination Progressive assessment plus final examination

Content

a) Flight simUlation using analog and digital computers. modelling stability and control characteristics from flight test data. simulator fidelity. aircraft flight control computers.

b) Theuseofcomputerslnpredictlngaerodynamic performance; comparison of computer predictlonswtth wind tunnel results. modelling real aircraft effects including boundary layers. and compressibility.

References

Etkin, B. 1982, Dynamics oJFllgh~ Wiley, N.Y.

Houghton, E.L. & Carrutbers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics Jor Engineering Students. 3rd edn, Arnold.

Katz, J. and Plotkin. A. 1990, Low Speed Aerodynamics, McGraw Hill.

Nelson, RC. 1989, Flight StabUity and Automattc Control, McGraw Hill.

Faculty of SCience and Mathematics

AVIA314 DIRECTED STUDY lOcp

Corequlsites At least two of the following A VJA306, AVIA308, AVJA3iO, AVIA311, AVIA316, AVJA318.

Hours 2 Hours per week for full year.

Examination Satisfactory completion of project.

Content

This subject Is designed for students Interested In developing a speclaitst topiC under the su peIVlslon of a lecturer. The approval of the lecturer and Year III co-ordinator Is required.

i A delalled proposal indicating obJective(s) and workplan are to be submitted by the end of semester one. The resultant project should represent the allocation of four Hours per week for the second semester, and Is due on the first week of the examination period at the end of the semester.

Text

To be advised.

AVIA315 ADVANCED AVIATION MANAGEMENT 50p

Prerequisite AVIA222.


Examination Progressive assessment based on seminars. assignments and final project.

Content

Students will be assigned to groups of four which will be responsible for the production of a group report on an aviation management topiC to be decided tn consultation.

Text

To be advised.

AVIA316 FLIGHT DECK PERFORMANCE 50p

Prerequisite A VIA22 I.


Examination Progressive assessment and final exam.

Content

Systems theory In aviation; selection and testing of pilots; human factors research methods; accident investigation.

Text

Flightdeck Perfonnance Course Resource Matenals.

Section Flv. Avletion SubJect Descriptions

AVIA317 AVIATION CLIMATOLOGY Sop

Prerequisite A VJA207.


Emmination Progressive assessment plus a 2 hour final examination.

Content

Comparative urban and regional climatology. Implication for international flight planning and flying. Localised hazardous climates Europe: North America; the Atlantic rou tes; polar rou tes: Asia and the PaCific.

Text

To be advised.

AVIA318 AlRCRAFT STABILITY AND CONTROL l50p

Prerequisite A VIA 118

Hours 3 Hours per week

Content

Aircraft slability and control, aerodynamiC coupling, stick fixed / free longitudinal slatic slabillty, neutral point. cg margin. static margtn.lateral and directional stabtltty. configuration effects, control surface stzing. Introduction to Aeroelastictty.

References

Houghton, E.L. & Carruthers, N.B. 1989, Aerodynamics Jor Engineering Students, 3rd edn, Arnold.

SUnton, D. 1985. The Design oj the Aeroplane, Collins.

AVIA320 AVIATION INSTRUCTION PRACTICUM I 50p

Corequlslte AVlA308.

Hours 2 Hours per week.

Examination ProgreSSive assessment based on seminars. preparation and presentatton of lesson plans.

Content

The purpose of the practicum is to enableprospecttve flight instructors In apply their knowledge ofiearning and teaching principles to the preparation oflessons plans adapted to the fltght training environment. It also alms to provide new flight instructors with the basts of future development in the practice and theory of aviation education.


A problem-based approach w1l1 be used. through small group discussion and team teaching, to examine the teaching practtces and problems encountered in flight Instruction. Special emphasis will be placed on teaching in a non-traditional and often threatening environment.

Texts

Telfer. R& Biggs.J. 1988. The PsyclwlogyoJl'tight Training. Iowa State U.P.

CivU Aviation Authority 1988. I'tight Instructor's Manual.

References

Cole. P. & Chan. L. 1989. Teaching Principles and Practice. Prenttce Hall.

Cooper. J.M. et al 1990. Classroom Teaching Skills. Heath.

AVlA321 AVIATION INSTRUCTION PRACTICUM II 6cp

Prerequisites AVlA308. AVlA320.

Corequlstte A V1A311

Hours 2 Hours per week.

~tions Progressive assessment based on seminars. presentations. and practice teaching.

Content

The purpose of the practicum is to enable prospective flight Instructors to practice their teaching skills and apply their knowledge oflearnlng and teaching principles In the flight training environment under the supervision of practising flight Instructors and university supervisors.

The practlcum will offer demonstrations by practising instructors. followed by discussions. and supervised practical teaching experience for the students. It offers practtcallinks for the academic componen ts of the aviation instruction courses and provides the opportunity to integrate the knowledge gained to the aviation Instruction context. It will expose student instructors to the variety and complexity ofworktng In the flight training environment and allows them to gain profeSSional experience and development.

Texts

Telfer. R & Biggs. J. 1988. The Psychology oJl'tight 'ITainlng. Iowa State U.P.

CMI Aviation Authority 1988. I'tight Instructor's ManuaL CM.

Section Five

ReJerences

AvlaHon Subject Descriptions

Cole. P. & Chan. L. 1989. Teaching Principles and Practice. Prentice Hall.

Cooper.J.M. etall990. Classroom Teaching Skills. Heath.


Biological Sciences Subject Descriptions

BIOLIOI PLANT Ir: ANIMAL BIOLOGY lOcp

Prerequisites Ntl - see notes on BIOLI01 under "Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty".


Examination One 3 hour paper.

Content

The course is organised tnto 2 units.

Unit 1

Plant Diversity - Form and function.

Theme Structural specialization to facllttate efficient functional capacity.

Topics

The Plant Life Cycle - alternation of generations. Plant Structure and Function - asslmiJation, transport and utilization of nutrients. development and developmental control. Plant Phyla - diversity as a consequence of adaptation for survival in a range of environments.

Unit 2

Animal Dlverstty - Form and Function.

Theme The variety of structural and functional adaptations which have allowed animals to exploit the wide range of available environments.

Topics

The Animal Phyla - organisation of tissues and organs. body plans. body cavities. patterns of development.

Animal Function - digestion. circulation. respiration. integration and control. homeostasis. reproduction and development.

Texts

Villee. C.A. Solomon. E.P. et al 1989. Biology. 2nd edn. Saunders College Publishing. PhUadelphia/ Sydney.

or

Keeton. W. T. & Gould. J. L. 1986. Biologfeal Science.

4th edn. Norton.

Abercrombie. M. Hickman. C.J. et al 1985. The Penguin Dlction1lT!l oj Biology. Penguin.

References

Pearse & Buchsbaum eta11987. Uvlnglnvertebrates Blackwell/BoXWood.

Section Five Biological Sciences Subject OescrlpHons

Talz. L. and ZeiJer. E. 1991. Plant Physiology. The BenJamtn/Cummtngs Publishing Co.

BIOLI02 CELL BIOLOGY. GENETICS Ir: EVOWTION lOcp

Prerequisite See notes on BIOL 101 under "Assumed Knowledge for Entry to the Faculty".



Content

Cell Blolo&),

Theme The evolution and functional organization of cells.

Topics

BiolOgical molecules - the structure of proteins. carbohydrates and lipids.

Cell organization - emphasis on organelle ultrastructure and ptinclpal function. evolution of cells.

BiolOgical energy processes - photosyntheSiS, cellular respiration.

Genetics and Evolu tion

Cell dlvision. Mendelian genetics. ScientUlc method. Molecular biology. Gene action. development and differentiation. Probahlltty. Tests of Significance. Immunology.

An introduction to ecology.

Texts

Villee. C.A. Solomon. E.P. et al 1989. Biology. 2nd edn. Saunders College Publishing. PhUadelphia/ Sydney.

Abercrombie. M. et al 1990. 1he New Penguin Diction1lT!l oj Biology. 8th edn. Penguin.

References

Ayala. F.M. & Kiger. J.A. 1984. Modem Genetfes. Benjamin Cummings.

Moroney. M.J. 1984. FactsfromFigures. Penguin.

Parker. R.E. 1973. Introductory StattstfesJor Biology. Edward Arnold.

Tamarin. R 1991. Principles oJ Genetics. 3rd edn. Wm. C. Brown.

BI0L201 BIOCHEMISTRY lOcp

Not to count for credit with ALSC206


Prerequisites BIOLIO!, BIOL102. CHEM 10 I, CHEMI02 (In 1994 CHEMIOI andCHEMlO2 may be taken as corequisttes)


&:amination One 2 hour paper.

Content

Carbohydrates, ltptds, amino acids and proteins. Vitamins and coenzymes. Enzymes. Intermediary metabolism.

Text

Devlin. T.M. (ed) 1992. Text Book oJ Biochemistry. 3rd edn. WileY·Llss.

References

Mathews. C.K& van Holde. K.E. 1990. Biochemistry. BenJamin/Cummings Publishing Co.

Zubay. G. 1988. Biochemistry. 2nd edn. MacMillan.

Conn. E.E. Stumpf. P.K. et al. 1987. Outlines oj Biochemistry. 5th edn. Wiley.

Lehnlnger. A.L. 1983. PrInciples oj Biochemistry General Aspects, 7th edn, McGraw-Hm.

McGilvery. RW. 1983. Biochemistry. A Functional Approach. 3rd edn. Saunders.

BI0L202 ANIMAL PHYSIOWGY IOcp

Prerequisites BIOLIOI. BIOLI02.


&:amination One 2 hour paper. Content

ConSideration of the processes Involved In the transport of oxygen tn mammals and emphasizing the relation between structure and function. The Course examines molecule. cell and tissue structure and function. particularly of nelVe and muscle, and the respiratory, cardiovascular andcontrol systems. Particular emphasis is given to physiological adaptations to the environment and the effects of the environment on physiological functions. References

Eckert. R & Randall. D. 1983. An!mol Physiology Mechanisms and Adaptations, 3rd edn, Freeman.

Bloom. W. & Fawcett. D.W. 1975. A Textbook oj HlstDlcgy. 10th edn. Saunders.

Guyton. A.C. 1991. Textbook oJMedical Physiology. W.B. Saunders & Co. 8th edn.

Section Five Biological Sciences Subject Descriptions

BI0L204 CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOWGY IOcp

Prerequisites BIOLIOI, BIOLI02.


EXamLnation One 2 hour paper.

Content

Cellular organisation and inter-relationships. Organelles, their structure & function. Cellular processes.

Text

Alberts. B .. Bray. D. et al. 1989. Molecular Biology oj the CeU. 2nd edn. Garland.

BI0L205 MOLECULAR GENETICS IOcp

Prerequisites BIOLIOI. BIOLI02.



Content

The structure of chromosomes and chromatin. Genetic mapping and recombination. DNA structure, repltcation and-repair. Gene action and Its control. Immunogenetics.

Recombinant DNA technology and genetic engineering.

Texts

Tamarin. R 1991, Principles oj Genetics. 3rd edn. Wm. C. Brown.

Old. RW. & Primrose. S.B. 1989. PrincIples oJGene Manipulation. 4th edn. Blackwell.

References

Alberts. B .. Bray. D. et al 1989. Molecular Biology oj the CeU. 2nd edn. Garland.

Sambrook. J .. Fritsch. E. F. et al 1989. Molecular Cloning. 2nd edn. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.

BIOL206 PLANT PHYSIOWGY IOcp

Prerequisites BIOLIOI. BlOL102.


EKamination One 2 hour paper. Content

Fundamental processes pecultar to plant cells are examined. These include cell water relations. membrane transport of solutes, fixation of atmospheric nitrogen. and photosynthesis. CeBular regulation of the processes is emphasized.

Text

Faculty of Science end Mathemetici

Tatz. L. & ZeIJer. E. 1991. Plant Physiology. The Benjamin/CUmmings Publishing Co.

Reference

Salisbury. F.B. & Ross. C.W. 1985. PlantPhystDlcgy. 3rd edn. Wadsworth.

B10L207 ECOLOGY

Prerequisites BIOLIOI, BIOL102.

IOcp

Hours Average of6 Hours per week for one semester, plus a two-day field excursion in July.

Em.mfnation One 2 hour paper.

Content

A course In animal and plant ecology. Topics will include

Life tables and population growth equations. The estimation of population parameters. The effect of environmental factors on the survival and reproductton of organisms and hence on their distribution and abundance. The effect of pollutants on animals and plants. The detection of patterns within plant communities and the causes of such patterns. Energy flow and resource cycling In communities. Species diversity - measurement and relationship between species diversity In an area and the environment. Quantitative methods for comparing communities. Rehabilitation studies.

Text

Ricklefs. R.E. 1990. Ecology. 3rd edn. Freeman

or

Krebs. C.J. 1985. Ecology. 3rd edn. Harper & Row.

References

Recher. H .. Lunney. D. et al (eds) 1986. A Natural Legacy, Pergamon Press.

Krebs. C.J. 1989. Ecological Methodoiogy. Harper & Row.

Hedrick. P.W. 1984. Population Biology. Jones & Bartlett.

BI0L206 BIOCHEMISTRY

Not to count for credit with ALSC206

Prerequisite BIOL201


Examination One 2 hour paper

208

Section Five

Content

Biological Sclencel Subject OescrlpUons

This subject complements and extends BlOL201 emphasising energetics. metabolic regulation and biosynthesis. Biochemical processes peculiar to plant cells are also considered. Topics covered wtll include:

Energetics of redox and enzyme reactions.

Free radicals.

Biosynthesis of phospholipids and sterols.

Protein and nucleic acid metabolism.

Amino acid. cell wall and starch metabolism in plants.

Photosynthetic carbon metabolism.

PrinCiples of metabolic regulation applied to different organisms.

Students who have completed BlOL20 1 and Bl0L208 will have a sound biochemical knowledge for more advanced studies of cellular, biochemical and molecular processes In all organisms.

Texts

Devlin. T.M. (ed) 1992. TextbookoJBlochemistry. 3rd edn. Wiley-Liss

Anderson.J.W .. Beardall.J.I991.MoIecu1arActJvittes aJPlant CeUs. Blackwell Scientific Publications.

BI0L302 REPRODUCTIVE PHYSlOLOGYIOcp

Prerequisites TWo BlOL200.


examination One 2 hour paper.

Content

Biology of reproduction with particular emphasis on sexual differentiation and gamete physiology. Particular emphasis Is given to physiological adaptations to the environment.

Text

Johnson. M.H. & Everitt. B.J. 1988. Essential Reproduction. Blackwell.

References

Torrey. T.W. & Feduccia. A. 1979. MorphogeneslsoJ the Vertebrates. 4th edn. Wiley.

Bloom. W. & Fawcett. D.W. 1973. A Textbook oj Histology. 10th edn. Saunders.

Focully of Sclonce and Mathemetle.

BI0L303 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

Not offered In 1994

B10L305 IMMUNOLOGY

Prerequisites '!\vo B10L200.

HolUs 6 Hours per week for one semester.


Content

lOOp

lOOp

Molecular and cellular aspects of the function of the immune system Including phylogeny. reproductive and tumour immunology.

Texts

Roltt, I.M. 1991, Essential Immunology, 7th edn, Blackwell.

Roltt, I., Brostoff J. & Male O. 1993, Immunology, 3rd edn, Mosby London.

Prescott, L.M .. Harley, et all993, Microbiology, 2nd edn, W.C.B.

BI0L309 MOlECULAR BIOLOGY

Prerequisites BIOL20 1 and BIOL205.

HolUs 6 Hours per week for one semester.

examination One 2 hour paper.

Content

lOOp

How genes function - and their control. Organisms and techniques used in recombinant DNA technology. Applications of recombinant DNA technology In biology and medicine. The generation of immunological specificity. The control of cell proliferation. The origins and genetic basts of cancer. The origins of life.

Because the laboratory sessions need to be continuous. they will be held over four consecutive days during the September recess. Students intending to enrol in this subject are reqUired to indicate this during the Semester 1 enrohnent period..

Texts

Watson, J.D .. Hopkins, N.H. et al 1987, Molecular Biology oj the Gene, Vo/s. 1 and 1 I, BenJamln/ Cummings Publishing Co .. Menlo Park, California and Sydney.

Old, RW. & Primrose, S.B. 1989, Prlncfples oJGene Manipulation, Blackwell, Oxford and Melbourne.

Section Flyo Blologlcol Sclonco. Subject Deacrlptionl

ReJerences

Belger, S.L. & KImmel, A.R eds .. 1987, Guide to Molecular Cloning Techniques. Methods in Enzymology, Vo1wne 152. Academic Press, San Diego and Sydney.

Sambrook, J. FrItsch, E.F. et al 1989, MolecuInr C1on/ng.A Laboratory Manual, 2nd edn, (3 vols}Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory press, ColdSpringHarbor, N.Y.

Ausubel, F.M.. Brent, R et al (eds) 1987 and continuous updates. Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, (2 vols), John Wiley & Sons, New York/ Brisbane.

B10L310 MICROBIOLOGY lOcp

Prerequisttes BIOL20 1 and one other BIOL200 (BlOL204 advisable).



Content

Bacteria. fungi. viruses. mycoplasma. protozoa and algae; comparative biochemiStry; nutrient cycles; pathogenicity (interactions of agricultural and human significance); industrial mlcroblology/ biotechnology.

Text

Prescott, L.M .. Harley,J.P. & Klein, O.A. 1993, Microbiology, 2nd edn, W.C.B.

References

Brock, T.O. & Madigan, M.T. 1991, Biology oJMIcre>organisms. Prentice-Hall.

Mathews, C.K. & van Holde, K.E. 1990, Biochemistry, BenJamin/Cummings Publishing Company.

Cano, RJ. & Colome,J.S. 1986, Microbiology, West.

BIOL311 ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY lOOp

Prerequisites B10L207

HOUTS 2 Hoursoflectures per week for one semester. A three-day field excursion and some laboratory classes.


Content

The course covers applied aspects of both animal and plant ecology.

;1

J

"

i " I


SECTION A Topics Include

Island ecology - the reduction In species diversity of communities and genetic variability within populations. Evolutionary prospects of Island populations. Nature Reserves as ecological Islands.

Community change - succession. eutrophication and fire In the Australian environment.

Evaluation of pest control methods (including biological control) on environmental and economic grounds as well as their short and long tenn effectiveness.

Under population effects. parUcularlythe relevance of threshold levels for endangered species.

SECTION B A selection of topics will be taken from:

The threat of modem agricultural practices to genetic diversity; The potential of microbiology for waste management; Methods for detecting biological pollution; The principles of conservation; Environmental animal and plant physiologystudies; The Interaction between vegetation. water-table. fnigation and soil salt levels; The commercial hwvestlng of natural populations - fish. whale and kangaroo models; Evolution of plant-herbivore and predator-prey systems and other interspecific interactions - implications for control programs

Environmental consequences of the release of genetically engtneered species.

The choice of topics In Section B should be determined in consultation with the Head of Department.

Text

Cockburn, A. 1991, An Introduction to Evolutionary Ecology, Blackwell, and

Ricklefs, RE. 1990, Ecology, 3rd edn, Freeman

or

Krebs, C.J. 1985, Ecology, Harper and Row.

References

Hedrick, P.W. 1984, Population Biology, Jones & Bartlett.

Krebs, C.J. 1989, Ecological Methodology, Harper and Row.

Recher. H .• Lunney. D. et al 1988. Natural Legacy. Pergamon Press.

Section Five Biological Sciences Subject Descriptions

B10L312 ANIMAL DEVELOPMENT

Not offered In 1994

lOOp

B10L3l3 CELLULAR BIOCHEMISTRY 10 cp

This subject replaces B10L30 1 Cell Processes. Students who have successfully completedBlOL30 1 cannot enrol In this subject. Only one of BI0L301 and BI0L313 can be credited towards a degree.

Prerequisites BIOL20 1 and one further BIOL2()() for 1994. B10L201 and B10L208 from 1995

HOUTS 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 2 hour paper

Content

The regulation ofblochemlcal processes byendocrlne, paracrlne and autocrlne mechanisms Is the central theme of this course.

Topics: Metabolic profiles of major organs. Mechanisms ofhonnone action. Intracellular signal transduction mechanisms. The role of mammalian honnones In homeostasis and fundamentals of endocrinology. Biosynthesis and actions of prostaglandins. Biochemistry of digestion and absorption of foodstuffs - regulation by honnones.

References

DeVlin, T.M. (ed) 1992, TextbookoJBiochemistry, 3rd edn, Wlley-Liss.

Mathews, C.K. 1990, Biochemistry, BenJamln/ Cummings, ,Publishing Co.& Van Holde, K.E.

Smith, E.L .. Hill, RL. et a1 1983, Prlncfples oj Biochemistry Mammalian Biochemistry, 7th edn, McGraw· Hili.

B10L314 PLANT DEVELOPMENT lOOp

This subject replaces BIOL304 Whole Plant Development.Students who have successfully completed BIOL304 cannot enrol in this subject. Only one ofBI0L304 and BI0L314 can be credited towards a degree

Prerequisites '!\vo BIOL200.



Content

The co-ordtnated development of the structural organization and functional capacity of plants from their meristems. The role of environmental

Faculty of Sc~nce end Mathemetlc.

parameters. plant growth regulators and selective gene expression in regulation of developmental patterns.

References

Esau. K. 1960. Anatomy of Seed Plants. WUey.

Lyndon. R.F. 1989. Plant Development. The Cellular Basis. Topics In Plant Physiology 3. M. Black and J. Chapman. (eds). Unwin Hyman. London.

Salisbury. F.B. & Ross. C.W. 1985. Plant Physiology. 3rd edn. Wadsworth.

Steeves. T.A. and Sussex. I.M. 1989. Patterns in Plant Development 2nd edn. Cambridge U.P.

Talz. L. & Zeyer. E. 1991. Plant Physiology. The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co.

BI0L315 PLANT MOLECULAR BIOLOGY lOcp

This subject replaces BIOL307 Molecular Biology Of Plant Development. Students who have successfully completed BIOL307 cannot enrol In this subjec~ Only oneofB10L307 and BI0L315 can be credited towards a degree.

Prerequisites 1\vo BI0L200 Includlng one ofBl0L204. BIOL205. BIOL206 or B10L208

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester

&:amination One 2-hour paper

Content

Plant Molecular Biology emphasises those aspects of molecular biology that are peculiar to plants. particularly In relation to the three plant genomes. the totipotency of plant cells and the genetic engineering of plants.

Topics: The organisation. genetic contribution. expression and co-operativity of the nuclear. chloroplast and mitochondrial genomes. Transformation using Agrobactertwn and direct transfonnation techniques. Genetic engineering to study plant processes and for plant improvement. Plant defense mechanisms.

References

Alberts. B .. Bray.D. et al 1989. Molecular Biology of the CeIL 2nd edn. Garland.

Anderson.J.w .. Beardall.J. 1991. Molecular Activities of Plant CeUs. Blackwell Scientific Publications

Grierson. D. & Covey. S.N. 1988. Plant Molecular Biology. 2nd edn. B1ackie

Section Five 81010glcal Sciences Subject Description.

Watson. J.D .. Hopkins. N.H. et al 1987. Molecular Biology of the Gene. Vols 1 and 11. 4th edn. The Benjamln/Cummtngs Publishing Co.

BI0L318 CELL BIOLOGY

Prerequisites 1\vo BIOL200.


Elcarnlnatfon One 2 hour paper

Content

lOcp

The structural organization and function of organisms at the subcellular level Is examined. Emphasis will be placed on processes which detennlne the unique properties of plant cells. Topics Include the cellular baSis of morphogenesIs; structural features of the plant cytoskeleton and Its role in motility. dlvtsionandcell shape detenntnation; synthesiS and properties of the cell wall; Intracellular communication; the role of calcium and other agents as second messengers in development; molecular and cellular mechanisms involved In plant reponses to environmental stimuli. Selected concepts of cellularorganlzatlon and molecular function derived from the study of animal cells will be used as a framework to tllustrate comparable processes occurring in plant cells.

References

Alberts. B .• Bray. D. et al 1989. Molecular Biology of the Cell. 2nd edn. Garland.

Lyndon. R.F. 1989. Plant Development The Cellular Basis. Topics In Plant Physiology 3. M. Black and J. Chapman (eds). Unwin Hyman.

Talz. L .. & Zeiger. E. 1991. Plant Physiology. The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co.

1

Faculty of Science end Mathematics

Chemistry Subject Descriptiona

CHEM101 CHEMISTRY 101 IOcp

Students who have not studled Chemlstryprevlously are strongly advlsed to read the Ilrsfslx chapters in the main text (Brown and LeMay) before commencement of the academic year.

Advisory suldects At least Mathematics (2 unit course), Chemistry (2 unit course) and Physics (2 unit course). with ranking In the top 50% In each case.

HOlUS 3 lecture hours. 1 houroftutorialand2 hours of laboratory classes per week for one semester.

Elcarnlnatfon One 3 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 10% of the final assessment bu t a pass in the laboratory work Is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

General Chemistry (approximately 12 lectures) Revision of basic chemical principles. Introduction to atomic and molecular concepts. Simple Ionic and covalent bonding models.

Organic Chemistry (apprOximately 24 lectures)

Historical development. The shapes. structures and names of organic compounds; reactions of common functional groups; synthesIs. differentiation and structural elucidation of organiC compounds. Applications of organic chemistry.

either

Brown. W.H. 1988. IntroductlontoOryanfcChemistry. 4th edn. Wadsworth student edn. Brooks/Cole & Nelson

or

Hart. H. 1991. OrganfcChemistry-A Short Course. 8thedn. International studentedn. Houghton Mimin Co.

Aylward. G.H. & Findlay. T.J.V. 1974.5.1. Chemical Data. 2nd edn. WlIey.

Brown. T.L .. LeMay. H.E. et al 1991. ChemlstryThe Central Science. 5th edn. Prentlce-Hall.

Lehman. J.W. 1984. Molecular Model SetforOrganlc Chemistry. Allyn & Bacon.

CHEMI02 CHEMISTRY 102 IOcp

HOlUS 3 lecture hours and 1 hour oftutorial and 2 hours oflaboratmyclasses per week for one semester.

Section Five Chemistry Subject Descriptions

Emminatton One 3 hour paper. Thelaboratorywork w1ll count for 10% of the final assessment buta pass in the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Inorganic Chemlstry (approxlmately 12 lectures)

Inorganic solids and their structures. Simple molecular orbital theory and structure and bonding In metals. TransfUon metal chemistry. coordination compounds.

Physical Chemistry (approximately 24 lectures) Chemical equllibria. thermodynamics. electrochemistry. chemical kinetics.

Text

Brown. T.L .• LeMay. H.E. et al. 1991. ChemlstryThe Central Science. 5th edn. Prentlce-Hall.

CHEM211 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY lOcp

Prerequisites CHEMIOI. CHEMI02.

Hours 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorials/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratorywork will count for 15% of the final assessment buta pass in the laboratory work Is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Evaluation and manipulation of analytical data. titrtmetrtc methods of analysts Including theory of acid-base, complex formatton and oxtdattonreduction titrations.

Selected Instrumental methods of analysis. atomic spectroscopy. absorptton spectrophotometry, potentiometrtc techniques. gas chromatography.

Text

HargiS. L.G. 1988. Analytical Chemistry. Principles and Techniques. Prentice-Hall.

CHEM221 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY IOcp

Prerequisites CHEM 10 I.CHEM 102.

HOUTS 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutortals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Emmination One 2 hour paper. The laboratorywork will count for 15% of the final assessment bu t a pass In the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content


Main group chemistry and transition metal chemistry. Coordination complexes and metal lonl1gand Interactions; Ionic bonding; symmetry and structure.

Introduction to reactions and mechanisms, synthesis. spectroscopic methods. bonding and ligand field theory In coordination compounds and organometalltc chemJstIy.

Text

Cotton. F.A .. Wilkinson. G. etal. 1987. BasicInorganlc Chemistry. 2nd edn. Wiley.

CHEM231 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY lOcp

Prerequisites CHEM 10 I. CHEM 102.

Hotus 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 15% of the final assessment but a pass In the laboratory work Is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

A course coverlng the baste chemistry of aliphatic and aromatic compounds and their spectroscopic properties.

An Introduction to spectroscopic methods of structure determination (Infra -red. proton magnetic resonance. mass spectrometry); acidity and basictty of organic compounds; reactions of carbonyl compounds; aromaUcity; electrophilic substitution in aromatic systems; reactions of aromatic compounds. An Introduction to the chemistry of some biologically important compounds including carbohydrates. amino acids. proteins and nucleic actds.

Solomons. T.W.G. 1988. Orgonic Chemistry. 4th edn. Wiley.

or

(Recommended for students proceeding to Leve1300 subjects).

Morrlson. R.T. and Boyd. R.N. 1987. Organic Chemistry. 5th edn. Allyn & Bacon.

Lehman. J .W. 1984. Molecular Model SetJor Orgon/c Chemistry. Allyn & Bacon.


CHEM241 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY lOcp

Prerequisites CHEM 10 1. CHEM 102.

Hours 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Emminatton One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work wt1l count for 15% of the final assessment buta pass In the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Chemical Dynamics- rate laws of chemical kinetics, principles of mechanism. determination; translUon state theory; electrolyte activity; thermodynamics of galvaniC cells.

Surface ChemlstIy -definlUons; binding In crystals; condensation coefficient; sticking probability; adsorption Isotherms; Langmuir model; types of Isotherms; determination of surface area of adsorbents (BE11; applications of adsorptions.

Atomic & Molecular Spectroscopy - structure of free atom; Bohr model; electronic structure of diatomic molecules; potential energy curves; rotational spectroscopy; vibrational spectroscopy; vibration-rotation spectroscopy.

Text

Atkins. P.W. 1990. Physical Chemistry. 4th edn. Oxford.

CHEM2S1 APPLIED CHEMISTRY lOcp

Not offered in 1994.

CHEM261 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRYIOcp

Prerequisites CHEM 10 1. CHEM 102.

Hotus 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work wtn coun t for 15% of the final assessment but a pass In this work Is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

This subject Is an Introduction to environmental chemiStry. fOCUSSing on the hydrosphere and the atmosphere. Specific topics include general Introduction; properties. composition and redox equHtbrla In natural and waste waters; chemical aspects of nitrogen and phosphorous cycles: water


pollution; municipal and wastewater treatment; nature and the composition of the atmosphere; atmospherlc pollutants; analytical methods.

Text

Manahan. S.E. 1990. Environmental Chemistry. 5th edn. Lewis.

CHEM311 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

Prerequisite CHEM211.

lOcp

Hotus 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 200/0 of the final assessment but a pass In the laboratory work Is a prereqUisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

Principles of selected Instrumental techniques (e.g. emission spectroscopy and electro-analytical procedures). Solvent extraction; chromatography (theory and techniques).

Text

Christian. G.D. & O·Rellly. J.E. 1986. Instrumental Analysis. 2nd edn. Allyn & Bacon.

CHEM312 CHEMOMETRICS Scp

Prerequisites CHEM211. MATH 102 (or MATH 112).

Hotus 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work/ aSSignments each week for half a semester.

Examination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/ assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass In the laboratory/assignment work Is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

Use of computers In chemistry to improve the performance of procedures using optimisation methods and to enhance the analysis of measurements using linear and non-linear regression and factor analysis. Theory is exemplified with typical everyday problems.

Text

No fonnal text; materlal to be advised.

CHEM313 INDUSTRIAL CHEMICAL ANALYSIS

I Prerequisite CHEM211.

L I5cp

SocUonFI.o Chomlltry Subject Descriptions

Hours 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutOrials/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work! aSsignments each week for half a semester.

Emminat10n One I hour paper. The laboratory! assignment work wt1l count for 20% of the final assessment huta pass In the laboratory/assignment work Is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

A SUlVey of selected techniques for specialised or high volume analysis used In areas as diverse as industrial. R&D. hospital and nuclear chemiStry. Topics include electronic analytical signal processing; automated analysis (flow analysers, batch analysers. samplers); applications of computers and robots; X-ray/electron microprobe analysts; radiochemical analysis; kinetic and enzymatic methods of analysis.

Text

No formal text; material to be advised.

CHEM314 TRACE ANALYSIS IN ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS

Not aVailable in 1994.

CHEM321 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY


Sop

lOcp

Hotus 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorials! workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratorywork will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work Is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

A general course exploring the range of modem Inorganic chemistry, Including synthesis. reactlvtty and applications of spectroscopic methods.

Metal Chemistry - transition elements and coordination chemiStry; lsomertsm. f-blockelements, Inorganic reaction mechanisms. electron transfer and voltammetry.

Organometalltc ChemiStry - main group and transition metals; structure and bonding: cycltc donors; carbonyl and olefin complexes; applicattons to Industrial catalysis.

Inorganic Spectroscopy - electronic spectroscopy; vibrational spectroscopy; nuclear magnetic

J I __

Feculty of Science end Mathe.".tlcs

resonance spectroscopy; Introduction to other methods (e.g. Mossbauer. electron spin resonance. and chfroptlcaJ spectroscopy).

Text

Purcell, K.F. & Kotz, J.C. 1980, An Introduction to Inorganic Chemistry. International edn. HoltSaunders.

CHEM322 METAL-METAL BONDING AND CWSTER CHEMISTRY 5cp

PrerequisUe CHEM221.

Hours 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work/ assignments each week for half a semester.

Elcamlnatlon One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/ assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory/assignment work Is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

Metal-metal multiple bonding; lower halide clusters, structure and bonding In boranes and tranSition metal clusters; higher nuclearlty clusters; clusters and catalysIs; Zintl species.

Text

No fonnal text; material to be advised.

CHEM323 BIOINORGANIC COORDINATION CHEMISTRY 5cp


Hours 2 hours of lectures. hour of tutorials/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work/ assignments each week for half a semester.

Examination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/ assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment buta pass In the laboratory/assignment work is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

Synthesis of complexes of multidentate and macrocycl1c ligands; metal-directed reactions and stereoselectivlty; metalloproteins and metalloenzymes; bloelectrochemlstry and redox proteins.

Text


CHEM331 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY lOcp


Secllon Fly. Chemistry Subject Descriptions


~n One 2 hour paper. The laboratorywork will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in the laboratory work Is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

The central theme of this course will be organic syntheSIS. A sUlVeyoftmportant synthetic reactions for functional group transfonnations and carboncarbon bond fonnatton with emphasis on the chemoand stereo-selectivity and mechanisms of these reactions. Systematic approach to syntheSIS - the dlsconnectton/synthon method. Examples of syntheses and discussion of some literature classics.

Text

As for CHEM231.

CHEM332 HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY 5cp

Not available in 1994.

CHEM333 ORGANIC REACTION MECHANISM


5cp

Hours 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work/ aSSignments each week for half a semester.

Elcaminatlon One 1 hour paper. The laboratory / assignment work will count for 20% of the flnal assessment buta pass in the laboratory/assignment work Is a prerequlstte for a pass in the subject.

Content

The course will cover a selection of topics such as neighbouring group parttcipation. oxldatton mechanisms. azidobenzene pyrolysis. and the Identification of reactive tntennedlates. The use of these reactive tntennedlates In organic syntheSiS wUl be emphaSised.

Text


CHEM334 IDENTIFICATION OF NATURAL COMPOUNDS 5cp


Hours 2 hours of lectures. hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work/ assignments each week for half a semester.

1


Elcamlnatlon One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/ assignment work win count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass In the laboratory/assessment work Is a prerequisite for a pass In. the subject.

Content

The course explores several case studies from the chemical literature tn which the Isolatton. purification and identification of bacterial, fungal. plant or marine secondary metabolites are reported. Topics such as chromatographic methods. spectroscopy. simple derlvatlsation procedures and biosynthesis will be discussed In the context of the Identification of small organic compounds. for example. terpenes. steroids and oligopeptides.

Text

No fonnal text: material to be advised.

CHEM335 ORGANIC SPECTROSCOPY 5cp


Hours 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorials and 3 hours of workshops/ laboratory each week for half a semester.

Elcamlnatlon One I hour paper. The laboratory / workshop work will count for 200/0 of the final assessment but a pass In the laboratory work is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

The course will cover applications of ultravlolet/ visible. Infrared. lH and l3e nuclear magnetic resonance and mass spectrometry tn the structural elucidation of organiC compounds.

Text

Williams, D.H. and Fleming, I. 1988, Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemistry, 4th edn, McGrawHill.

CHEM341 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY lOcp

Prerequisites CHEM241, MATH 102 (orMATHI12).


Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass In the laboratory work Is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Section Five Chemistry SubJect Descriptions

Content

ElectrodJcs - the metal solution interface and stnlcture of the double layer. rates of charge transfer reactions; detennlnatlon of charge transfer reaction mechanisms; electrochemical techniques; introduction to cOITOsion.

Molecular and Electronic Structure - the use of quantum mechanics and molecular group theory In chemistry; matter waves; free electron and particle in a box; atomic and molecular Schrodingerequation and solutions thereof; symmetry elements and point groups of molecules; symmetry adapted linear combination of atomic orbitals: Ho.ckel molecular orbital theory.

Text


CHEM342 ELECTROCHEMICAL SOLAR ENERGY CONVERSION 5cp

Prerequisites CHEM24I, MATH 102 (or MATH 112).

Hours 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutOrials! workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work/ aSSignments each week for half a semester.

Examination One 1 hour paper. The laboratory/ assignment work will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass In the laboratory/assignment work Is a prerequisite for a pass In the subject.

Content

Electronic structure of solids; semlconductor/ solution Interfaces; photoexcltatton and charge transfer at semiconductor solution Interfaces; electrochemical photogalvanlc cells and electrochemical photovoltaic cells.

Text


CHEM343 MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY 5cp


Hours 2 hours of lectures. hour of tutorlals/ workshops and 3 hours of laboratory work/ aSSignments each week for half a semester.

Examination One 1 hour paper. The laboratoryl assignment work will count for 200/0 of the final assessment but a pass tn the laboratory/assignment work Is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content


Atomic and Laser Spectroscopy - spontaneous emission of radiation; measurement of radiative lifetimes of atoms and molecules; population inversion mechanism In gas lasers.

PhotoelectronSpectroscopy-resonantmultlphoton ionisation photoelectron spectroscopy; HeI and Hell photoelectron spectroscopy of diatomic molecules.

Text


CHEM361 ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY lOcp


Hours 2 hours of lectures. 1 hour of tutorials. and 3 hours ofiaboratory/llbrary/workshop/slte viSits each week for one semester.

Examination One 2 hour paper. The laboratory/ library/workshop/site visits will count for 20% of the final assessment but a pass in this work is a prerequisite for a pass in the subject.

Content

Principles laid down In CHEM261 will be expanded Into a more detailed treatment of the chemistry of the hydrosphere. the atmosphere. and the geosphere. SpeCific topics include advanced aquatic chemiStry; aquatic microbial biochemistry. phase interactions on surfaces and clays; pollutton and treatment of water by trace elements and radloacttvity; photochemical smog: acid rain. greenhouse. ozone hole; energyandresources; environmental chemistry of the geosphere: parttculate matter In the atmosphere; organiC pol1utants In the atmosphere and the geosphere; environmental toxicology.

Text

Manahan. S.E. 1990. Environmental Chemistry. 4th edn. Lewis.


Environmental Science Subject DeIIcrlptlona

EMGT and ENV subjects are avaUable only to candidates who have enrolled In the Bachelor of Environmental Science In 1994 and in subsequent years,

EMGTIOI FOUNDATIONS OF ENVIRON· MENTAL MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequisite Nil

Hours 4 hours perweek lectures, seminars. fieldwork and directed reading for one semester.

Examination Assignments and final examination.

Content

This subject establishes the foundations of environmental management. The need for and approaches to 'state of the environment' reporting. environmental auditing. risk assessment and management and the Incorporation of these within effective environmental management systems are explored In relation to the environmental stresses which are currently being generated by human activities at local. regional. national and global scales. Responses to these stresses are compared with the requirements of ecologically sustainable use of natural resources and to the demands of current environmental legislation. The value of an integrated approach to environmental problem solvingtsemphaslsed throughout this unit. Concepts will be demonstrated by examinations of selected case studies In environmental management; by group analysis of key issues and by excursions to representative industries. agencies and organisations.

Text

To be advised.

ReJerences

Buckley, R. 1991. Perspectives in Environmental Management. Springer-Verlag, Berlin.

Standards Australia. 1991. Draft Australian Standard: Environmental Management Systems. Standards Australia. North Sydney.

World Commission on Environment and Development. 1987. Our Common Future (The BrundtlandReport). 1991 Australian Edition. Oxford University Press.


EMGTI02 SOClAL DEVELOPMENT AND THE ENVIRONMENT lOcp

Prerequis!te NU

Hows 2 hours face-to-face. 6 hours directed study per week.

g,camtnation One written exam. one essay and tutorial asSignment.

Content

The idea ofwGreen History". the distinction between development and growth. the concepts of development and underdevelopment. western versus 'native' perspectives on development. Australian aborigines and their Impact on the environment. European perceptions of Australia. Impact of European development of Australia on native Australians and the environmen t. Indigenous and European archaeology. Heritage values.

Text No set text. a complete Itst of references will be provided at the commencement ,of the subject. However, students might usefully consult:

Knudtson. P and Suzlki. D. 1992. Wisdom oj the Elders. Sydney. Allen and Unwin

Lines. W.J. 1991. Taming the Great South Land. Sydney. Allen and Unwin

Martin. S. 1993. A New Land: European Perceptions oj Australia 1788·1850. Sydney. Allen and Unwin

Ponting. C. 1991. A Green History oj the World. Hannondsworth. Penguin

Walker. K.J.(ed) 1992. Australian Environmental Policy:TenCaseStudtes. KenSington. NSWUnIVersity Press

ENVI02 ENVIRONMENTAL VALUES AND ETHICS lOcp

Prerequisite Nil

Hours 2 hours face-to-face. 6 hours directed study per week for one semester.

Examination One written exam. one essay and tutorial assignment.

Content An examination of religions (Chrlstianlty). patrtarchy. science and technology. growth and progress as key sources of despotic attitudes toward the environment. Responses to the above In the follOwing traditions In environmental philosophy: Stewardship. Native

Section Five Environmental Science Subject Descriptions

Ecology. AnImal Uberation. EcolOgical Rlghts. The Land Ethlc. Deep Ecology. Ecofemlnlsm. SOclal Ecology and the Gala Hypothesis.

Texts No set text. a complete Itst of references will be provided at the commencement of the subjects. However, prospective students could profit from reading: Bookchln. M. 1989. Remaking Society. Montreal. Black Rose Books

Capra. F .. 1982 The Thming Poln~ London. Flamingo

Devall. B. and Sessions. G. 1985. Deep Ecology. Utah. Peregrine Smith

Leopold. A. 1966. A Sand Country Almanac. New York. Oxford UniVersity Press

Merchant. C. 1980. The Death oj Nature. San Francisco. Harper and Row

Nash. R 1990. The Rights oj Nature. Lelchhardt. PrImavera Press

ENVI03 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES AND PROBLEMS lOcp

Prerequisite Nil Hours 5 hours per week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment.

Content A problem solving approach to regional issueswhtch emphasises Integration of the basic sciences. including measurement and statistics to provide solutions to environmental problems. Objectives of the subject Include development ofltbrary research skills. problem solVing skills. communication and writing skills. The assessment will be based on reports and class presentations.

Typical regional environmental Issues from which exercises may be drawn Include: the environmental impact of coal mining and industry in the Hunter Valley and the Impact of urbanisation on the ecosystems associated with Lake Macquarte and selected wetlands areas.

Text

To be advised.

References

Chlras. D.o. 1991. Environmental Science. 3rdedn. The Benjamin/Cummings Pub.Co .. Redwood City. California

Various Environmental Impact Statements

Faculty of Science and Mathamatlcs

SCEN subjects are available only to candidates who enrolled In the Bachelor of Environmental Science degree prior to 1994.

SCEN201 ENVIRONMENTAL INVESTI-GATIONS U lOcp

Prerequisite SCEN 10 I.

HOUTS 3 hours per week for two semesters.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour examination at the end of semester 2.

Content

A field based study. utilizing analytical techniques from a range of scientific disciplines to Investigate and provide solutions to environmental problems associated with human activity.

Text

To be advised.

SCEN202 ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING AND POLWTION CONTROL IOcp

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester. field work.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

This course examines the environmental planning and development control system In N.S.W. Reference is also made to current pollution controllegtslation. The emphasis In this course Is to understand the system which controls development and thevartous requirements for environmental assessment for different types of development. A number of local and regional case studies will be examined to illustrate the various legislative requirements.

Text

Farrter. D. 198B. Environmental lAw Handbook Planning and lAnduse In N.S. W.. Redfern Legal Centre. Redfern.

SCEN203 WATER RESOURCES MANAGEMENT lOcp

HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester. 3 days field work.


Content

This Course examines many of the major environmental Issues associated wtth water

Section Five Environmental Science Subject Descriptions

resources development in Australia. Following an Introduction to hydrology and water quality In the catchment ecosystem. issues covered include reseIVoir management. eutrophication. dredging. channelization. wetland and floodplain management. Irrlgatlon/ saltnisatlon and wastewater disposal. Catchment management is Introduced as the basis for water resources planning and management.

Text

To be advised.

SCEN301 ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECT lOcp

Prerequisite SCEN20 I.

Content

An Investigation and report of an environmental problem oftnterest to the student utilizing scientific methodology.

SCEN302 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT TECHNIQUES IOcp

Prerequisite SCEN202.



Content

This course will examine the rationale and methodology of environmental impact assessment (EIA) and will lookat a numberof Impact assessment techniques In practice. The phenomenon ofEIA will be discussed and current developments in environmental management will be examined. Reference will also be made to environmental documentation prepared for various developments.

Texts

Walhern. P. (ed) 19BB. Environmental Impact Assessment. Unwin Hyman.

Beder. S. (ed) 1990. Environmental Impact Statements. Selected Readings. Environmental Education ProJect. University of Sydney.


Geography Subject DeecriptiOIlS

GEOGIOI INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IOcp

Prerequlsites Nil. Students should note that GEOGIOI and GEOGlO2 are prerequisites for the Geography Major In Arts and Science. and for Geography Honours GEOG401 and GEOG402.

HOUTS 2 hours lectures and 2 hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion.

&amlnation Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

An Introduction to physical geography Including meteorology and climate; the Influence of geomorphiC processes on landfonns; weathering. rtvers. tce. frost. wind and the sea; the phYSical. chemical and biological characteristics of the soll and the development of soil profiles; environmental and historical factors that Influence plant cUstrtbution.

Practical work includes an Introd~ction to the study ofcllmatlc data and maps. and the use oftopographlc maps and aerial photographs for landfonn analysis.

Text

Brtggs. D. & Smithson. P. 1985. FUndamentals oj Physical Geography. paperback Hutchinson.

GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN GEOGRAPHY lOcp

Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOGIOI and GEOG102 are prerequisites for the Geography Major In Arts and Science. and for Geography Honours GEOG40 I and GEOG402.

HOUTS 2 hours lectures and 2 hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion.


Content

An introduction to human geography including cultural. population. economic. development and urban geography.

Practical work includes an introduction to elementary statistical data and Us presentation by thematic maps In human geography.

Section Five Geography Subject Descriptions

Text

Fellman. J .. Getis.A. & Getis. J. 1992. Human Geography: Landscapes oj Human Activities. 3rd edn. W.C. Brown. Dubuque 1A.

GEOG201 METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY lOcp

Prerequisite GEOG 101.

HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester.


Content

An Introduction to statistics and computing for PhYSical Geography. Study of cartographiC. photographic and aerial photographic methods In geography.

GEOG202 METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY lOcp


HOUTS 4 hours per .week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessmen t and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

Introductory methods appropriate to Human Geography descrtptive and inferential statistics will be emphasised and there will be an introduction to computing. sUIVey analysis and research design.

GEOG203 BIOGEOGRAPHY AND CLIMATOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisite GEOG 10 I.

HOUTS 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work.

Exam1nation Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

An Introduction to biogeography. Definition and scope of the subject Is examined and Its Interdisciplinary nature emphasised. Ways of describing and analysing the ranges of organisms In space and time are explored. Some emphasis Is placed on rainforest for the tllustration of prtnclples and for the gaining of field experience.

An introduction to climatology on a synoptic and meso-scale including radiation and heat budgets~ precipitation processes; general circulation; agricultural climatology; applied climatology.

i i ,

Texts


Linacre, E. & Hobbs, J. 1983. The Australian Climatic Envtronment, paperback WHey.

Pears, N. 1985, Basic Biogeography, 2nd edn, Longman.

WHUams, J.B. Harden, G.J. et al 1984, 1Tees and shrubs in rainforests oj NSW and Southern Queensland, University of New England.

Reference

Attenborough, D. 1981, Life on Earth. Fontana/ Collins.

GEOG204 GEOMORPHOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA lOop

Prerequisite GEOG 10 1.

Hotus 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work.


Content

Rocks and their weathering. structural landforms, soils. slope deVelopment and mass movements, fluvial. aeolian and coastal processes and landforms. glacial and periglacial processes and landforms.

GEOG207 POPULATION, CULTURE AND RESOURCES lOop

Hotus 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work.


Content

The course examines three themes: population and migration; culture and technology; resource use. These themes are Illustrated by historical and contemporary case studies at a variety of spatial scales.

Topicsinc1ude: world and regional population growth; migration. population growth and settlement; culture. plural societies and development; culture. technology and resource use; agricultural origins, dJffuslon and practices.

GEOG2OS CITIES AND REGIONS lOop


Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work.

Section Flv. Geography Subject o.scrlptlons

Examinalion ProgresSive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

The course examines the changing nature and distribution of fundamental aspects of hUman geography; urban settlement and the mode of production. These themes are tllustrated. by case studies of clUes, Industries, regions and communities.

Topics Include: regional growth and Industrtal development; processes of urban and regional change; urban hierarchies; internal structure of the city; social impact of change; poUcy and planning.

GEOG301 ADVANCED METHODS IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY lOop

Prerequisites GEOG20 1 plus either GEOG203 or GEOG204.

This course consists of a 5-day field excursion (Le. 40 hours of the 56-hour course) together with 2 hours per week for 8 weeks).


Content

The course Includes a field excursion to evaluate Sydney'satrpollutlon problems. Emissions, sources. air pollution monitoring. meteorology and possible preventattve measures will be assessed. The remaining time will be devoted to methodology and analysis related to data collected on the field trip. NB: The field trip will take place prior to the first semester.

GEOG302 ADVANCED METHODS IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY lOop

Prerequisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or GEOG208.

This course mainly Involves a major field excursion.

Examination Progressive assessmen t.

Content

This course includes a major field excursion to Investigate a contemporary hu man geography Issue. Methods Include sUIVey design. questionnaire construction, social analysts. qualitative field methods. computer aided mapping and geographic Information systems.

'NB The field trip may be scheduled prior to the beginning of second semester.


GEOG304 THE BIOSPHERE AND CONSERVATION lOop

Prerequisites GEOG 201 plus GEOG203 and GEOG204.

Hotus 4 hours per week for one semester~ 4 days fieldwork.


Content

Biogeography: Emphasis on plant geography, with examination of both the ecological and htstortcal aspects of the subject. A small herbarium collection Is reqUired of each student.

Biological ConseIVation: An introduction to the subject. In which the importance of a genettcallybased approach Is emphasised.

Soils: Processes of soil erosion. soil conseIVation issues and methods.

Texts

Houghton, P.D. & Charman, P.E.V. 1986, GlossarIJ ojTerms used in SoU Conseroation, SoH ConseIVation Service of N.S.W.

Smith, David 1990, Continent in crisis, Penguin.

Williams. J.B. and Harden, G.J. 1980, Rainforest Climbing PIWlts, University of New England.

Reference

Kellman, M.C. 1980, Plant Geography, 2nd edn, Methuen.

GEOG305 CLIMATIC PROBLEMS lOop

Prerequisites GEOG20 1 and GEOG203.

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 1 day fieldwork.


Content

Introduces palaeoclimates In the Pleistocene and Holocene, and the reasons behind climate changes over those pertods. Descrtbes anthropogenic Impacts on climate. through air pollution. on local. regional and global scales. Evaluates near-future possible climate variations over the next century.

Text

Bridgman, H.A. 1990, Globol Air Pollution Problems for the 1990s. paperback Belhaven Press.

Section Five Gaography Subject o.scrlptlons

Recommended Reading

Bradley, R.S. 1985, Quaternary Paleaoclimatology, Allen & Unwin.

Elsom, D. 1992, Atmospheric PollulJon, 2nd edn, B1ackwells.

GE0G306 GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA: AN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE lOop


Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days field work.

Examination Progressive assessmen t and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester.

Content

Selected aspects of the population, settlement and land use patterns of Australia. Topics to be studied include exploratory images. Image-makers and distorters. and visions of AustraUa before 1900; migration to the New World; population of Australia 1788-1981; urbanisation In Australia; agrtcultural land use 1788 to 1914.

GEOG309 SOCIETY It SPACE lOop

PrereqUisites GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or GEOG208.

Hotus 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork/project work.


Content

This course examines the interaction of social groups with each other and with the urban enVironment. A vartety of social groups defined by ethnic and socioeconomic status. family structure and gender will be studied. The course will use a variety of methodological approaches to soclo-spatial behaViour.

GEOG310 DIRECTED STUDIES IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY lOop


Hotus 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork/project work.


Content


This course will nonnally be given by a visiting lecturer - the subject to be advised.

GE0G311 HYDROLOGY IOcp

Prerequisites GEOG20 1 and GEOG203.

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork.


Content

The course examines the distrlbu tlon of water tn the environment. Most attention wtll be given to atmospheric moisture. the hydrologic cycle. catchments, runoff. sediment and solute transport, soil water and water resources.

Text

Ward. R.C. and Robinson. M. 1989. Principles oj Hydr%gy. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hill.

GEOG315 PRODUCTION, WORK AND TERRITORY 10cp


Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork.


Content

The course examines contemporary changes in production, distribution and consumption. by referring to agriculture, manufacturing and services. It focuses on the geography of employment and industrial change; and the evolution of food supply systems.

Topics include: the territorial organisation of production. the role of large corporations, technological change. divtsions of labour and the changing nature of work. and the changing role of the state.

Case studies of Impacts of economic change on people and communities are drawn from the AsiaPacific basin and from site vtsits.

Texts

Dicken. P. 1992. Global Shift. 2nd edn. Paul Chapman.

Section Five Oeography Subject Descriptions

GEOG316 DIRECTED STUDIES IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY IOcp

PrerequisUes GEOG20 1 plus either GEOG203 or GEOG204.

Hours 4 hours per week for one semester; 2 days fieldwork/project work.


Content

This course will nonnally be given by a visiting lecturer - the subject to be advised.


Geology Subject DeSCriptiOIUl

GEOLIOI THE ENVIRONMENT IOcp

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester. including lectures. practlcals and field excurSions.

ExwnInation One 3 hour paper. assignments and laboratory practfcals

Content

A lecture. field and practical course which examines in the widest context the evolution of our planet and man's environment. Specific topics are the Earth In space; evolution and dynamics of the planet Earth; evolution of the atmosphere, hydrosphere. biosphere and life; the impact of climatic change; structures produced as a result of plate collision.

Texts

Sldnner. B.J. & Porter. S.C. 1987. Physical Geology. Wiley

or

Press. F. & Siever. R. 1986. Earth. 4th edo. Freeman

GEOLI02 EARTH MATERIALS

Prerequisite GEOL \0 1

lOcp

HOUTS 6 hours per week for one semester. Including lectures, practicals and excursions

&amination One 3 hour paper. aSSignments and practical examinations.

Content

A course dealing with the features and Internal structure of rock forming minerals. the characterIstics of volcanoes and their products. weathering processes and depositional environments of sediments. The metamorphism of rocks In different tectonic settings, energy resources and ore deposits of different origins are also discussed.

Texts

Press. F. & Siever. R 1986. Earth. 4th edn. Freeman

or

Sldnner. B.J. & Porter. S.C. 1987. Physical Geology. Wiley

Reference

Whitten. D.G.A. 1973. A Dictionary oj Geology. Penguin.

Section Five Geology Subject Descriptions

GEOUII OPTICAL MINERALOGY IIcp

PrerequisUe GEOL \02

Not to count for credit with GE0L20 1

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester, including lectures. practlcals and class assignments

Examtnatton One 2 hour paper and practical examinations

Content

A basic course in crystallography. optical mineralogy and rock-fonning minerals. Successful completion of this course Is fundamental to further study in geology.

Text

Gribble. C.D. and Hall. A.J. 1992. A practical lntroductlon to optical miner%gy. UCL Press

GEOUl2 INTRODUCTORY PETROLOGY IOcp

Prerequisite GEOL211

Advisory prerequisite CHEM 102

Not to count for crecUt with GE0L202

Hours 6 hours per week for one semester,lncluding lectures and practtcals

Examination One 3 hour paper. class assignments and practical examinations

Content

An Introduction to the petrography and petrology of Igneous and sedimentary rocks.

Text

Gribble. C.D. & Hall. A.J. 1992. A practical introduction to optical mineralogy. UCL Press

References

Donaldson. C.H .• MacKenzie. W.S. & Guilford. C. 1982. Atlas oj Igneous rocks and their textures Longman

Adams. A.E., MacKenzie. W.S. et al 1984. Sedimentary rocks under the microscope. Longman

GEOUl3 ANCIENT ENVIRONMENTS AND ORGANISMS lOcp

Prerequisite GEOL \02

Not to count for credit with GE0L203

HOUTS 6 hours per week for one semester. including lectures. practtcals and field excursions

Examination One 3 hour paper. class assignments and practical examinations

Ii 1

'1

. il

Content


A course integrating ancient sedimentary environments with the evolution and morphology of ancient life. stratigraphic relationships and time. The course will be supported by field excursions in the local area.

Text

Ciarkson. E.N.K. 1986. Invertebrate Palaeontology and Evolution, 2nd edn. Alien & Unwin

GEOL214 GEOLOGICAL STRUCTURES AND RESOURCES IOcp

PrerequisUe GEOL 102


HolUs 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One 3 hour paper. class assignments. practical examination

Content

A course dealing with geological structures and economic resources.

Texts

Park. R.G. 1988. Foundations of Structural Geology. 2nd edn. Blackie

Evans. A.M. 1987. An Introduction to Ore Geology. 2nd edn. Blackwell

GEOL215 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 21510cp

Prerequislle GEOL 102

Not to count for credit with GE0L205. GE0L206

Hours 14 days field work In two 7 day sessions for one semester (February. week before Semester I. Easter break) and 2 hours per week class work dealing with the Interpretation of geolOgical maps.

Examination By report and practical examination

Content

(I) AnalysIs of the southern margin of the Sydney Basin. Igneous and metamorphic rocks of the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt. and mapping of a composite pluton. Preparation of reports and supporting tutorials, and lectures.

(11) Mapping of metamorphosed shelf and trench sequences of the Southern Lachlan Fold Belt; integration and presentation In a report.

Text

McClay. K. 1987. The MappIng of GeologIcal Structures. Open Unlv.Press

Section Five Geology Subject Oescrl ptlon.

GEOL216 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 216 5cp

PrerequisUe GEOL215

CorequisUe GEOL214


Hours 7 days field work for one semester (September break)

Examtnatlon By report

conrent MappIng of low grade metamorphIc rocks of the Cohar area; structural and stratigraphic Interpretation; relationship of sulphide rocks to structure and stratigraphy; presentation of results and Interpretation In a report.

Text

McClay. K. 1987. The MappIng of GeologIcal Structures. Open Unlv. Press

GEOL311 IGNEOUS PETROLOGY AND CRUSTAL EVOWTION IOcp

Prerequlslle GE0L312



Examination One 3 hour paper and class assignments

Content

Igneous Petrology

Petrology of Igneous rocks In relation to the tectonic environment. Changes In Igneous petrogenesis throughout time.

Crustal Evolution

Geological evolution of selected Archaean and Proterozoic terrains In Australia: comparisons and contrasts with modern tectonic environments to assess the processes of continental growth throughout geolOgical time.

Text

WUson. M. 1989. Igneous Petrogenesis. A global tectonic approach, Unwin & Hyman

GEOL312 METAMORPHIC PETROLOGY IOcp

Prerequislle GEOL212



&aminatfon One 3 hour paper. class assignments

Content

Faculty of Selene. and Mathematln

Petrogenesis of metamorphic rocks; Interpretation of textures of rocks formed during prograde metamorphism. ductile shearing' and accretionsubduction; processes involved In the production of grain shapes, Intergranular and Intragranular features.

Texts

Yardley. B.W.D .. MacKenzIe. W.S. et al 1990. Atlas of met.amDrph!c rocks and their lextures. Longman

Yardley. B.W.D. 1989.AnintroductfontoMet.amDrphic Petrology. Longman

GEOL313 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICS IOcp


Not to count for credit with GEOL30 I. GE0L302


&amination One 3 hour paper. class assignments

Content

Structural Geology

Analyslsof multiply-deformed terrains; ductile shear zones. kinematic Indicators and analysis. strike slip faulting. thrust and extensional tectonics.

Ezploratlon Geophysics

Geophysical techniques - their Interpretation and appl!catlon.

Text

Park. R.G. 1988. Foundations ofS!ruclural Geology. 2nd edn. Blackle

GEOL314 STRATIGRAPHIC METHODS IOcp




Examination One 3 hour paper. and class aSSignments

Content

Stratigraphic Methods

Stratigraphic nomenclature; biostratigraphic zones; factors In I!thostraUgraphy; straUgraphlc breaks; strattgraphlc facies changes; catastrophiC stratigraphy versus uniformitarianism; correlation; straUgraphlc palaeontology. Types of stratigraphiC

Section Five Geology Subject Descriptions

maps and sections; numerical analYSis of data strings; numerical map analysIs.

IIlcropaiaeontolollY

MlcrofossUs; their morphology. stratigraphIc dtspersal and economic importance.

Geochronology and World Stratigraphy

Principles of age dating; regional geolOgical patterns of selected provinces of the world.

Texts Consult lecturer concerned

GEOL315 SEDIMENTOLOGY

Prerequlslles GEOL212. GEOL213


IOcp

HolUs 6 hours per week for one semester

Examination One three hour paper. class aSSignments

Content

LitholOgiC associations In relation to the depositional facies of their ancient and recent environments of formation with emphasis on the genetic connection between the geological setting of a deposlttonal area and Itssed!mentary fill (basin analysis). The subject of petroleum maturation Indices within the basin will also be covered.

Texts

Reading. H.G. 1986. Sed!mentaryenvlronmentsand facies. 2nd edn. Blackwell Scientific Publ!catlons

Walker. RG. 1984. Facies Models. 2nd edn. Geoscience Canada Reprint Series 1

GEOL316 GEOLOGY OF FUELS



IOcp


&amination One 3 hour paper. class assignments

Content

Coal Geology

A course dealing with coal formation. depositional and tectonic environments and peat mires. coal exploration and utilisation.

Petroleum Geology

Origin. source. migration. entrapment and distribution of petroleum and gas; the exploration and exploitation techniques of Its detection. evaluation and recovery.

Texts

Feculty of Science end Mathemetlcs

Consult lecturers concerned

GEOL317 RESOURCE AND EXPLORATION GEOLOGY IOcp

Prerequisites GEOL212. GEOL214

Not to count for credit with GEOL30I. GE0L306


&am.lnatton One 3 hour paper, class assignments

Content

This course presents fundamental criteria for the formatlonandcharacteristicsofmetalUc ore deposits. An emphasis Is placed on an understanding of orefonnlng processes In magmatic hydrothennal and metamorphic settings. Laboratory study of material from world- class ore deposits complements the lecture course.

Texts

Evans. A.M. 1987. An Introduction to Ore Geology 2nd edn. Blackwell.

Roberts. R.G. & Sheahan. P.A. 1988. Ore Deposit Models. Geo!. Ass. Canada

GEOL318 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 318 Scp


Hours 7 days fieldwork (February, week before Semester I)

Examination By report

Content

A field course including core logging. section work, interpretation of data and basin analysis. A course studying a modern carbonate depositional environment.

GEOL319 GEOLOGY FIELD COURSE 319 Scp

Prerequisites GEOL 216. GE0L313

Hours 10 days fieldwork (July break)

Examination By report

Content

Structural analysIs of a multiply-deformed hlghgrade metamorphic terrain (Broken Htll Block). Evaluation of P-T -t histories In the terrain and Integration with tectonic models.

Texts

Consult lecturers concerned

S.ctlon Five Oeology Subject Descriptions

GEOL320 GEOLOGY OF QUATERNARY ENVIRONMENTS IOcp

Prerequisites GEOL213 or GEOG204


Emminat10n One 3 hour paper. class assignments

Content

Topics covered Include an oveIView of the general characteristics of the Pleistocene and Holocene. oceanic and terrestrial palaeoclimatic records. the fossil record and Pleistocene faunal extinctions Quaternary dating methods, sea-level change and coastal evolution, glaciation, aridity. analysis of Quaternary sedimen ts and stratigraphic nomenclature.

Texts

Consult lecturer concerned.

Focully of Science Ind Mathemltlcs

Mathematics Subject Deacriptiona

LEVEL 100 MATHEMATICS SEME8TER SUBJECTS

The usual route for study of Mathematics beyond first year - for example, to obtain a "Major In Mathematics" startswlth MATIlI 02 In first semester. followed by MATH 103 In second semester. However, entry at this point reqUires an adequate level of knowledge and sklll: The minimum level Is a mark of at least 120 out of ISO in 3-unitMathematics at the New South Wales H.S.C. examination.

Any student with less than this level of knowledge or sktll can pursue MATIllll. followed by MATIl112. This combination allows entry to seven of the seventeen level-200 subjects In Mathematics. Such a student could take MATI-1l03 In a later year to meet the prereqUisites for further mathematics subjects.

Note: MATH III is not appropriate fora studentwho has performed substantially above the minimum level for entry to MATII 102/ 103.

MATHll1 MATHEMATICS 111 IOcp

Prerequisite 2U mathematics at HSC level or eqUivalent.

Not to count for credit with MATH 1 0 1.

Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutOrial hours perweek for one semester. The subject is repeated In each semester.

&amination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment.

Content

Elementaryalgebra. trigonometryandgeometrywith appltcations. Calculus with applications of differentiation and integration. Newton's method. Trapezium and Simpson's Rules. Vector geometry, and its applications. Complex numbers and their applications.

Texts

University of Newcastle. Mathematics 111 Thtorial Notes 1994.

Stewart. J. 1991. Calculus. 2nd edn. Brooks/Cole

(ThIs book will also be a useful reference for MATIl112. MATIl201 and MATH203).

References

Ash. C. and Ash. R. B. 1987. The Calculus Tutoring Book. IEEE Press.

Section Flv. Mathematic. Subject Description.

Dobson. Annette J. & Stokoe. Janet 1986. SelfPacedlntroductayMathemattcs. 3rdedn.ANU Press.

MATH1l2 MATHEMATICS 112

Prerequisites Either MATIlIII or MATH 101.

Not to count for credit with MATII 102.

IOcp

Hows 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours perweek for one semester. The subject is repeated In each semester.

&amination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment.

Contents

Techniques of integration with applications. Differential equations and applications. Calculus of several variables together with applications. Taylor Series expansions. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues. eigenvectors.

Texts

University of Newcastle Thtorial Notesfor MAm 112 1994.

Stewart, J. 1991. Calculus, 2nd edn, Brooks/Cole

(ThIs bookwtllalso bea useful reference forMATH201 and MATI(203).

References

Ash. C. and Ash. R.B. 1987. The Calculus Tutoring Book. IEEE Press.

Stein. S.K. 1982. Calculus andAnalytlcalGeometry. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hm.

MATHI02 MATHEMATICS 102 IOcp

Prerequisites Either a performance of at least 120 out of ISO in 3U Mathematics at the NSW HSC or eqUivalent or MATIlII 1.

Not to count for credit with MATH 1 12.

Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week for one semester.

&amlnation One 3 hour paper.

Content

Calculus of functions of a single variable. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Taylor'S series. Conics. Complex numbers. Differential equations. An Introduction to the calculus of functions of two variables. Vectors. Matrtx algebra. Eigenvalues, eigenvectors.

I I! I

Texts


Unlverslty of NewcastJe Thtortal NotesJor MAllil02 1994.

Edwards. C.H. & Penney. D.E. 1990. Calculus and Analytical Geometry. 3rd edn. Prentice-Hall.

Advisory Text

Munro. G.P. 1991. ProoJs & Problems in Calculus. 2nd edn. Carslaw.

References

Ayres. F. 1974. Calculus. Schaum.

Anton. H. 1987. Elementary Unear Algebra. 5th edn. Wiley.

Farrand. S. & Poxton. N.J. 1984. Calculus, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Stein. S.K 1982. Calculus and Analytical Geometry. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hm.

Walters. FRF.C. & Wehrhahn. K 1989. Calculus I. 2nd edn. Carslaw.

MATHI03 MATHEMATICS 103 IOcp

Prerequisites MAlli 102 or (MATH I I I and MATH I 12) or pennlsslon ofH.O.D. of Mathematics.

Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours perweek for one semester.

Examtnation One 3 hour paper.

Content

An introduction to numerical mathematics and computing. Vector geometry and linear algebra: vector spaces, linear maps. AnalysIs of the convergence of sequences and series. Power Series. Elementary Theorems of Mathematical Analysis.

Counting. probability. and an introduction to finite mathematical structures.

Text

University of Newcastle Thtorial notesfor MAllil03 (1994).

AdviSOry Text

Munro. G.P. 1991. ProoJs & Problems in Calculus. 2nd edn. Carslaw.

References

Blnmore. KG. 1985. Mathematical Analysis. CUP.

Brisley. W .. Notesfor Unear Algebra, Lecture notes In Mathematics. University of Newcastle. No.5.

Section Five Mathematics Subject Descriptions

or

A Basis for Unear Algebra.

Chapman. C.RJ. 1973.lntroductionloMathematical Analysis. RoutJedge & Kegan Paul.

Giles. J.R. Real Analysis: An Introduclory Course. Lecture notes in Mathematics. Univ.Newcastle. No.6.

Grimaldi. RP. 1985. Discrete and Combfnalortal Mathematics. Addison-Wesley.

MATH201 MULTIVARlABLE CALCULUS 5cp

Prerequisite Both MATH 11 I and MATH 112. or both MATHI02 and MATH 103. or MATHI02 and Pennlsslon of Head of Department.



Content

Partial derivatives. Vector operators. Taylor's Theorem. Line Integrals. Multiple and surface Integrals, Gauss. Green. Stokes' Theorems.

Text

University of Newcastle. MathematfcslIThtorialNotes (1994).

Recommended

Stewart. J. 1991. Calculus. 2nd edn. Brooks/Cole.

Grossman. S.l. & Demck. W.R 1988. Aduanced Engineering Mathematics Harper & Row.

References

Adams. RA. 1987. Calculus oj Several Variables. Addison Wesley.

CUlje!, C.R 1990. Exercises in MulUvruiable and Vector Calculus. McGraw-HUl.


Greenberg. M.D. 1988. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Prentice-Hall.

Kreyszlg, E. 1988. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn. paperback WUey: (earlier editions are acceptable).

Piskunov. N. 19B I. DlfferenUaI and Integral Calculus VoLl and 11. 2nd edn. Mlr.

Splege!,M.R 1974. TheoryandProblemsoJAdvanced Calculus. Schaum.

Widder. D.V. 1989. Aduanced Calculus. Dover.


MATH202 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS I IIcp

Prerequisite MATH201.

Corequislte MATH203.



Content

Orthogonality. Series of Orthogonal functions, FouIier Series. Separation of vaIiables, The classical partial dilTerential equations (heat/diffusion. wave. Laplace. Poisson).

Text

University of Newcastle, Mathematfcs 117UtorialNotes (1994).

References

Broman. A. 1989, An Introduction to Partial Dlfferential equations. Dover.

Churchill. RV. & Brown. J.W. 1978. Fourier Series and Bowulary Value Problems. McGraw-HUI.

Greenberg. M.D. 1988, Advanced Engineering Mathematics. Prentice-Hall.

Grossman. S.l. & Demck. W.R. 1988. Aduanced Engineering Mathematics. Harper & Row.

Kreyszig. E. 1988, Advanced Englneering Mathematics. 6th edn. paperback WUey (earlier editions are acceptable).

MATH203 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS I 5cp

Prerequisite Both MATHIII and MATH I 12 or both MATHI02 and MATHI03. or MATHI02 and Pennisslon of the Head of Department.


.£Kwninatton One 2 hour paper.

Content

Linear differential equations with constant coefficients, Ltnear differential equations - general case. Series solutions - speCial functions. Laplace transfonns, Appltcattons.

Text

University of Newcastle Mathematics 11Thlortal Notes (1994).


References

Boyce. W.E. & D! Prtma. RC. 1986. Elementary D!lTerenlIalEquatlonsandBoundaryValueProblems. Wiley.

Burghe.. D. & Barrte. M. 1981. ModeUing into D!lTerential equations. Ellis-Horwood.


Grossman. S.l. & Demck. W.R 1988. Aduanced Engineering Mathematics. Harper & Row.

Hochstadt. H. Dlfferential equations. Dover.

Kreyszlg. E. 1988. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. 6th edn. paperback WUey (earlier editions are acceptable).

Martin. W.T. & Relssner. Elementary D!fferentlal Equations. Dover.

Sanchez. D.A .. Allen. RC. et al 1988. Dlfferent!al equations. 2nd edn. Addison Wesley.

Stewart. J. 1991. Calculus. 2nd edn. Brooks/Cole.

MATH204 REAL ANALYSIS 5cp

PrereqUisite (MATIl102andMATH 103) or (MATH 1 I I and MATH I 12 and MATH 103).



Content

Study tn an axiomatic way of the properties of the real number system and functions defined on the real numbers and on the Euclidean plane.

Properties of the real number system: the Supremum Axiom. completeness and compactness. Convergence of sequences. Limits of functions and algebra of limits. continuity and algebra of continuous functions. Properties of continuous functions. Properties of differentiable functions: Mean Value Theorems and Taylor polynomial approximation. The theory of Riemann Integration. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus.

Text

Giles. J.R. Real Analysis: an inlToduclory course (Lecture Notes inMathematics. Unlv.NewcastJe. No.6).

References

Blnmore. KG. 1985. Mathematical Analysis. CUP.

Clapham. C.RJ. 1973. Introduction 10 Mathematical Analysis. Routledge & Kegan Paul.

Faculty of Science and Mathematln

Clark.C.W.I982.ElementaryMathemattcalAnaillSfs. Wadsworth-Brooks.

Spivak. M. 1967. Calculus. Benjamin.

MATH20& ANALYSIS OF METRIC SPACES &cp


Hows 2 hours per week for one semester.

EKamination One 2 hour paper.

Content

Study in an axiomatic way of the analysis of more abstract spaces: metric and normed linear spaces.

Convergence of sequences and series in R" with Euclidean and other norms.

Convergence of sequences and series in function spaces with uniform and Integral norms. the three fundamental theorems on uniform convergence Involving continuity. Integration and differentiation and application to power series.

Completeness. closedness and density In metric spaces;

Banach Fixed Point Theorem and Its application to functions on the real line and to the solution of Integral equations.

Local and global continuity of mappings on metric spaces and topological characterisations.

Sequential compactness and appitcatton in approximation theory.

Text

GHes. J.R 1989. Introduction to the AnalllSIs oj Metric Spaces. CUP.

References

Bartle. RG. 1976. The Elements oj Real AnalllSIs. WHey.

GHes. J.R. Real AnalllSIs: An Introductory Course (Lecture Notes InMathematics. Unlv. Newcastle. No.6).

Goldberg. RR 1964. MethodsoJRealAnalllsls. Ginn Blalsdell.

Simmons. G.F. 1963. Introduction to Topologll and Modem AnalllSIs. McGraw-Hill.

White. A.J. 1968. Real AnalllSIs. Addison-Wesley.

MATH206 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 1 5cp

Prerequisite Both MATHIII and MATH I 12 or both MATHI02 and MATH 103. or MATHI02 and PermiSSion of the Head of Department.


CorequJsite MATH201.

HoW'S 2 hours per week for one semester.

ExamInatIon One 2 hour paper.

Content

Complex numbers. Cartesian and polar forms. geometry of the complex plane. solutions of polynomial equations. Complex functions. mapping theory. limits and continuity. Differentiation. the Cauchy-Riemann Theorem. Elementary functions. exponenttal. logarithmiC. trigonometric and hyperbolic functtons. Integration. the CauchyGoursat Theorem. Cauchy's Integral formulae. Liouville's Theorem and the Fundamental Theorem of Algebra.

References

Churchill. RV .• Brown. J.W. et al 1964. Complex Variables and Applications. McGraw-HHl.

Grove. E.A. & Ladas. G. 1974.lntroductfDntoComplex Variables. Houghton Mlmln.

Kreyslg. E. 1979. Advanced Engineering MathematicS. WHey.

Levinson. N. & RedheiTer. RM. 1970. Complex Variables, Holden-Day.

O·Nelll. P. V. 1983. Advanced Engineering Mathematics. Wadsworth.

Spiegel. M.R 1964. Theory and Problems oJComplex Variables. McGraw-Hill.

Tall. D.O. 1970. Functions oj a Complex Variable I and II, Routledge & Kegan Paul.

MATH207 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 2 5cp

Prerequisite MATH206 and MATH 1 03.



Content

Taylor and Laurent power series expansions. meromorphic functions. analytic continuation. Residue theory. Singular points. evaluation of some real Integrals and power series. the Argument Principle and Rouche·sTheorem. Conformal mapping and applications. Harmonic functions. Laplace's equation.

References

Churchtll. RV .. Brown. J.W. et al 1984. Complex Variables and Applications. McGraw-Hill.


Grove. E.A. & Ladas. G. 197 4.lntroductfDn to Complex Variables. Houghton Mlmln.

Levinson. N. & RedhefTer. RM. 1970. Complex Variables. Holden-Day.

PenniSi. L.L. 1963. Elements oJComplex Variables. Holt, Rinehard and Winston.

Spiegel. M.R 1964. Theory and Problems oJComplex Variables. McGraw-Hm.

Tall. D.O. 1970. Functions oj a Complex Variable I and II. Routledge & Kegan Paul.

MATH209 ALGEBRA

Prerequisite MATH 103.

Corequlsite MATH218.


EKaminatton One 2 hour paper.

Content

5cp

An Introduction to algebraic structures. Groups, rings, fields. polynomials over fields. Applications.

References

Hillman. A.P. & Alexanderson. G.L. 1983. A first undergraduate course in abstract algebra, Wadsworth.

Jones. A .. Morris. S.A. & Pearson. K.R 1991. AbslTact aigebraandJamous impossibilities. Springer-Verlag.

MATH210 GEOMETRY 1 5cp

Prerequisite (MATH 102 and MATH 103) or (MATH I I I and MATH I 12 and MATH 103).


&amination One 2 hour paper.

Content

An elementary approach. using models, touching Euclidean plane geometry, Hyperboltc plane geometry. Projective geometry, and their relationship to one another.

Text

Notes for Geometry. Mathematics Department (1994)

References

Blumehtnal. L.M. 1970. Studies in Geometrll. Freeman.

Eves. H. A. 1972. A Survell oj Geometry. Allyn & Bacon.

Garner. L.E. 1981. An Outline oJPrQjectlve Geometry. North Holland.


Greenberg.M.J.1980.Euclideanandnon-Euclidean Geometry. North Holland.

MATH211 GROUP THEORY &cp

Prerequisite (MATH 102 and MATH 103) or (MATH I II and MATH 112 and MATH 103).



Content

Groups, subgroups, Isomorphism. Permutation groups. groups of linear transformations and matrices. lsometries. symmetry groups of regular polygons and polyhedra. Cosels. Lagrange's theorem. nonnal subgroups, Isomorphism theorems.

Text

Ledermann. W. 1976. Introduction io Group Theory. Longman.

References

Baumslag. B. & Chandler. B. 1968. Group Theory. Schaum.

Budden. F.J. 1972. The FascfnatiDnoJGroups. CUP.

Gardiner.C.F.1980.AFlrstCourseInGroupTheory. Springer.

Hersteln. l.N. 1975. Topics In Algebra. 2nd e<ln. Wiley.

Weyl. H. 1952. Slimmetry. Prtnceton.

MATH212 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 5cp

Prerequisites MATH 102 or MATH 103 or (MATH III and MATH 112).


EKamtnation One 2 hour paper.

Content

An Introduction to various aspects of discrete mathematics: Graphs. set theory. relations and functions. lOgiC, counttngand recurrence equations.

Text

Ross. K.A. & Wright. C.R.B. 1988. Dtscrete Mathematics. 2nd edn. Prentice-Hall.

References

Alagor. V.S. 1989. Fundamentals oj Computing. Prentice-Hall.

Grimaldi. RP. 1985. Discrete and Combfnatoricl Mathematics. Addison-Wesley.


Kalmanson. K. 1986. An Introduction to Dfscrete Mathematics and Its Applications. Addison-Wesley.

Dierker. P.F. & Voxman. W.L. 1986. Discrete Mathematics. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

MATH213 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING IIcp

Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATH 103) or (MATH II I and MATH 112).


Examtnation One 2 hour paper.

Content

Thts topic is designed to Introduce students to the idea of a mathematical model. Several reallstlc situations will be treated begtnningwith an analysis of the non-mathematical origin of the problem. the formulation of the mathematical model. solution of the mathematical problem and tnterpretatlon of the theoretical results. The use of computers ts: an tntegral part of this subject.

References

Andrews. J.G. & McClone. RR 1976. Mathematical Modelling. Butterworth.

Bender. E.A. 1978. An Introduction to Mathematical Modelling. Wtley.

Clements. RR 1989. Mathematical Modelling. CUP.

Cross. M. & Moscardlni. A.D. 1985. Learning the Art oj Mathematical Modelling. Eilts Horwood.

Dym. C.L. & lvey. E.S. 1980. Principles oj Mathematical Modelling. Academic.

Edwards. D. & Hamson. M. 1989. Gulde to Mathematical Modelling. Macmtllan.

Haberman. R 1977. Mathematical Models. PrentlceHall.

Ltghthtll. J. 1980. Newer Uses oj Mathematics. Penguin.

Smith. J.M. 1971. Mathematical Ideas in Biology. Cambridge.

Smith. J.M. 1974. Models in Ecology. Cambridge.

MATH214 MECHANICS 6cp

Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATH 103) or (MATH II I and MATH I 12 and MATH 103).



Section Five Mathematics SUbJect Descriptions

Content

Summary of vector algebra. VelOcity and accelerations. Kinematics of a particle. Newton's Law of Motion. Damped and forced oscillations. Projectiles. Central forces. Inverse square law. The energy equation. Motion of a particle system. Conservation of linear momentum and of angular momentum. Motion with variable mass.

Text

Lunn. M. 1991. Ajlrstcourse in Mechanics. Oxford.

References

Chorlton. F. 1963. Textbook oj Dynamics. Van Nostrand.

Goodman. L.E. 1963. Dynamics. Blackie.

Marion. J.B. 1970. Classical Dynamics. Academic.

Meirovttch. L. 1970. MethodsoJAnalyttcalDynamics. McGraw-Htll.

(See also references for MATH 20 I. 202. 203).

MATH216 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 15cp

Prerequisites MATH 102 or MATH 103 or (MATH III and MATH 112).


E.\:amtnation One 2 hour paper.

Content

Operations research Involves the application of quantitative methods to the analysts of problems Involving the operation of systems and its aim Is to evaluate the consequences of certain decision choices and to improve the effectiveness of the system as a whole.

The course concentrates on aspects of discrete mathematics which have been successfully applied to problems in a dlversityofareas. Including industry. commerce and defence. These include such topiCS as network analysis and linear programming.

References

Daellenbach. H.G. & George. J.A. 1978. Introduction tD Operations Research Techniques. Allyn and Bacon.

Htllier. F.S. & Lieberman. G.J. 1980. Introduction tD Operations Research. 3rd edn. Holden-Day.

Taha. H.A. 1987. Operations Research. 4th edn. MacMillan.

Hastings. Kevin J. 1989. Introduction to the MathematicsofOperatfons Research. Marcel Dekker.

\


MATH216 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS I5cp

Prerequisites (MATHI02 and MATH 103) or (MATHlll and MATH1l2 and MATHI03) or (MATHIII and MATH 112 and COMP.IOI).



Content

Sources of error In computation. Solution of a single nonlinear equation. Interpolation and the Lagrange Interpolating polynomial. Finite differences and applications to Interpolatton. Numerical differentiation and Integration including the trapezoidal rule, Simpson's rule and Gaussian Integration formulae. Numerlcal solu tion of ordinary differential equations - Runge-Kutta and predlctorcorrector methods. Numerical solution of linear systems of algebraic equations. Applications of numerical methods to applied mathematics. engtneertngand !he sciences will be made !hroughout the course.

Text

Burden. RL. & Faires.J.D. 1989. NumertcalAnalysis. 4th edn. Prindle. Weber & Schmidt.

References

Atkinson. K.E. 1984. An Introductkm tD Numerical Analysis. Wtley.

Balfour. A. & Marwlck. D.H. 1986. Programming in Standard Fortran 77. Heinemann.

Cherney. W. & Kincaid. D. 1985. Numerical Mathematics and Computing. 2ndedn. Brooks-Cole.

Cooper. D. & Clancy. M. 1985. OhJ PascalI. WHey.

Etter. D.M. 1984. et seq. Pmblem Solving with Structured Fortran 77. BenJamin.

Etter. D.M. 1983. Structured Fortran 77JorEngineers and Scientists. Benjamin.

Gerald. C.F. & Wheatly. P.O. 19B4.AppliedNumertcal Analysis. Addison·Wesley.

University of Newcastle Computing Centre. HandbookJor VAX/VMS.

University of Newcastle Computing Centre. V AX-ll Fortran.

IlATH217 LINEAR ALGEBRA 1 15cp

Prerequisite MATHI020r(MATHIII and MATH I 12).

Not to count for credit with MATH218.


Section Flv. Mathematics Subject Descriptions


Content

Matrix representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonalizatlon. Inner product spaces. Difference and differen ttal equations.

Text

Gerber. R 1990. E1emenlmy Linear Algebra. Brooks/ Cole.

References

Anton. H. 1987. Elementary LinearAlgebra. 5thedn. Wtley.

Bloom. D.M. 1979. Linear Algebra and Geometry. Cambridge.

Brisley. W.WHey 1973. A BasisJor Linear Algebra.

Johnson. R. & Vinson, T. 1987. Elementary LInear Algebra. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Lipschultz. S. 1974. Linear Algebra. Schaum.

Roman. S. 1985. An Introduction to Linear Algebra, Saunders.

Rorres. C. & Anton. H. 1979. Applicotlons oJLinear Algebra. Wiley.

MATH218 LINEAR ALGEBRA 2 5cp

Prerequisite (MATH 102 and MATH 103) or (MATH I II and MATH 112 and MATH 103).

Not to count for credit with MAn-I217.



Content

Vector spaces and subspaces. Linear Maps. Matrix representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Dlagonalisatlon, Difference equations. Inner product spaces. Gram-Schmidt process. Orthogonal. unitary. hermfUan and normal matrices.

Text

MATH218 Lecture Notes and Exercises (1994)

References

Anton.H.1987.ElementaryLinearAlgebra.5thedn. Wiley.

Bloom. D.M. 1979. Linear Algebra and Geometry. Cambridge.

Brisley. W. 1973. A BasisJor Linear Algebra. Wiley.

Johnson. R & Vinson. T. 1987. Elementary Linear Algebra. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.


Lipschutz. S. 1974. LInear Algebra. Schaum.

Roman. S. 1985. An Introduction to LInear Algebra, Saunders.

Rorres. C. & Anton. H. 1979. Applications of LInear Algebra, Wiley.

MATH301 LOGIC AND SET THEORY lOcp

Prerequisites 20 credit points from 200 level Mathematics. Including at least one of MATH204. 209.211, 212. 218.



Content

(An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects).

Set Theory: Elementary concepts. relations and functions. Partlallyand lowly ordered sets. Simllarlty and eqUivalence. Axiom of choice. Zermelo's postulate. Well-ordering theorem and Zorn's lemma. cardinality. Cantor's theorem. SchrMer-Bernsteln theorem.

Mathematical Logic: Axiomatic treatment of the propositional calculus. Deduction theorem. Completeness theorem. Quantification theory. Axiomatic treatment of the predicate calculus. First order theories. Models. Logical validity. GOde!'s completeness theorem.

ReJerences

Crossley. J. et al 1972. What is Mathematleal Logle? Oxford.

Halmos. P.R 1960. Naive Set Theory. Springer 1974; Van Nostrand.

Hofstadter. D.RGodel. Escher 1981. Bach: anEtemal Golden Braid. Penguin.

Kline. M. 1980. The Loss ojCertatnty. Oxford.

Lipschutz. S. 1964. Set Theory and Related Toples. Schaum.

Margarls. A. 1967. FIrst Order Mathematical Logle. Blaisdell.

Mendelson. E. 1979. Introduction to Mathematleal Logk:. 2nd edn. paperback Van Nostrand.

MATH302 GENERAL TENSORS AND RELATIVITY

Prerequisites MATH201 and MATH21B


IOcp

Section Five Mathematic. Subject Descriptions

EXamination One 2 hour paper

Content


Covartantandcontravartantvectors. general systems of coordinates. Covariant differentiation. differential operators In general coordinates. Riemannian geometry. metric. curvature. geodeSICS. Applications of the tensor calculus to the theory of elastiCity. dynamics. electromagnetic field theory. and Einstein's theory of gravitation.

References

Abram. J. 1965. Tensorcalculus through Differential Geometry. ButteIWorths.

Landau. L.D. & Lifshitz. E.M. 1962. The Classleal Theory of FleWs. Pergamon.

Lichnerowtcz. A. 1962. Elements oJTensor Calculus, Methuen.

Tyldesley. J.R. 1975. An Introduction to Tensor Analysis. Longman.

Willmore. T.J. 1972. An Introduction to Differential Geometry. Oxford.

MATH303 VARIATIONAL METHODS AND INTEGRAL EQUATIONS lOcp

Not offered In 1994

MATH304 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2 lOcp

PrerequisItes MATH20 1. MATH203. MATH204 and MATH21B.



Content


Separation of variables, homogeneous equations. exact equations. integrating factors. The fundamental existence and uniqueness theorem. Homogeneous and non-homogeneous systems of first order linear equations. Equattonswith constant coemclents and exponential function of matrices. Non-linear twodimensional autonomous systems. Critical points and phase diagrams. Existence of periodic solutions. Stabtlity and Lfapunov function. Boundary value problems.

References


carrier. G.F. & SmIth. P. 1968. Ordinary Differential equations. Blaisdell.

Jordan. D.W. and Pearson C.E. 1987. Nonlinear Ordinary Differential equations. 2nd edn. Oxford.

MATH306 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 2 lOcp

Not offered In ) 994

MATH306 FWID MECHANICS

Not offered In 1994

MATH307 QUANTUM AND STATISTICAL

lOcp

MECHANICS lOcp

Not offered tn 1994

MATH30S GEOMETRY 2 lOcp

Prerequisites 20 credit points from 200 level Mathematics. Including at least one of MATI-l209. 211. 21B.


Exwnination One 2 hour paper.

Content


Calculus on Rn: directional derivatives. curves tangent vectors. mappings, vector fields and Integral CUIVes.

Affine spaces: calculus on affine spaces. the geometry of cUlVes and surfaces. Parallelism and covariant derivatives. Shape operators. Gaussian curvature.

Introduction to Riemannian manifolds.

Reference

Thorpe. J.A. 1979. Elementary TopIcs In Differentlol Geometry. Springer.

IlATH309 COMBINATORICS

Not offered In 1994 lOcp

IlATH310 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS lOcp

Prenequislte MATH205.



Content

(An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects.)

Section Five Math.metle. Subject o.scrlptJons

Nonned linear spaces. finite dimensional spaces. inner product spaces. Linear mappings. continuity. topological and isometric Isomorphisms. Dual spaces. the Hahn-Banach Theorem and reflexivity. Conjugate mappings. operators on Hilbert space. adjOint operators and projection operators.

Texis

Giles. J.R 19B7. Introduction to Analysis ofMetrlc Spaces. CUP.

Giles. J.R. 19BB. Introduction 10 Analysis of Normed Unear Spaces. Untv. Newcastle Lecture Notes.

References

Bachman. G. & Narlcl. L. 1966. FunctlonalAnalysis. Academic.

Banach, S. 1988. Theorle des Operations Uneaf.res. 2nd edn. Chelsea.

Bollobas. B. 1990. LInear Analysis. an Introductory course. CUP.

Brown.A.L. & Page. A. 1970. Elements of functional Analysis. Van Nostrand.

Jameson. G.J.O. 1974. TopologyandNormedSpaces. Chapman-Hall.

Kolmogorov. A.N. & Fomln. S.V. 1957. Elements of the Theory of functions and Functional Analysis VoLi. Grayloch.

Kreyslg. E. 197B. Introductory Functional Analysis wIth Applications. Wiley.

Simmons. G.F. 1963. Introduction to Topology and Modem Analysis. McGraw-Hill.

Taylor. A.E. and Lay. D.C. 19BO. Introduction to Functional Analysis. 2nd edn. WIley.

Wilansky. A. 1964. FunctlonalAnalysls. Blaisdell.

Young. N. 19BB. An lnIToductlon to HUbert space. CUP.

MATH31l MEASURE THEORY AND INTEGRATION



&:'wnination One 2 hour paper.

Content

lOcp


Algebras of sets, Borel sets. Measures. outer measures. measurable sets, extension of measures.


Lebesgue measure. Measurable functions. sequences of measurable functions. simple functions. Integration. monotone convergence theorem. the relation between Riemann and Lebesgue integrals. Lp-spaces. completeness.

References

Bartle.RG. 1966. TheElementsoJIntegratton. Wtiey.

de Barra. G. 1981. Measure Theory and Integration. Ellis HOlwood.

Halmos. P.R 1950. Measure Theory. Van Nostrand.

Kolmogorov. A.N. & Fomln. S.V. 1970. Introductory Real Analysis. Prentice-Hall.

MATH312 ALGEBRA

Not offered In 1994

MATH313 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS (THEORy)

lOCp

lOCp

Prerequisites MATIl201. MATIl203. MATIl204 and MATIl218. Programming ability (hIgh-level language) is assumed.



Content


Solution ofltnear systems of algebraic equations by direct and linear iterative methods; particular attention wtll be given to the Influence of vartous types of errors on the numerical result. to the general theory of convergence of the latter class of methods and to the concept of "condition" of a system. Solution by both one step and multistep methods of Initial value problems Involving ordinary differential equations. Investigation of stabtllty of linear marching schemes. Boundruyvalue problems. Finite-difference (and finite-element methods) of solution of partial differential equations. If time pennits. other numerical analysis problems such as integration. solution of non-linear equations etc. will be treated.

Text

Burden. RL. &Falres.J.D. 1989. NumerlcalAnalysis. 4th edn. Prtndle. Weber & Schmidt.

References

Atkinson. K.E. 1978. An Introduction to Nwnerlcal Analysis. Wtiey.

Section Five Mathematic. Sublect Descriptions

Ames. W.F. 1969. Numerical Methods Jor Partial Differential Equalions. Nelson.

Cohen.A.M. etal1973. NumericalAnalysis. McGrawHill.

Conte. S.D. &deBoor. C. 1980.ElementoryNumerlcal Anal!lsis. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hill.

Forsythe. G.E .. Malcolm. M.A. et al 1977. Computer Methods Jor Mathematical Computations. PrenticeHall.

Isaacson. E. & Keller. H.M. 1966. Analysis oj Numerical Methods, Wtiey.

Lambert, J.D. & Walt. R 1973. Computational Methods in Ordinary Differential Equations, Wtiey.

Mitchell. A.R & Walt, R 1977, The FIntte Element Method in Partial Differential Equations. Wtiey.

PIzer. S.M. & Wallace. V.L. 1983, To Compute Numerically: Concepts and Strategies. Little. Brown.

Smith. G.D. 1978. Numerical Solution oj Partial Differential Equations: FInite D!lference Methods, Oxford.

MATH314 OPTIMIZATION

Prerequisites MATIl201 and MATIl218



Content

lOCp


Many situations tn Economics. Engtneertng. Experimental and Pure Science are reducible to questions ofOptimtzatlon. The course Is introduced by considering some simple examples of this. The basic analysis and theory of convex sets and convex functions underlying optimizatton are then developed. The theory of linear programming. including Bland's antlcycling rule and duality. Is examined. Constrained nonlinear optimizatlon in both the convex and the smooth case are developed from a common separation argument. Eke1and's varlational prlnclple. descent methods and the one dimensional Fibonacci search for unconstrained problems fonn the final section of the course.

Text

University of Newcastle 1990. Lecture Notes. Optimization.

References


Greig. D.M. 1980. OptimIzation. Longman.

Hestenes. M.R 1975. OptlmlzationTheory:TheFlntte Dimensional Case, Wiley. .

Holmes. RB. 1972. A Course on Optimization and Best Appraxtmation Sprtnger.

Luenberger.D.G. 1969, OptimIzationb!l VectorSpace Methods, Wiley.

Luenberger. D.G. 1973, Introduction to linear and Nonlinear Programming, Addison-Wesley.

Ponstein. J. 1980, Approaches to the Theory oj OptimIzation. Cambridge Unlv.Press.

Roberts. R.W. & Vanberg. D.E. 1973. Convex FUnctions, Academic Press.

Werner. J. 1984. Optimization Theory and Applications. Fliedr. Vieweg & Sohn.

MATH316 MATHEMATICAL BIOLOGY lOCp

The use of computers Is an integral part of this subject

Prerequisites MATIl213.

MATH201. MATH203 and



Content


This subject will show the use of mathematical models to advance the understanding of certain biological phenomena. A number of biological situations will be Investigated and students will be expected to use both analytical and computational techniques to obtain results which can be compared wtth expertmental findings.

References

Edelsteln-Keshet. L. 1987. Mathematical Models in Biol1>gy. Random-House.

Jones. D.S. & Sleeman, B.D. 1983. D!lferential Equations and Mathematical Biology. Allen & Unwin.

Murray. J.D. 1989. Mathematical Biology. Sprtnger.

Segel. L.A. 1984. Modeling DynamIc Phenomena in Molecular and CeUular Biology. Cambridge.

IlATH316 INDUSTRIAL MODELLING lOCp

Prerequisites MATH201. MATH202, MATH203.

Section Five Mathematics SubJect Descriptions

MATIl213. MATIl216 and pennisslon of the Head of Department. Programming abtltty (high level language) is assumed.

Hotus Nominally (see content) 3 hours per week for one semester.

Examination Depending on course content either one 2 hour paper or one paper of less than 2 hours duration plus project

Content


Several 'industrial' models will be examined. each commenctngwith the problem In non-rigorous verbal fonn. proceeding to a mathematical fonnulation. solving the latter and terminating with a discussion of the 'Industrial' Interpretation of the mathematical results. Here. 'Industrtal' is meant in the widest possible sense. Models may be taken from some or all of the follOwing Industries: finance. commerce. manufacturing. mining. exploration, defence. scientific. travel and service.

At the same time small groupings of students will be involved in either a journal-based or an industrybased project. Each group will present a written report on its project. and probably a seminar too.

The follOWing reference list will be supplemented by other materials (e.g. journal references) as required.

References

Anderssen. RG. & de Hoog. F.R(eds) 1982. The Application oj Mathematics in Industry. Nljhoff.

Andrews. J.G. & McLone. R.R. 1976. Mathematical Modelling. Butterworths.

Barton. N.G. (ed). Mathematlcs-in·Industry Study Group !Proceedings oJCSIRO DivisionoJMathematlcs and Statistics, 1985, 1988. 1989).

Burghes, D.N. & Borrte. M.S. 1981. Modelling with Differential Equations Ellis Horwood.

Crank. J. 1984. Free andMovlng Bowulory Problems. Oxford Univ.Press.

Hill. J.M. 1987. One-dlmensional SteJan problems: An Introduction. Longman.

Klamkln, M.S. (ed). 1987. Mathematical ModeUIng: Classroom notes in Applied Mathematics. S.I.A.M.

Lin. C.C. & Segel. L.A. 1974. Mathematics applied to detenninisUc problems in the natural sciences. Macmillan.


Neunzert. H.(ed) 1988. Proceedings oj the Second European Symposiwn on Mathematics in Industry.

Kluwer Academic.

Noble. B. 1967. Applications oj Undergraduate Mathematics in Engineering. Macm!llan.

Tayler. A.B. 1986. Mathematical Models in Applied Mechanics. Clarendon Press.

Wan. F.Y.M. 1989. Mathematical Models and Their Analysis. Harper & Row.

MATH317 NUMBER THEORY 10Cp

Prerequisites 30 credit points from 200 level Mathematics.

Hours 3 hours per week In one semester.


Content


Divisibility and primes. Linear and quadratic congruences. quadratic reciprocity. Arithmetic functions and Mobius Inversion. Diophantine equations. Quadratic number fields.

References

Niven, I. & Zuckerman. H. 1980. An Introduction to the Theory oj Numbers. Wiley.

Ireland. K. & Rosen. M. 1982. A Classical Introducticn to Modem Nwnber Theory. Sprlnger.

Long. Calvtn T. 1982. Elementary Introducticn to Number Theory. Heath.

MATH31S TOPOLOGY

Not offered tn 1994

10Cp

Notes on Mathematics Level 300 Essay Assignment

Students enrolled in Level 300 Mathematics semester subjects will be required to complete an essay In an approved topiC chosen from the history or philosophy of Mathematics.

The essay Is a requirement for the satisfactory completion of one of the level 300 mathematics subjects taken by a student normally in the first semester of the student's 300 level program.

1\vo copies of the essay are to be submitted by the 10th week of the semester of which one will be returned to the student after assessment.

Subject prOvided by the Division of Quantitative Methods

Section FIYa Mathematics Subject Descriptions

1lAQM214 QUANT1TATIVE METHODS 10Cp


A Ust of subjects provided by the Division of Quantitative Methods to B.Edcoursesin the FacuUy of Education in 1994

These subjects are avaUable only to Bachelor of Education students.


B.Ed (Mathematics Education)

MAQM135 MATHEMATICS 1A

Hours 4 hours per week for a year.

Content

20Cp

Differential and integral calculus of functions of a single variable; AppUcations of Calculus including mechanics.

MAQM138 MATHEMATICS 1B


Content

20Cp

Algebra binomial theorem. mathematical inductton. complex numbers. matrix algebra. Geometry Euclidean and Analytlc. Computing an Introduction to microcomputers.

MAQM235 MATHEMATICS IlA

Prerequfsite MAQMI35.


Content

20Cp

Calculus of several varlables. vector calculus. Taylor and Fourier series. An analysis of real numbers. sequences. series and functions.

MAQM238 MATHEMATICS lIB


Content

10Cp

Vector spaces. linear dependence and Independence. Linear mappings. kernel and Image. matrices. Frequency dtstrlbution and graphs. measures of central tendency and measures of dispersion. Interpretation of scores, the Normal distribution. Correlation and regreSSion.

MAQM237 MATHEMATICS IIC


Content

10Cp

A study of spherical tJ1gonometry and its application to navigation. together with the celestial sphere. stderal time and solar time. The development of problem solVing skills and structured programming concepts associated with the implementation of computer based solu Uons to mathematical problems.

MAQM335 MATHEMATICS lilA

Prerequisite MAQM235.

HOUTS 4 hours per week for a year.

20Cp

Section Fly. BEd(Math EducaUon) Subject Descriptions

Content

Real variables. dilferentiab!l!ty, the mean value theorem. Riemann integration and the Fundamental theorem of theCal cui us. Complexvariables. Cauchy's theorem. power and Laurent series. singularities. residues and poles. conformal mappings.

Linear Algebra, inner product spaces. efgenspaces. diagona1isation of a quadratic form and a variety of appltcations. Ordinary differential equations of the first degree. Solution by serles. The methods of Frobenfus. Bessell and Legendre.

MAQM338 MATHEMATICS 11m


Content

15cp

Sets and classes of sets. sigma rings and sigma algebras construction of the rationals and reals. An Introduction to mathematlcallogtc. Elementary group theory. Transfonnatlon geometry and non-euclidean geometry.

MAQM337 MATHEMATICS mc


Content

15cp

Probab!l!ty distributions. sampling distributions, hypothesis testing. Topics In operations research such as linear programming. project scheduling. job sequencing. queueing theory. dynamic programming and decision theory. Computer applications to the above topics and to development tn computer aided learning.

MAQM435 MATHEMATICS IVA 10Cp

Available only to Bachelor of Education students.


Content

Comblnatorics. block deSigns. finite geometrics. laUn squares. magiC squares and Hadamard matrlces. Groups. rings. ideals. Integral domains and fields.

MAQM438 MATHEMATICS IVB 10Cp



Content

Number theory. prime numbers. congruences. Dtophenttne equations. Gaussian Integers. The htstorlcal development of mathematics - selected topics.


MAQM437 MATHEMATICS IVC lOop



Content NumericalAnalysis. solution of systemsof equations, numerical differentiation and integration, application to ordtnary differential equations. MlcrocompuUng using package software and programming to solve

course- related problems.

s.ctlon Five BEd (PrimEd & Early Child) Subject Descriptions

B,Ed(PrlmiuY Education)

MAQMI46 FOUNDATION STUDIES IN ElEMENTARY MATHEMATICS 15cp

Available only to Bachelor of Education students

HoUTS 3 hours per week for a year

Content This subject provides a background of mathematical content and skills needed by teachers of elementary mathematics. The content covers sets, elementary number theory, geometry, measurement and

probability.

B,Ed (Early Childhood) lOop

MAQM147 MATHEMATICS lEC

Available only to Bachelor of Education students


content This subject provides a background of mathematical content and skills needed by teachers in the Early Childhood field. Topics Include a study of elementary set theory, natural numbers integers and rational

umbers non decimal systems. number patterns. :lemen~ geometry, measurement and probability.


Phyeica Subject Deac:rl.ptiona

PBYSlll PHYSICS III

Not to count for credit with PHY&113.

lOop

Asswned knowledge HSC 2 unit Mathematics with a result in the top 300/0 of the candidature or equivalent.


Examtnation Progressive Assessment during the semester and one three hour paper at the end of semester.

Content

Basic Mechanics - Motion In one and two dimensions. Laws of motion. Objects In EqUilibrium. Work & Energy. Momentum and Collisions.

Electricity - Electric forces and fields. Electric energy and Capacitance. Current & Resistance. DC Circuits.

Rotational Mechanics - Circular Motion & Gravity. Rotational Dynamics. DertvaUon ofMomentofInertla. Rotational Kinetic Energy.

Stmple Harmonic Motion & Waves - Vibration & Waves. Sound. Simple Hannonlc OsctUator. Energy and Simple Hannonic Motion. Simple Pendulum. Classical Wave Equation. Super Position PrInCiple, Waves on Strings. Standing Waves, Beats.

There will also be 3 hrs/week of laboratory and tutorial work.

Text

Serway & Faughn 1989. College Physics. 2nd International edn ISBN 0-03-022952-9. Saunders College.

Reference

Gordon & Serway 1989, Study Guide with Computer Exercises to Accompany CoUege Physics. 2nd edn ISBNO-03-023474-3. Saunders College.

PHYSll2 PHYSICS H2 lOop

Not to count for credit with PHYSI14.

Asswned knowledge Pass In PHYS III or HSC 2 Unit Mathematics with result in top 30% of candidature or eqUivalent.


&a.mination Progressive Assessment durtng the semester and one three hour paper at the end of semester.

Section Five Physics Subject Descrlpttons

Content

Electromagnetlcs - Magnetism. Ampere's and Faraday's Laws, Induced Voltages and Inductance. AC Circuits. Electromagnetic Waves.

Thermal Physics -Definitions of Internal Energy. Heat. Work and Temperature, Prtnclples of SetUng up Temperature Scale. Constant Volume Gas Thermometer. The Ideal Gas Scale. Thermal Expansion of Solids. Heats of Transformation. Convection. Conduction and Radiation. Newton's Law of COOling. Stefan's Law. Planck's Radiation Law.

Optics - Reflection & Refraction of Ught. Huygen's PrInciple. Snell's Law, Index of refraction. Total Internal Reflection. Mirrors and Lenses. Virtual Objects. Magnification. Ray Diagrams. Optical Instruments.

Atomic & Nuclear - RelativUy. Quantum Physics. Atomic Physics. Molecules & Solids. Nuclear Physics. Nuclear Physics Applications. Elementary Particles.

Students who undertake Physics III and 112 and achieve a Credit average or better, can at the discretion of the Head of Department, be allowed to progress to second year PhYSiCS. Students who achieve a Distinction or High Distinction In Physics III can, at the discretion ofthe Head of Department, be allowed to undertake Physics 114.

Texts

To be advised. See PHYSI12 Notice Board.

References

Study guide to accompany above text.

PHYSll3 PHYSICS 113

Not to count for credit with PHYS II I.

lOop

Asswned knowledge HSC 2 unit PhYSiCS or 4 unit Science (with a result In the top 50% of the candidature) and HSC 3 unit Mathematics (with a mark of atleast 110/150) or MATH II I.

Hours An average of 6 con tact hours per week for one semester.

&amination Progressive Assessment during the semester and one three hour paper at the end of semester.

Content

Mechanics - Introduction. What the subJectofPhyslcs involves, Its alms and relationship to other

Flcully 01 Science end Mathemetlcs

disciplines. The framework of the physicist's method. The scientific method. Its advantages and llmltations.

The concepts of space and time. Kinematics. The classical fixed frame. Pure rotation and pure translation. The Galilean equations of motion (revision). Rotational kinematics.

Dynamics. The concepts of Inertial mass force. impulse and momentum. Free body diagrams 1n inertial and non-inertial reference frames. The laws of friction. The centre of mass. Principles of motion of the mass centre. Conservation of momentum. Combined rotation and translation. Line integrals and work. Energy. Kinetic energy and potential energy. The work-energy theorem. Conservative and non- conservative systems. Force as the gradient of potential energy.

Electrostatics and CUrrent Electricity - Coulomb's law in vector form. The definition of electric field strength E. Gauss's law and appltcattons. Definition ofelecbical potential and potential difference. Electrtc potential energy of a system of point charges. Obtaining the electric field from the electric potential function. Definition of capacitance. The capacitance of an Isolated object. Derivation of capacitance for plane, spherical and cyllndrlcal geometry. Capacttors In series and parallel. Energy storage in the electric field. Current Electricity. Definttlons of current density, resistance, resistivity, and electromotive force. Ohm's law. Instantaneous power transfer. EqUivalent circutt. Theventn's theorem. Ktrchhoffs laws. RC circuits.

Simple Harmonic Motion & Waves - Definition of terms. General solution of SHM equation. Simple harmonic osctllator. Circle of reference. Energy in SHM. Simple pendulum. Spiral spring. Torsion pendulum. Physical (compound) pendulum. Equlvalentsimplependulum.1Wo bodyosctllations. Damped harmonic oscillations. Resonance. Combination of SHM's at right angles. Lissajous figures.

Mathematical Supplements. The complex plane. Phasor representation. Superposition principle. Fourler analysis.

Types of waves - Mechanical Waves, Definitions, Properties. Equation of simple harmonic progressive wave and its derlvation. Frequency, wavelength, wave number velocity. Classical wave equation. Exponential form of propagating wave. Superposition Principle Linear systems. Beats. Standing waves.

Section Flv. Physics Subject Descriptions

Waves on strings. Waves in pipes. VelOCity of wave on stretched string. Doppler effect.

Thermal PhYSiCS -Definitions of internal energy, heat. work. thermal equt11brlum. and temperature. The Zeroth law of thermodynamiCS. The Flrst law of thermodynamics. The constant volume gas thermometer. The triple point cell. The Ideal Gas Scale. The International Practical TemperatureScale. Practical thermometers.

The thermal expansion of solids. Units of heat. Definition of heat capacity and specific heat. Molar heat capacities, at constant pressure and constant volume and the relationship between them for ideal gases. Heats of transformation. DefiniUons of convection, conduction and radiation. Stefan's law. Planck's Radiation law. Newton's law of cooling. CalOrimetry.

The equation of state of an ideal gas. lsovolumlc. tsobarlc isothermal. and adiabatic processes and the equations relating P and V for each. Work done when a gas changes volume. Reversible and irreversible processes. The Camot cycle. The PV diagram for the Carnot cycle using an Ideal gas as the working substance. The conversion of heat into work. The efficiency of a heat engine.

Text

To be adVised. See PHYSI13 Notice Board.

PHYS114 PHYSICS 114 lOcp

Not to count for credit with PHYS 112.

Asswned krwwledge Pass In PHYSI13.(Students obtaining a distinction or better In PHYS III can gain entJy Into PHYS 114 at the discretion of Head of Department).

Hours An average of 6 contact hours per week for one semester.

&aminatton Progressive Assessment during the semester and one three hour paper at the end of semester.

Content

Optics - Huygen's Principle wavefronts. Law of reflection. Snell's Law, Index of refraction. Total Internal reflection. Fermat's Prlnctple. Spherical mirrors. Refraction at spherlcal surface. Virtual objects mirrors, surfaces. lenses. Thin lenses. Interference ofltght; coherency. Young's double sltt experiment. The Omega navigation system. Diffraction, Fraunhofer and Fresnel. Single sltt


Fraunhoferdttfraction. Diffraction effects on Young's experiment. Raylelgh·scrlterlon. D1ffractiongratlng. Polarization of light. Law of Malus. Polarization by Reflection. Brewster's Law. Double refraction, 0 and E rays. Optic axis. Quarter wave plate. Circular polarization. Electromagnetic waves E & B field. Energy in EM Waves. Poyntlng vector.

Electromagnetism - The Lorentz Force. The BiotSavart Law. The Magnetic Force between 1\vo parallel Conductors. Ampere's Law. The Magnetic Field of a Solenoid. The Magnetic Fleld along the Axis of a Solenoid. Magnetic Flux. Gauss's law in Magnetism. Magnetic Field of the Earth.

Faraday's Law of Induction. Motional emf. Lenz's Law. Induced EMF's and Electrlc Fields. Generators and Motors. Eddy Currents.

Self-Inductance. RL Circuits. Energy in a Magnetic Field. Mutual Inductance. AC. circuits.

Rotation and Advanced Mechanics - Rotational dynamics. Torque and angular momentum around a point. In cross product form. Torque and angular momentum about an axis. The rotation of a rlgtd body about a fixed axis. Derlvation of L=omega.

PrinCiple of conselVation of angular momentum. The parallel axis theorem. The perpendicular axis theorem. Radius of gyration. Dynamics of combined rotation and translation. Couple as a free vector. Theorem of the lateral displacement of force.

Selected topics from graVitation, physics of flUids and non-linear dynamics.

Atomic and Nuclear PhYSics - The necessity for quantum physics. Black body radiation, the UV catastrophy and Planck's resolution by quantifying oscillator energies. The Planck radiation formula. Photo- electric effect, and Einstein's resolution bytntroducingthe photon as the quantum of radiation. Compton effect, as further evidence for photons. Old quantum theory of the atom. Atomic stability. The Bohr atom and derlvatton of spectra for single electron atoms. Limitation of the Bohr model and method.

Quantum mechanics. Introduction to quantum and atomic level phenomena and devices. The de Broglie concept of matter waves and wave particle duality's at atomic scale. Super-conductivity as example. Electron diffraction as waves. Uncertainty prlnciple as limitation on measurement. Quantum electronic deVices. Stern-Gerlach. Pumping of states. Application to atomic clocks, masers, lasers.

S.cUonFlve Physics Subject Descriptions

Natural Radioactivity. Historical perspective.

Early observations. alpha. beta and gamma rays minus scattering, Alpha scattering and the Rutherford nuclear atom (qualitative only). Radioactivity. Energy scales of phenomena. Radioactive decay modes. Decay constants. half life. activity. Natural decay series and existence of shortlived species. Survey of radiation detectors. Applications - radio-carbon dating.

Nuclear Physics. Mass defect, binding energy curve. Nuclear reactions. neutrons. Coulomb barrier, fiSSion, fusion, and mass- energy balance calculations.

Thermal Physics - Introductory kinetic theory. The relationship between Internal energy and temperature for Ideal gases.

The second law of thennodynamics. Entropy. The thermodynamic temperature scale. Text

To be advised. See the PHYS 114 Notice Board.

PHYS201 QUANTUM MECHANICS AND ELECTROMAGNETISM lOcp

Prerequisites MATIlI02. PHYSIl3 and PHYS 114 but performance to acceptable standard In PHYS III and PHYSIl2 may substitute for PHYSIl3 and PHYSl14 with the approval of the Head of Department. MATH III and MATH 112 may substitute for MATIlI02.

HoLUs 6 hurs per week for one semester.

Examination Progressive assessment during semester, and one 2 hour paper at end of semester. Content

Basic prlnciples of modem quantum mechanics, and electromagnetic theory. Laboratory, computational and tutorial work in these areas. Text

See the Physics 200 notice board

References

To be advised

PHYS202 MECHANICS AND THERMAL PHYSICS lOcp

Prerequisites MATHI02. PHYSIl3 and PHYSI14 bu t performance to acceptable standard In PHYS III and PHYS1l2 may substitute for PHYSI13 and PHYSI14 with the approval of the Head of

Feculty of SCience end Mathematics

Department. MATH III and MATH 112 may substitute for MATH 102.

HOUTS Up to 6 hours per week for one semester.

EXamination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester.

Content

Thennal physics, advanced classical mechanics and an introduction to relattvity theory.

Texts

See the Physics 200 Notlce Board.

References

To be advised.

PHYS203 SOLID STATE AND ATOMIC PHYSICS lOep

Prerequisite PHYS20 I.


Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester

Content

Solid state physics andappltcatlons, atomic physIcs and spectroscopy, optics and laser physics.

Texts

See the PhYSiCS 200 Notice Board.

References

To be advised.

PHYS205 SCIENTIFIC MEASUREMENT PRINCIPlES, PROCESSES AND APPLICATIONS

Prerequisite PHYS 112.

lOep


Examination Progressive assessment during semester and one 2 hour paper at end of semester.

Content

Introductory course in analog and dlgttal Instrumentation, signal processing principles and computer appl1cattons. Emphasis will be on laboratory and environmental applications.

This subject Is recommended for students In all areas of sclencewtshing to gain an understanding of the principles and applications of basic electronic Instrumentation and computer techniques

Texts

See the PhYSiCS 200 Notice Board.

Section Five Physics Subject Descriptions

R<iferences

To be advised.

PHYS301 MATHEMATICAL METHODS AND QUANTUM MECHANICS lOep

Prerequisites PHYS201, MATH201 and MATH203.

Hours 2 lectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutortal per week for one semester.

Examination Examtnatton(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination.

Content

Mathemattcal methods. Quantum mechaniCS.

Texts and References

Refer to the Physics 300 Notice Board.

Students should retain their Physics 200 texts.

PHYS302 ELECTROMAGNETISM AND ELECTRONICS lOep

Prerequisites PHYS20 I and MATH20 I.

Hours 2 lectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutOrial per week for one semester.

Examination Examlnatton{s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination.

Content

Electromagnetism. Electronics.




PHYS303 ATOMIC, MOLECULAR AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS lOep

Prerequisites PHYS203 and PHYS30 I.

HOUTS 2 lectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one semester.

Examination Examtnatlon(s) and assessment equivalent to 3 hours examination.

Content

Atomic and molecular physics. Soltd state physics.


Refer to the Physics 300 notice board.


PHYS304 STATISTICAL PHYSICS AND RELATlVITY lOep

Prerequisites PHYS202 and MATH20 I.

FaCUlty of Scltlnce end Mathemetlcs

Section Five PsychologV Subject Descriptions

Hours 2 lectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutortal per week for one semester. hychology Subject Descriptions

PSYCIOI Examination Examlnations{s) and eqUivalent to 3 hours examination.

Content

assessment PSYCHOLOGY iNTRODUCTION 1

Statistical physics. Relativity.



Students should retatn thetr Physics 200 texts.

PHYS305 NUCLEAR PHYSICS AND ADVANCED ELECTRO_ MAGNETISM lOep

Prerequisite PHYS302.

Hotus 2 lectures and 4 hours laboratory/tutorial per week for one semester.

Examination Examination(s) and assessment eqUivalent to 3 hours examination.

Content

Nuclear physics. Advanced Electromagnetism. Texts and References


Students shou Id retain their Physics 200 texts.

lOep Prerequisite A Tertiary Entrance Rank, or equivalent equal to or greater than the TER required fo; admiSSion to enter either the Bachelor of Science (Psychology) or the Bachelor of Arts (Psychology) whichever Is the lesser. '

HOUTS 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours per week lectures. 2 hours per week laboratory)

Examination One 3 hour paper. Content

This subject will Introduce students to the fundamental concepts of psychology. The topics covered Include;

Statistics and Methodology; Perception. with emphasis On the visual system; Learning, with an introduction to Pavlovian conditioning and instrumental learning; Social Psychology, examining individual and group processes.

There wtll also be Laboratory work which requires the submission of two written reports, as well as the submission of a workbook on a weekly basis. Texts

General

Weiten ,W.I992.Psyclwlcgy:Themesandvarlatfons. California: BrookS/Cole.

For Methodology and Statistics

Howell, D.C. 1989, FUndamental statlstfcsfor the behaviotual sciences, 2nd edn. Boston: IJWS-Kent. Other texts to be advised.

PSYCI02 PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION II lOep

Prerequisite PSYC I 0 I

HOUTS 5 hours per week for one semester (3 hours per week lectures, 2 hours per week laboratory)


This subject extends the knowledge base gained tn PSYC 10 1. Topics covered include: Biological foundations of behaviour; Cognition. Including human memory and thought processes' Development, Including sexuality, and the ageing process:


There w1ll also be Laboratory work which requires the submission of two written reports, as well as the submission of a workbook on a weekly basis.

Texts

General

Welten. W. 1992. Psychology: Themes and variations. Californfa: Brooks/Cole.

Other texts to be advfsed.

PSYC202 BASIC PROCESSES

Prerequisite PSYC 102

Corequlsite PSYC207 (or PSYC201)

IOcp

Hours 2 hours of lectures per week for one semester together with a tutorial and laboratory workshop of 2 hours duration per week.

Examination Students wfll be assessed by class tests. laboratory assignments and end of semester examination.

Content

This subject generally examines such psychological processes as perception. human Information processing. memory. socio-linguistics. and learning. Both animal and human models may be considered.

The Cognttton topic wtll examine the experlmental evidence supporting varlous models for human memory. Emphasis wfll be placed on applied aspects of cognition and memory as well as an Introduction to neural network concepts.

The Perception section wfll deal primarily with audition. The following topiCS will be covered; structure of the auditory system. subjective dimensions of sound. sound localtsatlon and elementary aspects of speech perception.

The learning topiC wtll explore ideas about the nature and mechanism of associative learning. The conditions under which learning occurs and the nature of the representations underlying learning wfll be described. The Implications of these Ideas for the application oflearnlng theory to issues such as drug tolerance and addiction Will be considered.

1Utorial and laboratory exercises dealing with the above topics will be used to demonstrate these basic psychological processes.

Text

Schwartz. B. & Relsberg. D. 1991. Learning and memory, W. W. Norton & Co .• New York.

Section Five Psychology Subject Descriptions

References

Baddeley. A. 1983. Your memo'!!: A user's guide. Penguin Books.

Baddeley. A. 1990. Hwnan memo'!!: Theo,!! and practise. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Hove, UK.

Goldstein. E.B. 1989. Sensation & perception, 3rd edn. Wadsworth. Belmont. CA.

Martindale. C .• 1991. Cognitive psychology: A neuralnetwork approach, Brooks/Cole, PacUic Grove. CA.

St. James. J. & Schneider. W. 1991. MEL LAB: Experiments in perception, cognition. social psychology and hwnanJactors. Psychology Software Tools. PIttsburg. PA.

Schwartz. B. 1990. Psychology oj learning and behaviour. 3rd edn. W.W. Norton, New York.

PSYC205 APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 1

Not offered In 1994.

PSYC206 APPLIED TOPIC8 IN PSYCHOLOGY 2


PSYC207 EXPERIMENTAL METHODOLOGY

Prerequisite PSYC I 02

IOcp

lOcp

IOcp


E>:amination Students wfll be assessed by class tests. laboratory aSSignments and end of semester examination.

Content

(1) a selection of topiCS In statistics and compu ttng which will focus on the basics of t-testlng, ANOVA. non-parametric testing. and univariate Itnear regression. Students will be shown how to use software packages to manipulate data and perform statistical analyses.

(If) topics In descriptive and graphical analysis of data and research methodology. The first section wfll deal wfth graphical and descriptive statistical methods for understanding data patterns as well as methods for preparing data for inferential analysis. The second section wtn focus on issues of research methodology and the design of experiments.

Faculty of Science and Mathematlci

The lectures wfll be accompanied by a tutor!a\ and laboratory workshop series in which practlcal experience wfll be given In the application of the topiCS described above using computer-assisted. packages.

Texts

Heathcote. A. 1993. Lecture and computing notesJor experimental methodology.

Howell. D. C. 1992. Statistical methodsJorPSYChology. 3rd edn. PWS-Kent. Boston.

References

Hedderson. J. 1987. Sl'SS' made Simple. Wadsworth Publishing Company. Belmont. CA.

PSYC20S PSYCHOBIOLOGY

Prerequisite PSYCI02

Corequisite PSYC207 (or PSYC201)

lOcp


&:amination Students wtll be assessed by class tests, laboratory assignments and end of semester examination.

Content

This subject examines the biological basts of psychology, tnc1udlng neuroanatomy. psychobiology and neuroscience. The aim Is to broaden the understanding of some of these topics introduced in the first year and to examine their relevance to psychology. The laboratory program wfll focus primarily on neuroanatomy and research methods In psychobiology.

Texts

To be advfsed.

References

Becker. J.B .. Breedlove. S.M. et al (eds) 1992. Behavioural endocrinology. Boston. MIT Press.

Carlson. N.R. 1992. Physiology oJbehavior. 4th edn. Allyn and Bacon. Boston.

Kandal. E.R. & Schwartz. J.H. 1985. Principles oj neural science, 2nd or later edn, Elsevier, Amsterdam.

PSYC209 PERSONALITY AND SOCIAL PROCESSES IOcp


Corequisite PSYC207 (or PSYC201)

Section Five Psychology Subject Delcrlptlons

Hours 2 hours of lectures per week for one semester together With a tutorial and laboratory workshop of 2 hours duration per week.

Examination Students wfll be assessed by class tests, laboratory asstgnments and end of semester examination.

Content

This subject comprises two strands. One strand. practical social psychology, will examine current Issues such as attitude change, perception of social situations, group declslon-making and leadership structures tn both lectures and workshop seSSions, with an emphasis on the practical work and the development of relevant skills. The other strand will examine a number of approaches to personallt;y which have been Influential in terms of thealY, methodology and practical applications tn clinical and occupational settings.

Text

To be advised.

R,iferences

To be adVised.

PSYC210 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY


Corequisite PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I)

IOcp

HolUs 2 hours ofJectures per week for one semester together with a tutor:ial and laboratory workshop of 2 hours duration per week.

&amination Students will be assessed by class tests, laboratory assignments and end of semester examination.

Content

This subject will deal with the development of perceptual. psychobiological. cognitive and social processes during Infancy. childhood and adulthood. Topics such as the development of object recognition. memory and categor:isatlon, language, problemsolving. aggression. attachment, peer relations, social skills. andsexualilywfll becovered. Weekly laboratory sessions will be conducted to elaborate on these topics and teach research skills In developmental psychology.

Text

To be advised.

References

To be advised.


PSYC301 ADVANCED FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY

Prerequisites PSYC20 I (or PSYC207j


Examination One 3 hour exam paper.

Content

This course consists of the following topics:

lOcp

(a) Experimental design principles in psychology ranging from naturalistic observation to experimental and quast-experimental designs. including single-case studies.

(b) Practical computation techniques for the analysts of experimental designs tn psychological research. using MINITAB. BMDP and sPSs/X.

(c) Introduction to multivariate statistical techniques such as Multiple Linear Regression. DiSCriminant AnalysIs and Cluster AnalysIs.

(d) The MEL laboratory programs will be used to collect data in the tutorial periods.

References

Christensen. L. B. 1988. Experimental methodology. Allyn & Bacon. Boston.

Keppel. G. & Zedeck. S. 1989. Data analysis jor research deSigns. W.H. Freeman & Co .• New York.

Howell. D. C. 1987. Statistical methodsjorpsychology. Duxburg Press. Boston.

Winer. B.J .. Brown. D.R. et al 1991. Statistical principles (n experimental design. McGraw-Hill. Inc .. New York.

St. James. J. & Schneider. W. 1991. MEL LAB: Experiments in perception. cognition. sodal psychology and hwnanjactors. Psychology Software Tools. Plttsburgh.PA.

PSYC302 INDEPENDENT PROJECT lOcp

Prerequisite PSYC20 I (or PSYC207)

Corequisite PSYC30 I

Hours 2 hours per week for the full year.

Examination Submission of a written report containing introduction. methods. results and discussion not more than thirty pages in length due early October.


content The project consists of an experiment or series of experiments. surveys or tests designed to explore a hypothesis. Each student will be supervised by an academic staff member of the Department of Psychology. The Ustof research areaswlll be aVailable at the beginning of the academic year. Students are advised that this subject Is a prerequisite for entry Into an Honours year In Psychology.

References

Students are expected to read a wide range of current literature in the area chosen for the research project.

PSYC303 BASIC PROCESSES 1

Prerequisite PSYC201 (or PSYC207)

lOcp


Examination One 2 hour exam paper and a laboratory report.

Content

This subject wtll examine basic processes In Psychology such as perception. cognition, memory and learning and the effects of early experience. Topics not covered in this subject will be dealt with in PSYC304. Both animal and human models will be considered. The subject win be supplemented with a laboratory program which win run over 4-5 weeks.

References

Baddeley. A. 1990. Human memory theory and practice. Erlbaurn.

Frlsby.J.1979. Seeing. Oxford Unlv. Press.

sekuler. R. & Blake. R. 1985. Perception. Knopf.

PSYC304 BASIC PROCESSES 2

Prerequisite PSYC20 I (orPSYC207)

lOcp


Examination One 2 hour exam paper and an analytical report.

Content

This subject will extend the examination of basic processes covered tn PSYC303. The subject will be complemented by either a laboratory or workshop program run over about 4-5 weeks.

Rejerences


A series of readings will be recommended as the course progresses.

PSYC308 INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES lOcp

Prerequisite PSYC20 I (or PSYC207j


Examination One 2 hour exam paper. and a laboratory report.

Content

This subject will include cognitive development and two themes In social development. The subject win be complemented by a laboratory run over about 4-5 weeks.

References

Small. M.J. 1990. Cognitive development. Harcourt. Brace and Jovanovich. San Diego.

A series of readings win also be recommended as the course progresses.

PSYC306 ADVANCED SOCIAL PROCESSES IOcp



Examination Bya combination offonnal examination and practtcal workshop assignments.

Content

This unit uses the topic of motivation to provide an integration of a wide variety of explanatory models and research in psychology. and to put the subject into a context of philosophical and theoretical development generally. A number of motivational models are studied (biological. learned behaviour, cognttion and social ecology) and applied to work and clinical problems. Problem based workshops will be Integrated With the lectures and regular aSSignments will be based on these workshops.

References

Readings and references will be available during the lecture series.

PSYC307 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 1 IOcp

PrereqUisite PSYC201 (or PsYC207)


&:amination One 2 hour exam paper plus hurdle reqUirements.

Section Five Psychology SubJect Descriptions

Content

This unit will examine the theory underlying psychological test construction. and Will tntroducea range of psychological tests through practicum seSSions in which training will be given In test administration and interpretation. The underlying basis of Interviewing as an assessment technique will also be studied and training will be given in interviewing techniques.

References

Anastasi. Psychological testing. MacMillan.

Keats. Skilled interviewing. ACER.

PSYC308 ADVANCED APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 2 lOcp



Examination Assessment will be by a combination of fonnal examination, essays and written reports on the practical experience.

Content

This course will examine a number of different areas in which Psychology Is applied. It will examine behavioural health care with particular emphasis on community-based interventions in establishing behavioural change. In addition. topiCS in psychological pathology. psychotherapy and abnormal psychology win be covered. The unit Will be complemented with some practical experience In applied settings.

References

King. N. & Remenyt. A. (eds.) 1986. Health care: A behaVioural approach. Grune & Stratton.

Additional references will be made available throughout the course.

PSYC309 TOPICS IN NEURAL SCIENCE IOcp

Not olTered In 1994.

PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS) 40cp

Prerequisite A completed SA or SSe or three complete years of a BA(Psych) or BSc(Psych) Including the subjects PSYC 10 I and PsYCI02. atleast 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level including PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I). and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level including PSYC30 1 and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtained at


least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects Including PSYC30 I and PSYC302.

Hours 12 hours per week for the full year

Examlno.t1Dn To be advised

Content

PSYC40 1 comprlses half of the final Honours In Psychology. Full-time students enrol in PSYC402 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 In the second. PSYC40 I consists of five seminar series, including one compulsory uniton theoretlcalissues in Psychology, a choice of two units in mathematical or physiological Psychology. and a choice of two units In applied or social Psychology. Each unit will include seminars at which attendance and participation is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination. oral presentation. or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff aVailability. One seminar may be replaced with a practical placement and associated essay. There is some overlap with PSYC403.


To be advised.

PSYC402 PSYCHOWGY HONOURS 402 (THESIS) 40cp

Prerequisite A completed SA or BSc. or three complete years of a BA (psych) or BSe (Psych) Including the subjects PSYCIOI and PSYCI02. at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level Including PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I). and at least 60 credit pOints of Psychology at the 300 level Including PSYC301 and PSYC302. Candidates must have obtained at least a Credit grade or better in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects Including PSYC30 I and PSYC302.

Corequlslte PSYC40 I


Examination Thesis will be assessed independently by two members of the Departmen t. other than the supervisor.

Content

PSYC402 comprises half of the final Honours In Psychology. Full-time students enrol in PSYC401 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 in the first year and PSYC402 In the second. PSYC402 conSists of the development. conduct. analysts, and


reporting of a piece of orlgfnal emplrlcal research. The thesis Is a fonnal presentation of this research and must be In APA formal. There Is a limit of fifly pages. Each student will be supervised by a member of the Psychology Department. Students are strongly advised to discuss potential pro jects with appropriate staff members well in advance. Involvement wtth external agencies must be through offiCial departmental channels.


To be advised.

PSYC403 PSYCHOWGY 403 30cp

Prerequisite Candidates must be enrolled for the BA (psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the equivalent of three full time years of the degree. including passes or above In the subjects PSYC 10 1 and PSYC I 02. at least 40 credit pOints of Psychology at the 200 level Including PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I). and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level Including PSYC30 1.


Examlno.t1Dn To be advised

Content

PSYC403 comprlses one.third of the final year of the BA (Psych) or BSc (psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol in PSYC404 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the first year and PSYC404 In the second. PSYC403 consists of three seminar serles, tncluding one compulsory untt on theoretical issues in psychology, and a choice of two optional units. Each untt will include seminars at which attendance and participation Is compulsory, and will be assessed by essay, examination, oral presentation, or a combination. The exact topics of the seminars vary from year to year depending on staff availability. There is some overlapwlth PSYC40 1.


To be advised.

PSYC404 PSYCHOWGY 404 50cp

Prerequisfte Candidates must be enrolled for the SA (Psych) or BSc (Psych) and must have completed the eqUivalent of three full time years of the degree, including passes or above in the subjects PSYC 101 and PSYC 102. at least 40 credit points of Psychology at the 200 level Including PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I). and at least 60 credit points of Psychology at the 300 level Including PSYC30 1.

corequlslte PSYC403

Faculty of SCience and Mathematics


Exam/no.t1Dn Reports will be asSl'ssed by two or more members ofthe Department. Placement will be assessed on the basis of supervisor's report and a student essay.

Content

PSYC404 comprises two- thirds of the final year of the BA (Psych) or BSe (Psych). Full-time students are expected to enrol In PSYC403 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC403 in the first year and PSYC404 in the second. PSYC404 consists of two equally-weighted sections a piece of original empirical research. and a placement. The research project will be supervised by a member of the Psychology Departmentand must be in an applied area. A report inAPAformat, of approximately twenty flve pages, is reqUired. Candidates are strongly advised to discuss potential projects with appropriate staff members well In advance. The placement component Involves introductory seminars on ethical and professional Issues; supervised experience In a community factUty in the Newcastle area; and the submission of an essay relating the practical activities to psychological theory and technique.


To be advised.

Section Five PsychologV Subject Descriptions

Computer Science Subject Descriptiona

COMPllO INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING 5cp

This subject Is not aVailable to candidates enrolled In ComputerSclencedegree programs. or to students who have passed or been exempted from COMP 10 I. COMP201 prior to 1991, COMP212 or COMPlll.

An Introduction to structured programming and the design of algorithms using a procedural language.

COMPlll INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE 1 lOcp

This subject introduces the computer as a system by which problems may be solved. Students are introduced to the process of designing and implementing algorlthms to solve problems. Data types are covered. and sorting and searching techniques are Introduced to help motivate the methodological issues. Students are introduced to control structures, data types and procedural abstraction. An overview Is also given of the basic hardware and software components of a computer system. Including operating systems. compilers, memory and controllogtc. The social impltcatlons of computing is discussed. and an overview of the cUniculum Is given.

COMPl12 DISCRETE STRUCTURES lOcp

Prerequisite COMPIII and either MATIlIII with Corequlslte MATHl12 or Prerequisite MATH 102.

Content

This subject continues the development of fundamental Ideas In algorithm design and complexity analysis, In conjunction with an introduction to discrete mathematics. The concept of an abstract data type is contrasted with that of a data structure implementation, beginning with stacks, queues, and binary trees. Classical algorithms using these structures are investigated and analysed, using tools drawn from areas of discrete mathematics such as recurrence relations. set theory, comblnatorics. probability, and elementary graph theory.

COMPl13 INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE lOcp

Corequlsite COMPIII

Content

This subject deals with problem solving and artificial In telligence. I t begins with a discussion of reasoning

L~-··


and logic. and proceeds to a study of prooftechnlques. both general and fonnal. The propositional and predicate calculus are introduced In this context and used throughout the discussions. Some fundamental prohlems of AI are then investigated. and non-procedural solutions are proposed and analysed. Syntax and semantics of non-procedural languages are Introduced. and students are reqUired to complete several assignments using nonprocedural languages.

COMP221 COMPARATIVE PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES IOcp

Prerequisite COMPIII

Assumed Krwwledge COMPI12 or COMPI13

Content

This subject Introduces the student to the nature of contemporary programming languages. Including true object -oriented languages (such as Smallta\k or EifIel). The evolution of Imperative languages (FORmAN. Algol. PL/I. Pascal. C. Ada) and functional languages (Lisp. Scheme. MI.) and logic programming (Prolog) are discussed. In addition. fundamental design and Implementation concepts for high-level programming languages are Introduced. Including the concepts of binding. type checking and run-time storage management.

COMP222 THEORY OF COMPUTATION IOcp

Prerequisites COMPI12 and COMPI13

Content

ThiS subject introduces the theory of computability. including Important results from the study of automata and formal languages. The subject begins with a discussion of automata and their relationship to regular. context free and context sensitive languages. General theories of computabtltty are presented. including 'lUring machines. recursive functions and lambda calculus. Notions of decidabil!ty and undecidability are discussed and this Is related to complexity analysiS. Finally. formal program semantics are presented and analysed. leading to the topic of formal program verification.

COMP223 ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS IOcp

Prerequisite COMPI12

Content

This subject covers data structures and algorithms In depth. Topics covered Include data structures

Section Five Computer Science SubJect Descriptions

(developed in more depth than in COMPI 12). and an Introduction to complexity classes. Various algorithms are presented in the light of specific problem-solving strategies and complexity issues. Advanced topics such as halanced search trees. graph algorithms. parallel and distributed algorithms. and randomlsed algorithms are discussed.

COMP224 THE UNIX OPERATING SYSTEM IOcp

Assumed Knowledge COMP III

Content

A subject In which the Unix operating system Is explored tn a top-down fashion. Topics covered could Include the Unix flle system. the shell and other processes. utilities. system calls. security. window management systems (such as Xl. and system management The subject Is oriented towards the Inexperienced or casual Unix user. and is offered to students and professionals alike.

COMP225 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 2 IOcp


Assumed Knowledge COMPI12

Content

A look at the broad scope of Artificial Intelligence. With particular attention to the topics of knowledge representation. search techniques. computer reasoning. computer learning. computer viSion. expert systems. natural language processing. robotics. game playing. and architectures for AI.

COMP321 SOFTWARE ENGINEERING at PROJECT 20cp

Prerequisite COMPIII

Assumed Knowledge COMP221 and COMP224

Content

Thts full-year subject presents an tn-depth treatment of many software engineering topics. Including. software engineering paradigms. requirements' specification. functional and object-oriented destgn. software veriftcation and maintenance. Societal· Implications such as cost offatlure and professional responsibilities are considered. and the basic principles of technical writing are presented. Students are expected to complete a major project.


COMP322 COMPUTER VISION AND ROBOTICS

Prerequisite COMP225

AssumedKnowledge MATH1l2

Content

lOcp

The field of robotics provides applications for many different areas of Artificial Intelligence. Robots have to be able to see. to plan routes. to form world models; it is an advantage If they can hear; If they can be Instructed In natural language rather than esoteric codes; If they can reason; If they can learn; and so on. This subject will examine some of these areas of AI with specffic reference to their use in robotics.

COMP323 COMPUTATIONAL LOGIC IOcp


Content

The subject covers the concepts of soundness and completeness of refutation methods. normal forms. analytic tableaux. resolutto)1. decidabtlity. semldecldabUlty. Hlntikka sets. strategies for theorem proving. connection graphs. applications such as program verification. plan generation. deductive databases. modal logics. temporal logics. process and dynamiC logics. non-monotonic logtcs. rewrite systems. and logic programming.

COMP324 PAHALU!:L PROCESSING IOcp

PrereqUisite COMP223 and ELECI70

Content

The matn objective of this subject is to develop an understanding of the tools and paradigms needed for the design of parallel algOrithms for various modelsofcomputattons. In addition. various parallel programming languages and systems are briefly discussed as case studies.

COMP325 DATABASE SYSTEMS

PrereqUisite COMPI12

Content

IOcp

The subject covers the three level architecture for ~tabase systems. the relational database model. database nonnalization. data security and Integrity. :recovery and concurrency. and distributed ;databases. Additionally. students learn the SgL ;9Ue:ry language. and get a hands-on experience of a tnodem relational database management system SUch as Sybase.

Section Five Computer SCience SUbJect Descriptions

COMP326 DATA SECURITY

Prerequisite COMP 112

Asswned Knowledge COMP325

Content

IOc

This subject covers various topics in data seCUril including cl)'ptography. encl)'ption algorithms. Da Encryption Standard. public-key encryptio cryptanalysis. key exchange protocols. kJ management. secret sharing schemes. acce: controls. authentication, digital signature information flow controls. security of statistic databases.

COMP327 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATING SYSTEMS lOci

Prerequisite ELEC 170


Content

This subject proVides a thorough IntrodUction operating systems. Topics Include tasking an processes. process coordination an synchronisation. resource scheduling. physical an virtual memory organisation. security tssue~ communications and networking. and dlstributel operating systems.

COMP328 COMPUTER NE1WORKS IOcJ

PrereqUisite COMPI12 and ELECI70


Content

An introduction to data communication networks Topics include data transmission. transmissior media. network protocols. ISO/CSI. public dabl networks. local area networks. and distribu tee systems.

COMP329 COMPILER DESIGN


Assumed Knowledge ELEC 170

Content

IOcp

Introduction to the theory of grammars. Lexical analysers. syntactic analysts. elementary semantic analysis. Parsing techniques. objectcodegeneratlon and optlmtsatlon. Scanner and parser generators.

COMP330 GRAPHIC USER INTERFACES IOcp




Content

Almostall computer systems designed in the next 10 years will involve a graphic user interface. Graphic user Interfaces are an increasingly common feature of modem computer systems. This subject discusses the use ofGUIs In software engineering; this Includes visual programming and some aspects of CASE tools. Further. we study the fundamental design Issues for GUIs. concentrating on applications to database design and software engineering. The subject involves a major project to create a GUI.

COMP331 GEOMETRIC DATA STRUCTURES


Assumed Knowledge COMP223

Content

lOcp

Geometric data structures are used to represent explicitly geometric structures such in image analysis and solid modelltng. as well as implicitly geometric structures such as relational databases. In this subjectwe study fundamental data structureswhtch have applications for both Implicitly and explicitly geometric data. in such areas as geographic infonnatfon systems and soUd modelling.

COMP332 COMPUTER GRAPHICS lOcp

Prerequisite COMP112 and MATH112

Assumed Knowledge MATH217

Content

A graphical interface is a cost effective method to present infonnation in a fashion that supports rapid exploration and comprehension. The issues to be studied. all related to the displaying of objects. may include: graphics hardware. windows programming. graphics interface fonnats. 2D drawing primitives and their raster algOrithms. 2D & 3D geometrtcal transfonnations. projections. geometric models. colour theory. 3D viewing. visible-surface detennlnaUon. Illumination and shading. ray tracing and radtoslty. and computer animation.

Section Flye Computer Science Subject Descriptions

Information Science Subject Deacrlption

INFO 101 INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS lOcp

Prerequisite Nil

Hours 3 Lecture hours and two tutorial hours

ExamInation To be advised

Content

Of all the Innovations over the last 10-15 years In the public and private sectors. the computerlsation of infonnation systems has arguably had the greatest Impact on the organisation and perfonnance of work. The computerlsaUon of such systems began on large and expensive mainframe computers and then moved to slower and less powerful mini· computers. Today, manycomprehenslvelnfonnatfon systems are avatlable on desktop personal computers. These so·called microcomputers can be found in all organisations irrespective of size, and In large organisations co·exlst within the mainframe environment via data communication networks.

Microcomputers are used very differently to the more powerful mainframe and mini-computers. Although In large corporations transaction processing and day-to·day operations are still the domain of the larger computers, micros are becoming Increasingly used in such corporations as aids to deciSion-making for the tactical and strategic needs of lower, middle and upper management. Small organisations often rely totally on microcomputers for all aspects of their operations. The power of microcomputers Is increasing exponentially while their purchase price is decreasing In real terms. Areas such as retailing, manufacturing. engineering and financial services have experlenced enormous change under the Impact of microcomputer technology.

Computers have made It possible to store and retrieve massive amounts of data, the 'InlfOlniation I age' Is now a reality. This course introduces the skills and concepts needed to fully exploit the power of compu ters.

After completion of the subjects, students will. understand how and why organisations build use Information systems. will be able to docurri"ntil infonnatlon flow through particular systems will be able to use the microcomputer as a ~~'m,J!. support tool.

Focully 01 Science and Mathematics

1be course provides a solid grounding In compu ters and their use which today Is important for all students. irrespective of the diSCipline which they are studying,

eourae Components

INFO 101 comprises four major components

Microcomputers as Personal Support Tools (MPS'!1

2 Information Systems (IS]

3 Computers and the Law (CTI.)

4 Behavioural Aspects of Information Systems (BAlS)

Text

To be advised

Section FIYe Information Science Subject Descriptions

Phll ..... phy Subject Deacrlptlon

PHIL207 SClENTlFlC KNOWLEDGE AND SClENTlFlC METHOD lOcp

Not offered In 1994

Faculty of ScJence and Mathematici

Statistics Subject DeacriptiollS

STATIOI Introductory Statistic. IOcp

Not to count for credlt with STATI 03.

Prerequisites Thlscoursedoesnotassume knowledge of calculus or matrix algebra

Hours 3 lecture hours. 1 laboratory hour and 1 tutorial hour per week. The course Is offered In semester 1 and semester 2

Purpose To Introduce students to the principles of study design. data analysis and InterpretaUon; the staustical computing program MIMTAB will be used extensively

Content

Study design. Includlng smveys and controlled experiments. Sampling and randomization. Scales of measurement. Descriptive and exploratory data analysis. Probabtltty. StaUstlcaltnference: samplIng distributions. confidence intervals and hypothesis tests for means and proportions. Correlation and regression. Time series analysis. Chi-square tests for frequency tables.

Text

Moore. 0.5. & McCabe. G.P. 1989. Introduction to the Practice of Statistics Freeman.

References

Freedman. 0 .. Pisani. R et al 1991. Statistics. 2nd edn. Norton.

Staudte. R 1990. Seeing. Through Statistics. PrentlceHall.

Ryan. B.F .. Joiner. B.L. et al 1985. MINlTAB Handbook. 2nd edn. Duxbury.

Mtller. R.B. 1988. MINfTAB HandbookJor Business and Economics. PWS-Kent. Boston.

Wonnacott. T.H. & Wonnacott. R.J. 1990. Introductory Statistics Jor Business and Economics. 4th edn. Wiley.

STATI03 INTRODUCTORY MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS IOcp

Not to count for credit with STATIO!.

Advisory Prerequisite or Corequislte MATH 102 or MATH 103.

Hours 3 lecture hours. 1 laboratory hour and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester.

Purpose To Introduce more mathemattcally Interested students to probability and staUstical

$ecUO" Five StaUltlel Subject o.lcrlptlonl

Inference. Includtng the prtnclples of study design. data analysts and Interpretation of staUsucal results.

Content

Scales of measurement; summarising data

Probabtltty laws; condlUonal probabtllty

Probability dlstrlbutlons and sample statistics

The centrallfmtt theorem and applications

Study design; surveys and randomlsed experiments

Confidence Intervals and hypothesis tests

Correlatton and regression; least squares

Interences from contingency tables.

Text

Freund. J.E. & Simon. G.A. 1992. 8th edn. Modem Elementnry Statistics. Prentice-Hall.

References

Bhattachanya. AK. & Johnson. R 1977. Statistics. Pr1ncIples & Methods. Wiley.

Freedman. 0 .. Pisani. R et al 1991. Statistics. 2nd edn. Norton.

Meyer. P.L. 1977. Introductory ProbabUity and Statistical Applicattons. 2nd edn. Addlson-Wesley.

STAT201 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS IOcp

Prerequisites STATlOI and MATHl12 (or a level of mathematics equivalent to MATI-I112)

Hours 3 lecture hours and 1 laboratory/tutorial hour per week for one semester

Content

Random variables. probability. density and dlstrlbutlon funcUons. expectation. Likelihood. point and interval esUmation. Tests of significance.

Text

Hogg. R V. and Tams. E.A. 1988. ProbabUity and Statistical InJerence. Macmtllan.

Reference

Kalbfleisch. J.G. 1985. ProbabUity and Statistical InJerence Volumes I and II. 2nd edn. Springer.

Larsen. RJ. and Marx. M.L. 1986.AnIntroductionto Mathematical Statistics and its Applications. 2nd edn. Prentice Hall.

STAT202 REGRESSION ANALYSIS IOcp

Prerequisites STAT201

Faculty of ScJence and MathematicI

HOlUS 2 lecture Hours. 1 laboratory and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester

Content

This course covers the practical and theoretical aspects of mulUple regression analySIS. Includtng the assumptions underlying nonnallinear models, use of matrix notation. prediction and confidence intervals. stepwise methods. andexamtnaUon of the adequacy of models. The statistical computer packages MINITAB and SAS are used.

Text

Neter. J .. Wasserman W. and Kutner. M.H. 1990. Applied linear Statistical Models. 3rd edn. Irwin.

R(/erences

Bowerman. B.L .. O·Connell. R T. et al 1986. LInear statistical models - an applied approach. Duxbury.

Draper. N.R. andSmlth.H. 1981.ApplledRegresslon Analysis. Wiley.

Ryan.B.F .. Jolner. B.L.andRyan. T.A 1985.MlNITAB Handbook. 2nd edn. Duxbury.

SAS Institute Inc 1985. SASIntroductory Guide. 3rd edn. SAS Inst. Cary NC.

Weisberg. S. 1985. Applted linear Regression. 2nd edn. Wiley.

STAT206 ENGINEERING STATISTICS 60p

Credit cannot be obtained for both STAT201 and STAT205.

Prerequisite MATH 112 or equivalent. This subject Is mainly taken by students in Mechanical or Industrlal Engineering but Is also available to other students

Hours 2 lecture/laboratory Hours per week for one semester

Content

Basic probabtlity theory and principles of staUstical inference. Distributions. Error propagation. Quality control.

References

Chatfield. C. 1983. Statistics Jor Technology. 3rd edn. Chapman and Hall.

Guttman. I .. Wilks. S.S. and Hunter J.S. 1982. Introductory Engineering StatisticS. 3rd edn. Wiley.

Hogg. RV. and Ledolter. J. 1987. Engineering Statistics. Macmillan.

Section Five StaUstlel Subject Descriptions

STAT206 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTS AND SURVEYSIOcp

Prerequisite STAT201


Content

This course contrasts two methods for collecting and analysing data: experimental studles and nonexperimental studies including surveys. The principles of experimental design are illustrated by studying completely randomfsed designs. randomlsed block designs and factorial designs. For surveys the topics Include: simple random sampling. strattHed and cluster sampling. ratio and regression estimators. Class projects are used to tllustrate practical problems and the statistical packages Minltab and SAS are used to carry out analyses.

References

Montgomery. D. C. 1984. Design and Analysis oj Experiments. 2nd edn. Wiley.

Barnett. V. 1986. Elements oj sampling theory. Hodder and Stoughton.

Cochran. W.G. 1977. Sampling Techniques. 3rdedn. Wiley.

Neter. I.. Wasserman. W. & Kitner. M.H. 1990. Applied linear Statistical Models. 3rd edn. Irwin.

Cochran. W.G. & Cox. G.M. 1964. Experimental Designs. Wiley.

Box.G.E.P .. Hunter. W.G. and Hunter. J.S. 1978. StatisticsJor Experimenters: an Introduction todesfgn. data analysts and model building. Wiley.

STAT301 STATISTICAL INFERENCE IOcp

Prerequisites STAT20 1. STAT202 and MATH20 1 [or eqUivalent)


Content

Statistical inference is the drawing of conclusions from data. This course covers likelihood-based estimation. other methods of point and interval estimation. hypothesis testing and Introductory BayeSian inference.

References

Larson. H.J. 1982. IntroductlontoProbabUUyTheory and Statistical InJerence. 3rd edn. Wiley

I, I , ,

I Wc--.


Hogg, R V. and Cralg, A.T. 1989, Introduction to Mathematical Statistics, 4th edn, MacMillan.

Silvey, S.D. 1978, Statistical I'!ference, Chapman and Hall.

Press, S.J. 1989, Bayesian Statistics, WHey Intersctence.

STAT302 STUDY DESIGN

Prerequisites STAT201 and STAT202


Content

lOcp

This course contrasts two methods for collecting and analysing data: experimental studies and nonexperimental studies including surveys. The prinCiples of experimental design are lIlustrated by studying completely randomised deSigns. randomised block destgns and factorial designs. For surveys the topics include: simple random sampling. stratified and cluster sampling. ratio and regression estimators. Class projects are used to illustrate practical problems and the statistical packages MIMTAB and SAS are used to cany out analyses.

References

Barnett, V. 1986, Elements oj swnpling theory, Hodder and Stoughton.

Cochran, W.C. 1977, SamplIngTechniques,3rdedn, Wiley.

Neter. J .. Wasserman. W. etall990. Applied Linear Statistical Models, 3rd edn, Irwin.

Cochran, W.C. and Cox, G.M. 1964, Experimental Designs, Wiley.

Box, G.E.P., Hunter, W.C. et al 1978, Statistics Jar Experimenters: an introduction to design, data analysis and model building, Wiley.

STAT303 GENERALIZED LINEAR MODELS lOcp

Prerequisite STAT20 1 and STAT202.ln addttlon Itls strongly recommended that students have Passed STAT301.


Content

The course covers the theory of generalized linear models and tllustrates the ways In which methods for analysing continuous, binary. and categorical data fit tnto this framework. Topics include the

Section Five Statistics SubJect Descriptions

exponential family of distributions, maximum likelihood estimation, sampling dlstributlons for goodness-of-fit statistics. linear models for contlnuousdata(regressionandanalyslsofvarlance). logistic regression, and log-linear models. Students will Implement these methods using various computer packages, Includlng CUM.

Text

Dobson, A.J. 1990, An Introduction to Generalized LInear Modelling, Chapman & Hall.

References

McCullagh, P. and Neider J.A. 1989, Generalized LInear Models, 2nd edn, Chapman & Hall.

Aitkin, M. et al 1989, Statistical Modelling In GUM, Oxford Science Publications.

Healy, M.J.R 1988, GUM:anlntroduction, Clarendon.

STAT304 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS lOcp

Prerequisite STAT20 I and STAT202. In addition It Is strongly recommended that students have Passed STAT301.


Content

This course Is about the theory and practice ofUme series analysis - the analysis of data collected at regular intelVals in time (or space). Topics covered include: stationaIY processes. ARMA models. models for periodic phenomena. analysis using MINITAB. SAS and other time series packages.

Text

Cryer, J.D. 1986, TIme Sertes Analysis, Duxbury Press.

References

Box, C.E.P. and Jenkins, C.M. 1970, TIme Sertes Analysis: Forecasting and Control, Holden Day.

Fuller, W.A. 1976, Introduction to Statistical TIme Sertes, Wiley.

Newton, H.J. 1988, TIMESLAB,A 1lmeSertesAnalysis Laboratory, Wadsworth & Brooks/Cole.

STAT310 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequls!tes MNCTlII and subjects at Level 200 totalling 40 credit points chosen from subjects offered by the Departments of Economics. Management and/or Statistics.

Faculty of Selene. and Mathematics

Hours 2 lecture hours per week.

Content

Total Quallty Management (rgM) Is an all embracing management and employee involve'ment philosophy d1rected towards continuous Improvement in the production of goods and services. Students who complete this course will learn to understand the fundamental principles offotal Quality Management (rgM), chooseapproprlate statistical techniques for Improving processes and write reports to management describing processes and recommending ways to Improve them.

SpeCific topics covered Include the Deming philosophy, understanding variability through statistical thlnklng, qualltylmplementatlon matrices, quaItty function deployment. the seven tools of quality control. quality Improvement teams. the PDCA cycle. standards. the role of management. basic statistical methods and control charts.

Text

To be advised.

Section Five Statistics Subject Descriptions

section six

Some Recommended Programs

Advisory Jufonnation Only

In order to provide some guidance to students, each Department has provided one or more possible degree patterns which would lead to a suitable professtonal qualification tn their discipltne. The patterns are Dot prescriptive, except In so Caras they meet the requirements of the valious degree rules. Students may vary their selection in confonnttywlth degree rules and prerequisite and corequtstte reqUirements as detailed tn the semester subject tables. All courses selected must aggregate to 240 credit points for a pass degree or 320 credit points for the four year Bachelor of ScIence (Psychology) degree.

All semester subjects are identified by a code which includes up to four letters representing the department offerlng the subject. followed by three numbers. the first of whIch sIgnIfies the level (100. 200. 300. 4(0) at whIch the subject is beIng presented.

The following programs have been set ou t as recommendations for inclusion in the first. second and third calendar years of a pass degree. Some programs Include a fourth year for the Honours Degree whtch Is generally a postgraduate degree.

AVIATION

Students with CommercIal Pllot and AlrllneTransport LIcence will be exempted from any subjects which they may have completed to the University standard. These exemptions will be decided In consultation with the lecturer concerned. who may request a form of assessment or interview. The course Is available only by attendance on campus.

Students are advised to consult the Deparbnental NoUceboard and l1aise with the Head of the Department concerning course program enquiries or requests for exemptions because of prtor study and aviation experience.

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Students wishing to study Biological Sciences are advised to develop capaclttes tn a broad range of the bastc sciences. as well as In the Biological Sciences. Addlttonally. students' Interests can change durtng their University training.

Faculty of Sclance and Mathematics

and It is advisable to undertake a first-year program which could lead In many dtrectlons. dependtng upon Indlvldual expertences and Interests developed durtng the flrstyearat UnlverslW. Students Intendlng to major In BIology should consIder Program A. Those wishing to major In BIology and another dlsclpllne mtght elect to complete Programs B or C.

Biological Science. - Program A

Yeu 1

B10LIO 1. B10LI02. CHEM 10 I. CHEM 102 and either MATIlSlll/1l2 or MATIlSI02/103. plus 2 other subjects from Level 100. (For Envlronmental BIology select GEOGIOI and GEOGI02).

Yean 2 8< 3

The table below indicates the Biological Science subjects whIch should be studled to enable students to develop expertise In particular specialised areas. The Indicated subjects are the minimum which should be studIed. Addltlonal subjects In Blologlcal Sciences or other diSCiplines must be taken to satlsfy subject requIrements for the degree. It should be noted that not all 300 level BIologIcal ScIence subjects will be offered In the one year. Students wishIng to do specIfic subjects should check when they are scheduled before enrolling in their second year.

Yeu 4

BIOIAO I and BIOlA02

Area qfBIoIo91/

Animal PhysIology

Animal Science

BlochemlslIy

Cell & Molecular BIology

Developmental BIology

Environmental BIology

Biological Sciences Subjects

BIOL20I. 202. 204. 205. 208. 302. 305. 312.313

BIOL201. 202. 204. 205. 207. 208. 302. 305.312.313

BIOL20 I. 202. 204. 205. 208. 302. 305. 309.310.313.315.316

BIOL20 I. 204. 205. 208. 305. 309. 310. 313.315.316

BIOL202. 204. 205. 206. 302. 312. 313. 314.316

BIOL202. 206. 207. 302.303.310.311.314

Section Six

Genetics

Immunology

Molecular BIology

Plant PhYSIology

Plant Molecular BIology


BIOL20 I. 204. 205. 207. 208. 305. 309. 310.311.313.315

BIOL20 I. 202. 204. 205. 208. 305. 309. 310.312.313.316

BIOL20l, 204. 205. 208. 305. 309. 310. 313.315.316

BIOL204. 205. 206. 208.303.314.315.316

BIOL204. 205. 206. 208. 303. 309. 314. 315.316

EnvironmentaiBiologyandGeography-ProlP'om B

Year 1

BlOLIOI. BIOLI02. GEOGIOI. GEOGI02 plus 4 other semester subjects.

Yeu 2

BI0L202. Bl0L206. Bl0L207. GEOG201. GEOG203. GEOG204 plus 2 other semester subjects from BIology. ChemIstry. Geography. Mathematics or Geology.

Year 3

BI0L303. Bl0L311 plus 2 other BIology and 4 Physical Geography semester subjects.

Biology and Chemistry - Program C

Yeu 1

BIOLIOI. BlOLI02. CHEMIOI. CHEMI02 plus 4 other semester subjects.

Year 2

BIOL201. Bl0L204. BlOL205. BI0L208. CHEM23I plus 3 other semester subjects

Year 3

BI0L305. BI0L309. Bl0L313. BI0L315. CHEM33I plus 4 other semester subjects from Biology. ChemfstIy or one other discipline.

CHEMISTRY

ChemlstIy is a science concerned primarily with matter and the changes that it undergoes. The study of Chemistry Is important not only in Itself but also as a background to many other sciences.

The study of ChemIstry Is open to all students who have qualified for admission Into the University.

Feculty of ScJence end Mathematics

However. those who have not studied sufficient sciences at school are advised to do some selfpreparation before beginning Level 100 Chemistry subjects. Detans on expected backgrounds and suggested remedial reading are provided under the appropriate Level 100 subject deSCriptions.

The ChernJstry' Department offers courses over the whole range of the subject. A basic chemical education is available in the traditional areas of analyUcal, Inorganic, organic and physical chemistry together with some more diverse applted subjects. Thus students interested in Environmental Science will find relevant Chemistry subjects (e.g. CHEM261, CHEM361) to Include In their program.

The flexible system of subjects offered by the Department allows a student to m;:yor tn Chemistry' on a broad level or to specialise in certain areas ofthe subject and to combine these with relevant subjects offered by other Departments. Thus a student interested primarily In PhYSical Chemistry may elect to choose Physics and Mathematics subjects as complements. Conversely, students maJonngtn other Departments may choose companion Chemistry' subjects relevant to their Interests. Thus some courses in Analytical and InorganiC Chemlstrywould be useful to Geology majors; Organic Chemistry subjects would be relevant for Biology majors; Physics majors would benefit from study of some courses In Physical Chemistry, etc. At Level 300 specialist topiCS In active research areas of Chemistry' are offered to provide a modem picture of the subject.

Students Intending to do a major In ChemiStry would have to complete ProgramA which Is regarded asa minimum requirement for a thorough grounding In the subject. Students wishing to devote themselves fully to Chemistry will undertake a double major as In Program B where they can complete up to two thirds of their degree program in this one diSCipline. Many subject combinations In between these two programs are possible. Thus for example. a student may choose six Level 300 subjects In Chemistry and two from another Department.

Chemistry is a recognised profession which Is served bya professional body, the RoyalAustrallan Chemical Institute (RACI). Many employment opportunities for chemists require membership ofthls organisation. Graduates seeking membership must have completed at least the subjects listed In Program A.

Followtng either of these programs or combinations thereof may lead to postgraduate study at the

Section SIx Some Reconvnended Programs

Honours standard (Level 400), for which entry requirements are a credit average in at least four Level 300 semester subjects. The Department strongly recommends the Honours Degree to students both forthe additional experience It provides andforltsenhancementofemploymentopportunltles and professional standing. Honours students devote most of their time to an independent research project together with some formal course work. The project Is selected In an area of Interest from lists provided by members of the academic staff. This degree is also the normal entry reqUirement to the research higher degrees (MSc and PhD) offered by the Department.

Chemistry - Program A

Year 1

CHEMIOI andCHEMI02; eltherMATHIII/112 or MATIlI02/ 103, and four other subjects from Level 100.

Year 2

CHEM211, CHEM22I , CHEM23I , CHEM24I. plus four other subjects from Level 200.

YelU' 3

Chooseatleast forty credit points from the Level 300 chemiStry list and up to forty credit points of other subjects from Level 300. The Inclusion of at least two of CHEM311, CHEM32I, CHEM331, CHEM341 Is recommended.

YelU' 4

CHEM401 and CHEM402.

Chemistry - Program B

Year 1

CHEMIOI andCHEMI02; either MATHIII/112 or MATIlI02/103; and four other subjects from Level 100.

Year 2

CHEM21l, CHEM221, CHEM231, CHEM241, CHEM26I and three other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3

Choose eighty credit points from the Level 300 chemistry Itst. The Inclusion of CHEM311. CHEM32I , CHEM33I, CHEM34 I Is recommended.

YelU' 4

CHEM401 and CHEM402.

o£()GRAPHY

Faculty of Scl.~ end Mathematics

Geography Is the study of the Earth and Its people, gtvtng emphasis to the Interactions among the physical. economic and social elements of the envlTOnment. Modem Geography may be divided into studies In Human Geography (Program Al and Physical Geography (Program B), but students may advantageously combine units from HUman and Physical Geography (Program C).

Human Geography (Program A) analyses the factors and processes that govern the distnbu tion of people and their economic, social and cultural activlUes. Changes In distribution patterns and activities through time reqUire study of past processes and prediction for the future from analysts of present trends and patterns. A Wide range of opportunity is available for graduates in private business and public service departments especially In areas that involve planning, social and economic analysiS.

Physical Geography (Program B) analyses the factors and processes that Influence the distrlbu tions of phenomenaln the physical environment. Emphasis Is placed on study of the processes that develop landfonns and sons, on the meteorolOgical processes that cause variations In climate. and on the factors that influencevarlaUons In vegetation communfties andantmald1strtbuttons. EmpJoymentopportunttles are good both In the private and public sector which Is currently demanding graduates with a good understanding of environmental issues and their management. BlOLIOI, BIOLl02. GEOLIOI, GEOLI02. PHYSIII and PHYSI12 are useful complementary 100 level subjects.

Geography (Program C) combines units from HUman Geography and Physical Geography at the 200 and 300 levels with other subjects from the Faculties of Arts, Economics. Education and Science and Mathematics. This program can be taken to Major level without selecting the Methods courses GEOG201, GEOG202, GEOG301 and GEOG302, but for Honours a Methods stream (GEOG20 1 plus GEOG30 I orGEOG202 plusGEOG302Isnecessary). Employment opportunities are good but diverse.

11'1/0. In Human Geography YelU' 1

GEOG 10 I and GEOG 102

';~oose six other subjects recommended from Level )00 to comply with Bachelor of Science degree

Section Six

YelU' 2


GEOG202, GEOG207 and GEOG20B

Choose flve other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3

GEOG302, GEOG306, GEOG309, and GEOG315

Choose four other subjects from Level 300.

Year 4

GEOG401 and GEOG402.

Millar In Phyalcal Geography

Year 1

GEOGIOI and GEOGI02.

Choose six other subjects from Level 100. BIOLl 0 I, BIOLI02, GEOLlOI, GEOLI02, PHYSIII and PHYS) 12 recommended.

Year 2

GEOG20 I, GEOG203 and GEOG204.

Choose five other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3

GEOG301, GEOG304, GEOG305 and GEOG311


Year 4


M'l/o. In Geography

Year 1

GEOGIOI and GEOGI02.

Choose six other subjects from Level 100.

Year 2

Choose TIlREE subjects from GEOG20 I, GEOG202, GEOG203, GEOG204, GEOG207, GEOG20B.

Choose five other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3·

Choose FOUR subjects from GEOG3O I, GEOG302, GEOG304, GEOG305, GEOG306, GEOG309. GEOG31O, GEOG311 and GEOG315.


Year 4


·NOTE Prerequisites will restrict some choice according to Year 2 subjects chosen.

I

I !

GEOLOGY

Faculty of Science and MathematlcI

Geology provides the ultimate understanding of our planet, its environment and its evolution. As a natural science, much of the course Is held outdoors on field excursions and mapping occurs in a diversity of environments. The course is presented as an integrated study of the major processes. hence field. laboratory and lecture work are inte~ned.

Students are strongly advised to choose companion courses, especially If Interests are In palaeontology and evolution (bIological sciences), surficial processes (geography). geophysics (physics and mathematics). geochemistry, tectonics, mineralogy and petrology (chemistry) .

Employment for geologiSts is available in the minerals, petroleum. coal. environmental and engineering Industries. A Bachelor's degree Including 80 credit points at 300 Level In Geology Is required for membership to the professional body. Employers and the Department very strongly recommend the Honours degree (GEOlAO I / GEOlA02) which allows profeSSional research through some Independent Investigation.

MATHEMATICS

The Department of Mathematics offers semester subjects at all levels for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, the Bachelor of Science degree. the Bachelor of Arts degree and the Bachelor of Engineering degree. However, students wishing to obtain professional qualifications tn mathematics should enrol tn the Bachelor of Mathema tics degree program, where it is possible (although not compulsory) to fill completely their second and third years with mathematics.

Some Faculties use the word "major" to describe a complete strand of study which Is considered to be appropriate and sufficiently educative that they may quote the name of the diSCipline as a component of thetrdegree. The program suggested for the Bachelor of Science degree would fulfil the requirements for a major In mathematics.

Bachelor of Selence Degree - with Mathematic. as.major

This Is a course of study which Includes at least the following semester subjects.

Year 1

MATH 102. 1030rMATHIIl. 102. 1030rMATHIIl. 112. 103. together with other level 100 subjects to meet the B.Sc. degree requirements.

Section Six

Year 2


MATH201. MATH203. MATH204. MATH206.MATH218 and one chosen from (MATH213. MATH214. MATH215) plus 5 other subjects from Level 200.

Year 3

Four semester subjects from Mathematics Level 300, chosen with advice from the Department. and four further subjects to meet the BSc degree requirements.

Mathematic. - Bachelor of Mathematic. Degree

The Bachelor of Mathematics degree enables a student to complete a full course In Mathematics, or to combine a Mathematics major with Computer Science, Statistics, Physics or another appropriate diSCipline as set out In the Rules. Note that for the Bachelor of Mathematics degree, certain specific subjects are required at the 200 level, thus providing a base for a double major In Mathematics, or a major in Statistics, with options also for majors in Physics or Computer Science.

Subjects should be chosen according to the requirements of the Bachelor Degree Rules in this handbook. In tolal. at least 160 credit points must include the subjects in the follOwing list. The remalntng credit points for the ordinary degree may include subjects offered elsewhere in the University.

The prescribed componeri.ts of the degree Include

Year 1

MATH I 02 and MATH 103 (20 credit poInts) or MATHlll. 102. 103 (30 credIt poInts) orMATHlll. 112. 103 (30 credit points)

Year 2

MATH201.MATH203.MATH204.MATH206.MATH218 and one of (MATH213. MATH214.MATH215) (30 credit points); and a further 30 credit points from MATH200.srAT2oo.COMP2oo and/or PHYS2oo.

Year 3

MATH300 and/or STAT300 (40 credit points); plus a further 40 credit points from MATH300. srAT300. COMP300 and/or PHYS300.

Year 4

The BMath (Hons) program consists of: MATH400 STAT400 subjects.

It has been found that certa1n combinations subjects have been popular, and some, In


judgement of the Department, are particularly worthwhile combinations in tenns of education or career training. Five such programs are shown below. They are nettherexhaustlve npr prescriptive, but are for your guidance. A further note is added regarding the choice of subjects in Year I for the BMath degree.

1 _ath with "Pure" Mathematlca as thellU\lor interest

To follow the progress of Mathematics Is to be well ahead of applications, although Mathematics itself Is enriched by those applications. To be able to follow such progress, the student needs to have as wide an experience In Mathematics as possible. and a thorough grounding in the basic truths.

Since the Year 3 program can accommodate no more than 8 different topics, some selection must be made. Although the program does not appear very "applied", nonetheless graduates with such backgrounds have adapted qUickly to careers In Industry and commerce as well as 10 research.

In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a suitable program Is;

Year 1

MATH 102 and MATH 103 together with other subjects worth 60 credit points: (Computer Science and/or Physics and/orStausucs and/ or Philosophy are popular but the choice Is wide. See No.6 below).

Year 2

All avatlable MATH200 level subjects (except perhaps one or two ofMATH213. 214. 215. 216) togetherwith some 200 level subjects to continue a subsidiary interest from Year I.

Year3

MATH301. MATH302. MATH304. MATH305. MATH308. MATH31O. MATH311. MATH3130r MA11i314. isa "Pure Mathematics" selection of subjects - but there are variations.

Year 4

The BMath (Hons) program consistsofMATI-f40 1 and MATH402.

Section Six Some Recommended Programs

2

3

BMath with Mathematical Physlca as a major intereat

Nowadays a student who wishes to understand current theories of Nature, ranging from the quantum world of elementary particles to the large scale structure of the Universe Itself, must be fammar with a formidable amount of mathematics. Areas of mathematics previously the preserve of the pure mathematician have found fruitful application tn modem physics. Now the standard tools Include functional analysis. group theory. algebra. differential geometry and topology. and the llsttscontlnually changing. Astudentwishing to study the exctttng developments In modem mathematical physics needs a strong grounding in these subjects. and the abIlity to quickly assimIlate new mathematics as required, which can only come from a firm grounding in basic 'pure' mathematics.

In satisfying the requirements for the degree. a suitable program could be:

Year 1

MATH 102 and MATH103 together with other subjects (Physics and ComputerSctence should be included).

Year 2

MATH201. MATH202. MATH203. MATH204. MATH205. MATH206. MATH207. MATH218. MATH209. MATH21O. MATH211. MATH214 together with other MATH200 subjects. and/or other subjects to continue an interest from Year 1.

Year 3

MATH302. MATH303. MATH304. MATH305. MATH306. MATH307. MATH31O. MATH312.

Year 4

The BMath (Hons) program conststsofMATH40 I and MATH402.

BMath with "AppUed" Mathematic. as a major Interest

"Applied" Mathematics uses mathematics as a tool for investigating problems which come from other disciplines. This InterdiSCiplinary approach to problem-solving has been remarkably successful.but practitioners need both a stronggroundtng In the technical aspects

4


of Mathematics aswell as knowledge of subjects which concentrate on Applied Mathematics. It also Includes subjects from the Departments of Statistics and Computer Science which proVide additional skills for the professional Applied Mathematician.

It Is recommended that a student Include at least a first year-second year combination from another discipline. This provides a further opportunity to see how mathematics can be applied. In the past students have chosen Physics or Chemistry. However there are now career opportunities applying mathematics in economics. psychology. medicine. banking, biology, geology and the design of Industrlal processes.

In satisfying the reqUirements for the degree. a suitable program is:

Year 1

MATHI02 and MATHI03 and COMPIOI together with "other" subjects worlh 40 credit points. taking note of the remarks above.

Year 2

MATH201, MATH202, MATH203, MATH204, MATH206, MATH21B, MATH213, MATH214, MATH215, MATH2l6, COMP201, STAT20l are all recommended. together with continuation of one of the "other" subjects from Year 1 and. If room, one of MATH209, MATH211, or MATH212,

Year 3

MATH303, MATH304, MATH305, MATH313 together with most of MATH306, MATH307, MATH315, MATH3l6 (or subjects In PhYSiCS or Statistics or Computer Science).

Year 4

The BMath (Hons) program consists ofMATH40 I and MATH402,

BMath with Statistics as a major Interest

In satisfying the reqUirements for the degree. a suitable program Is:

Year 1

Either STATIO 1. MATH I II and MATH 112 or STATI03, MATH 102 and MATH 103. INFO I 0 I is recommended. Choose other subjects worth 50 credit points from Level 100.

Section Six

Year 2


MATH20l, MATH203, MATH204, MATH206, MATH21B, atleastoneof(MATH213, MATH214, MATH215}, together with STAT201, STAT202, STAT203, STAT204 together with other Mathematics or Computer Science 200 level subjects for the remaining 20 credit points.

YearS

STAT30I, STAT302, STAT303, STAT304 with four mathematics and/or computer science 300 level subjects for the remaining 40 credit points.

Year 4

The BMath (Hons) program consists of eighty credit points ofSTAT4oo subjects from the list of Approved Subjects.

5 BMath with Computer ScIence as a major interest

In satisfying the requirements for the degree, a SUitable program would be:

Year 1

MATHI02 and MATH 103, COMPIOI (or equivalent) and other subjects worth 40 credit points.

Year 2

MATH20l, MATH203, MATH204, MATH206, MATH21B, MATH212, MATH215, MATH216, COMP22I, COMP222, COMP223, STAT203, PHIL242 (that Is a desirable program, but timetable constraints may modify It).

Year 3

Four MATH300 subjects and forly credit points of approprlate COMP3oo subjects. (1bere Is wide choice for specialisation).

Year 4

The BMath (Hons) program conststs ofMATH40 I and MATH402. or see the Rules BCompScl(Hons) Faculty of Englneerlng.

6 Firat year subjects In the BMath Degree

Therules demand MATH 102 and MATH 103 credit points) or MATH 1 II. 102, 103 (30 points) or MATH III. 1 12, 103 (30 credit but the remaining credit points can betal,en almost any other discipline. Popular include 100 Level Computer Science. (PHYS 10 I /I 02 or 102/103). Inf,ornlatiOl1


ScIence and Statistics (INFO 10 I/STATI 0 I). However, BMath students choose widely, and the follOwing areas have been approved for them In the past: Accounting. Biology. Chemistry. Classical Civilisation. Drama. Engineering, Economics. English. French, Geography, Geology, Gernmn, Greek, History, Japanese, Latin, Legal Studies, Linguistics, Philosophy, Psychology, Sanskrlt, Sociology.

There Is room In the BMath course to Include Level 200 subjects to continue with one of the choices made during the first year course.

PHYSICS

For employment as a physicist, students must have a minimum of an ordinary Bachelor of Science degree with a major In Physics. An Honours degree inPhyslcsorcomblnedPhyslcs/Mathematlcswould be preferred.

Physics as a profession Is represented by the AustraUan InstituteofPhyslcs. MembersWp Is limited to graduates with a minimum of a major in Physics. The Australian Institute of PhYSiCS has a number of grades of membership which are related to experience as a physicist. There is a grade of membership for students currently working towards a degree. The Institute monitors courses in Physics at tertiary institutions and Judges them in tenns of suitability for admission to membership of the Australian Instltute of Physics. The Institute also responds on behalf of phYSicists to matters relatlng to phYSiCists and their role. There are no formal conditions for registration as a physicist. but a degree Is usually necessaty for government and Industty recognition and status as a professional phYSicist.

It Is advisable for Intending physIcists to include ample mathematics In their course and pursue a related science such as Chemistry or Geology to

: Level 200 subjects If at all possIble.

< For a PhYSiCS major tn the Bachelor of Science ,degree at least the follOWing semester subject structure Is necessaty.

113, PHYS1I4, MATHI02 and MATH 103. ~h(lOSe fcourotller subj,,,,tsfrom Levell 00, preferably

to Level 200 In at least one other science

Section Six

Year 2


PHYS20 I and at least two subjects chosen from PHYS202", PHYS203 or PHYS205; and MATH20 1 (adVisory) .

(-Students achieving a credit level or better In PHYSIII and PHYSI12 may be admitted to Level 200 In PhysIcs with the approval of the Head of Department}.

Year S

PHYS30 I, PHYS302 andat least two subjects chosen from PHYS303, PHYS304 or PHYS305. Note that the Level 300 subjects should be passed with a credit or better for admission to the Bachelor of Science (Honours) degree In Year 4.

PSYCHOLOGY

Psychology Is a broad dISCipline and It Is dIfficult to state preparatoty subjects that should be studied together with Psychology. Note: there are entry quota restrictions placed on enrolment In PSYC 10 1.

Recently legislation was passed through the State Parliament which will require anyone wishing to practise as a PsycholOgist to have a minimum offour years training. In the Science and Mathematics Faculty. Psychology can be taken either as a BSc or a BSc (Psychology) degree. The BSc degree Is a three year course which can be followed by a fourth or Honours year. The BSc {Psychology} degree Is a four year degree. The programs within these two degrees are set out below.

The Department's aim Is to produce "psychologists who should by Virtue of their training be able to play a unique role such as Critically examining research and scholarly literature In the field of psychology, contributing to emplrlcal research In psychology, administering and Interpreting psychological tests and measurement procedures and prescribing. Implementing and evaluating fonns of psycholOgical Intervention and remediation".

EntrY to Psychology 40 I and 402 reqUires completion of 60 credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit Grade in each of four 300 level Psychology subjects IncludlngPSYC30 I andPSYC302. Entry to PSYC403 and PSYC404 reqUires Pass grades in at least six 300 level PSYC subjects.

The Department offers two Applied Masters Degrees. The Master of Psychology (ClinIcal) degree has an Honours entry requirement while the Master of Psychology (Educatlonal) (notavallable In 1994} has


an undergraduate degreewfth a major in Psychology as an entty reqUirement, a teaching qual1fl:catton and in addition. two years teaching {orotherrelevantl experience. The Honours degree Is the nonnal entry into the research degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy.

BSc with a Psychology M~or

Year I

PSYC 1 0 I. PSYC 1 02 plus six other semester subjects at level 100.

Year 2

PSYC207 plus other subjects at the 200 level. some of which may also be taken in Psychology.

Year 3

PSYC301 plus at least three other chosen from PSYC302. PSYC303. PSYC304. PSYC305. PSYC306. PSYC307. PSYC308 or PSYC309. and four other subjects chosen at the 300 level.

BSc Honours Degree In Psychology

Year I

PSYCIO!. PSYCI02. plus six other subjects from level 100.

Year 2

Eight 200 level subjects including PSYC207 and at least three of PSYC202. PSYC208. PSYC209. PSYC210. plus other 200 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list.

Year 3

PSYC301. PSYC302 and at least four other Psychology subjects at the 300 level. plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those offered by the Psychology Department.

Year 4

PSYC401 andPSYC402. Entry to theHonoursdegree requires passes in four Psychology subjects at the 200 level including PSYC201 as well as completion of sixty credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade average In each of four 300 Level Psychology subjects at the 300 level including PSYC30 1 and PSYC302.

BSc (Psychology) awarded at Honours Level

, , Years I and 2 L'"'''''''-'-··_·

Section Six

Year 3


PSYC30I. PSYC302 and at least four other Psychology subjects at the 300 level. plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled Ifst including those offered by the Psychology Department.

Year 4

PSYC401 and PSYC402. En try to the Honours degree reqUires passes in four Psychology subjects at the 200 level including PSYC207. as well as completion of sixty credit points at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade average In each of four 300 Level Psychology subjects at the 300 level including PSYC30 1 and PSYC302.

BSe (Psychology) Degree

Years land 2

As for Psychology Honours above.

Year 3

PSYC30 I. andat least flve other Psychology subjects at the 300 level. plus other 300 level subjects chosen from the scheduled list including those olTered by the Psychology Department. '

Year 4

PSYC403 and PSYC404.

section seven

postgraduate Degree Rules

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

AdmIsaI .... to Candidature I A candidate may undertake the honours degree in either one or two

disciplines.

2 In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree in a single discipline an applicant shall

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Science of the University or to anyotherdegree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the discipline.

3 In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree in two disclpUnes. an applicant shall

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Science of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the poltcy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments responsible for the disciplines.

QUalification for Admission to the Degree

4 To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved

Subjects.

Classes of Honours 5 There shall be three classes of honours Class I. Class II and Class III. Class

II shall have two divisions. namely Division 1 and Division 2.

TIme Requirement.


6 ExceptWlth the pennlsslon of the Facully Board, a candidate shall complete the course In not more than two years of study.

APPROVED SUJIJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are:

Section Seven Postgraduate Degree Rulas

Code BIOIAO!

B101A02 CHEM40!

Name

Foeully of Scle_ and Mathematic.

Biology Honours 401

Biology Honours 402 Chemistry Honours 401

Chemlsby Honours 402 Geography Honours 40 I

Geography Honours 402 Geology Honours 401

Geology Honours 402 Mathematics Honours 401

Mathematics Honours 402 Physics Honours 401

Cp

40

40 40

40 40

40 40

40 40

40 40

Physics Honours 402 40 Psychology Honours 401 (Seminars} 40

Psychology Honours 402(Thesls) 40

SectIon Seven POltgrRu." Degr .. Ru, ..

s

PrerequlBltes Corequlslte. 40cp 300 BIOL or other 300 level subjects approved by the Department, obtalnlng at least a Credit grade average

BIOIAO! 40cp level 300 CHEM obtaining at least a Credit grade average

CHEM401 40cp level 300 GEOG obtaining at least a Credit grade average

GEOG401 40cp Level 300 at Credit Grade average

GEOIAOI 40cp level 300 MATH obtaining at least a Credit grade average

MATH401 PHYS30 I and any other three PHYS300 subjects or a credit grade average or better

PHYS401 Four PSYC200 subjects Incl. PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I) and 60 cp at PSYC300 obtaining at least a Credit grade In each offour PSYC300 Including PSYC30 I and PSYC302

PSYC40l

'c<m,lIdate, maypurslle a combined honours degree in one honours subject from each of two Departments the approval of the Heads of both Departments.

Faculty of SCience and Methematlc.

SCHEDULE - HONOURS BACHELOR !AVIATION)

AdmlnIon to C""cIIdature

DEGREE OF OF SCIENCE

1 In order to. be admitted to candidature for the degree an appUcant sball

(a) have completed the reqUirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Science (Aviation) of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board. or have already been admitted to that degree; and

(hI have completed any additional work prescrtbed In accordance with the poUey determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of AVIation.

QUalUIcation for Admission to the Degree

2 ToqualllYforadmlss!on to the degreea candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalUng 80 credit points chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

CJaeaes of Honours

3 There shan be three classes of honours Class I. Class " and Class IlL Class" shall have two diVisions. namely DiVision 1 and DMslon 2.

Tlme Requirements

4 Exceptwlth the pennlsslon of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the award are

A candidate may enrol In 80 credit points Including AVIA405 to be chosen from:

Section Seven POltgraduate Oegr .. Aulel

(lode

AVlA401

AVlA402 AVlA403 AVlA404 AVlA405

Name


Aviation Honours 401

Aviation Research & Methodology Technology In Aviation The Human Variable In AViation Avtatlon Honours - Thesis

Cp

20

10 10 10 40

SectIon Seven pOltgraduate DegrHRule.

Prerequlsltu B.Sc.(AVlatlon) with a CredIt grade or better In AVlA30S. AVIA310. AVlA311 and AVlA314 AVlA314 AVlA310 and AVIA312 AVIA221 andAV1A311 B.Sc.(Aviatlon) with an average obtaining Credit grades in A VIA3OS. AVlA310.AVlA311and AV1A314

eorequlsltel

AVlA401

AVlA401 and either A V1A403

orAVIA404

Foeully of Sclo_ and Mathematics

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF APPLIED SCIENCE (ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT)

AdmIsaIon to CUlIlidatwe

I In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree In a single discipline an appUcant shall

(a) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Applied Science (Environmental Assessment and Management) of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed any additional work prescribed In accordance With the policy detennlned by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Department of AppUed Science and Technology.

QUalification for Admlaslon to the Degree

2 Toquallfyforadmlsslon to thedegreea candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalling BO crecUt potnts chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

C]"'I of Honours

3 There shaH be three classes of Honours. Class I. Class n and Class 1lI. Classn shall have two diVisions, namely DiVision 1 and DiVision 2.

Time Requirement.

4 ExceptWith thepermlsslonofthe Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course In not more than two years of study.

APPROVED SUBJECTS


Section $eyen Postgraduate Degree Rule.


CoM Name EAMS401 Environmental Management

EAMS402 EAMS404

Seminar Series Research Project

Cp

20

20 40

SecUon Seven Postgraduate Degr .. Rules

Prerequto'ta EAMS301 EAMS311 Fcrty credit points level 300 EAMS obtaining at least a Credit grade average

EAMS401 EAMS401

Faculty 01 Science .nd MathematIc.

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF

Interpretation

BACHELOR OF ENVIRON· MENTAL SCIENCE

I In thls schedule "diaclpllDe" means a branch of learning recognised by the Faculty Board as constituting a discipline.

AdmIaaIon to C_cIIdature

2 A candidate may undertake the honours degree In either one or two disciplines.

3 In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree an appltcant shaH

(al have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Environmental Science of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such ootherworkprescrfhed In accordance with the poltcy detennlned by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the HeadofDepartment responsible for the discipline.

QuaHflcation for Admission to the Degree

4 Toqualifyforadmlsslon to the degree a candidate shaH pass subjects at the 400 level totalltng 80 credit pOints chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

Claaees of Honours

5 There shall be three classes of Honours. Class I. Class H and Class III. Class HshaH have two diviSions, namely Division 1 and DiviSion 2.

Time Requirements

S Except with the permission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

APPROVED SUBJECTS


Section Sev.., Poatgredue .. Degree Rul.a

Code BIOlA07

BIOIAOB CHEM407

CHEM40B GEOG407

,GEOG40B

,

Name

Feculty of Science end Mathemetic.

Biology Honours 407

Biology Honours 408 Chemistry Honours 407

Chemistry Honours 408 Geography Honours 407

Geography Honours 408

Cp

40

40 40

40 40

40

Section Sev.., Poatgradue" Degr .. Rul ••

Prerequisites Corequlsltes

40cp 300 BIOL or other 300 level subjects approved by the Department. obtalnlng at least a Credit grade average

BIOIA07 40cp 300 CHEM or other 300 level subjects approved by the Department. obtaining at least a Credit grade average

CHEM407 40cp 300 GEOG or other 300 level subjects approved by the Department. obtaining at least a Credit grade average

GEOG407

I

Faculty of Sc"'_ end Mathematics

SCHEDULE - HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

AdmIsaIon to C""clldature 1

2

A candidate may undertake the honours degree in either one or two diSCiplines.

In order to be admitted to candldature for the degree In a single dlsclpllne an appltcant shall:

Ca) have completed the requirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such otherwork prescribed in accordance with the policy detennlned by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the dtsclpltne.

3 In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree In two dlsclpltnes. an appltcant shall:

(a) have completed the reqUirements for admission to the Ordinary Degree of Bachelor of Mathematics of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such other work prescrtbed In accordance with the poltcy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departmentsresponslbleforthedisclplines.

QuaHflcation for Admission to the Degree

4 To qualtfy for admission to thedegreea candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 level totalltng SO credit points chosen from the Itst of Approved Subjects.

Classes of HODOurS

5 There shall be three classes of honours: Class I. Class 11 and Class Ill. Class 11 shall have two diviSions, namely Division 1 and Division 2.

Time Requirements 6 Exceptwtth the permission of the Faculty Board.

a candidate shall complete the course tn not more than two years of study,

APPROVED SUBJECTS


Section Seven Postgradua .. Degree Rur ••


Section Sevan Postgraduate Degree Rula.

Name Cp PrerequUltea Corequlslte.

Mathematics MA11-I40 1 Mathematics Honours 401

MATH402 Mathematics Honours 402

Statlatlcs

40

40

40cp level 300 MATH subjects obtatnlng at least a Credit grade average

A candidate may enrol in 80 credit points, to be chosen from:

STAT401 Probablltty Themy \0 40cp from level 300 STAT

STAT402 STAT403 STAT404 STAT405 STAT406 STAT407 STAT408 STAT409 STAT4!O STAT411

10 Analysis of Categortcal Data Demography and Survtval AnalysIs \0 Robust Regression and Smoothing 10 Statistical Consulting 10 Methods for Qualtty Improvement !O Advanced Topics In Statistics 10 Project Project Project Project

10 20 30 40

subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average As for STAT40 1 As for STAT401 As for STAT401 AsforSTAT401 As for STAT401 As for STAT401 As for STAT401 As for STAT401 As for STAT401 As for STAT401

MATH401

/t..candid.ate may pursue a combined honours degree in one honours subject from each of two Departments in one of the follOwing combinations:

Mathematics Honours 401

PhYSiCS Honours 401

Mathematics Honours 401 Economics IV

Mathematics Honours 401 Geology Honours 401

1 Mathematics Honours 401 Psychology Honours 401

40

40

40 40

40 40

40 40

40cp level 300 MATH subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average Any three PHYS 300 subjects and PHYS30 1 obtaining at least a Credit grade average

As previously stated Consult Department

As previously stated 40cp level 300 GEOL subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average

As prevtously stated Four PSYC 200 subjects Incl. PSYC207 (or PSYC20 I) and 60cp at PSYC 300 obtaining at least a Credit grade in each of four PSYC300 Including PSYC301 and PSYC302.

!

I


SCHEDULE - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

AdmIssIon to Candidature

I In order to be admitted to candidature for the diploma an applicant shall:

(al have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board or have achieved at another tertiary Institution a standard of perfonnance deemed by the Faculty Board to be equivalent; and

(b) have completed such otherworkprescrlbed tn accordance with the policy detenntned by the Faculty Board; or

(c) tn exceptional cases, produce eVidence of possessing such other quallficatlons as may be approved by the Faculty Board.

QuaUflcation for Admlsaion to tbe Diploma

2 To qualtfy for admission to the diploma a candidate shall complete subjects totalling 80 credit points from the list of Approved Subjects. including 40 credit points in subjects at the 400 level or higher.

Grading of the Diploma

3 The diploma shall be conferred as an Ordinary Diploma except that. where the perfonnance of acandldate has reached a standard detenntned by the Faculty Board to be sufficient. the diploma may be conferred with Merit.

Time Requirements

4 Exceptwlth thepermissionofthe FacultyBoard. a candidate shall complete the course in not more than two years of study.

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The Subjects approved· by the Faculty Board for the award are:

Section Sevan Postgraduate DagrHRulas

Cob BIOL303 BIOL3I1

CHEM261 CHEM36I CHEE342 CIVL242 EAMS29 I EAMS390 EDUC612 tf

EDUC613

i,· pEOG305 GEOG306

Name

Faculty of Science and Mathamatlcs

Environmental Plant PhYSiology Environmental Biology

Environmental Chemistty Environmental Chemlstty Safety and Environment Environmental Engineering 2 Water Resources Management Sol1 Conservation Management The Scope of Environmental Education Issues and Research In Environmental Education Climatic Problems Geography of Austral1a: an Historic Perspective Society and Space

Hydrology Environmental Studies Seminar 1 Environmental Studies Minor Project Environmental Studies Seminar 2 Directed Environmental Study 1 Directed Environmental Study 2 Environmental Engineering

Technology and Human Values I Technology. Human Values and The Environment Sociology of Health and Illness Town Planning

Cp

10 10

10 10 10 5 10 10

10

10 10 10

10

10 20

10 20 10 10 5

10

10 10 10

S«tlon Sevan Postgradua .. DegrH Rul ••

Prerequlaltu Corequlsltes

TwoBlOL200 Bl0L207 or BIOL203. S tudents who have completed B10L306 are not eligible to do this subject CHEMIOI CHEMI02 CHEM261 Consult Head of Department CIVLl41 EAMS 102 EAMS 112 EAMS290 EAMS291

Consult Education Department

Consult Education Department GEOG201 GEOG203 GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or GEOG208 GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or GEOG208 GEOG201 GEOG203

GEOG491

Consult Department of Mechanical Engineerlng

SOCAlIl Consult Department

Or such subjects considered necessary upon approval of the Dean.

Faculty of ScJence and Mathematics

SCHEDULE - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MATHEMATICAL STUDIES

AdmisaIOD to Candidature

An applicant for admission to candidature for the Diploma shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to adegreeofthe Unlversttyorto a degree of any other tertiary Institution approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; or

(b) In exceptional circumstances have other qualifications approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board.

guaUfication for Admission to the Diploma

2 (1) To qualify for the diploma a candidate shall pass a program of study approved by the Faculty Board. totalling not less than BO credit points.

(2) The program shall consist of subjects from levels above 100 level offered by the Department of Mathematics and the Department of Statistics or other subjects with considerable mathematical content. as determined by the Dean. offered by other departments of the University.

(3) Not more than 20 credit points from 200 level subjects may becounted by a candidate towards the diploma.

Grading

3 In cases where a candldate's performance tn the program has reached a level determined by the Faculty Board, the diploma may be awarded with Merit.

Time Requirements

4 Exceptwith the penntssion of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course In not more than two years of study.

Section $even Postgraduete Degr .. Rules

SCHEDULE - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN SCIENClt

AdmisaIOD to Candidature

1 In order to be admitted to candidature for the diploma an applicant shall:

(a) have satisfied all the requirements admission to a degree of the Unlversl'tv oorln any other degree approved by the Board or have achieved at another institUtion a standard of perform,anc; deemed by the Faculty Board eqUivalent; and

(h) have completed such o~'::~~~kJ~:::::: In accordance with the policy by the Faculty Board; or

(c) tn exceptional cases, produce evidence possessing such other qualifications may be approved by the Faculty Board.

QuaUfication for AdmissJon to the Diploma

2 To qualify for admission to the diploma candidate shall pass subjects at the 400 totalltng 80 credit points chosen from the Approved Subjects.

Grading of the Diploma

3 The diploma shall be conferred as an Diploma except that. where the ne,rfolrmamce a candidate has reached a standard del:ennlnl hythe Faculty Board to be sufficient. the, dll,lon may be conferred with Merit.

TIme Requirement.

4 Except with the permission of the Fae,ulltv Eloar a candidate shall complete the course In more than two years of study.

APPROVED SUBJECTS

The subjects approved by the Faculty Board for award are:

Code BIOlA05

B101A06 cHEM405 cHEM406 OEOG405

Name


Biology Diploma 405

Biology Diploma 406 Chemistry Diploma 405 ChemiStry Diploma 406 Geography Diploma 405 Geography Diploma 406 Geology Diploma 405 Geology Diploma 406 PhYSiCS Diploma 405 PhYSiCS Diploma 406 Psychology Diploma 405 Psychology Diploma 406

Cp

40

40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

Section Seven Postgraduate Degree Rule.

Prerequisites Corequlsltes 40 c.p. level 300 BIOL or other subjects approved by the Department

BIOlA05 40 c.p. level 300 CHEM

CHEM405 40 c.p. level 300 GEOG

GEOG405 40 c.p. level 300 GEOL

GE0L405 40 c. p. level 300 PHYS

PHYS405 40 c.p. level 300 PSYC

PSYC405


SCHEDULE - MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

Classification

1. The degree of Master of Environmental Studies shall be a degree by coursework offered In the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

interpretation

2. In this Schedule unless the context or subject matter otherwise Indicates or requires:

"Co-orcllnatortl means the Co-ordinator for the Master of Environmental Studies degree appointed by the Faculty Board.

AdmIsaIon to Candidature

3. An applicant for admission to candidature shall:

(a) have satisfied all the reqUirements for admission to a Bachelor of Science degree of the University or any other degree approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; or

(b) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.

QuaUflcation for the Degree

4. (I) To qualtt'y for admission to the degree the candidate shall complete a program prescribed by the Faculty Board totalltng not less than 100 credit points of which 60 credit points shall be a project on a subject approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Co-ordinator.

Credit

5. The Faculty Board may grant credit to a candidate on such conditions as It may detennlne for up to 80 credit points.

TIme Requlrements

6. The program shall be completed In not less than two years unless otherwise permitted by the Faculty Board.

APPROVED SUBJECTS


Section Seven Po.tgraduate Degree Rule.

COde BI0L303 BIOL3lI

CHEM261 CHEM36I CHEE342 1ilM.242 EAMS29 1

Faculty of Science end Mathematic.

Section Seven Postgraduate Degree Rule.

Name

Environmental Plant PhYSiology Environmental Biology

Environmental Chemistry Environmental Chemistry Safety and Environment Environmental Engineering 2 Water Resources Management SoU Conservation Management The Scope of Environmental Education Issues and Research in Environmental Education The Biosphere and ConselVation Cltmatlc Problems A Geography of Australta, Historical Perspective Society and Space

Hydrology Environmental Studies Seminar 1 Environmental Studies Minor Project Environmental Studies Major Project 1 Environmental Studies Major Project" Environmental Studies Seminar 2 Directed Environmental Study 1 Directed Environmental Study 2 Geology of Quaternary Environments Noise Pollution EnVironmental Engineering

Occupational Hygiene and TOxicology Technology and Human Values Technology. Human Values and

Cp

10 10

10 10 10 5 10 10

10

10 10 10 10 10 10

10 20

10

30

30 20 10 10

10 5 5

10 10

The EnVironment 10

Prerequisites

'!\vo BI OL200 BI0L207 or BIOL203. Students who have completed BI0L306 are not eltglble to do this subject CHEMIOI CHEMI02 CHEM261 Consult Head of Department CIVLI4l EAMS 102 EAMS 1 12 EAMS290 EAMS291

Consult Education Department

Consult Education Department GEOG201 GEOG203 GEOG204 GEOG201 GEOG203 GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or GEOG208 GEOG202 plus either GEOG207 or GEOG208 GEOG201 GEOG203

GEOG491

GEOL2l3 or GEOG204

Consult Department of Mechanical Engineering

Sociology of Health and Illness 10 SOCAIll Town Planning 10 Consult Department

subjects considered necessary upon approval of the Dean.

Corequlsltes


SCHEDUlE - MASTER OF MATHEMATICS

Classification

The Faculty of Science and Mathematics shall be responsible for the course leading to the degree of Master of Mathematics.

AdmIaaion to Candidature

2 To be eligible for admission to candidature an appUcant shall:

(al have satisfied all the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor of the University of Newcastle with Honours in the area of study in which the applicant proposes to carry out research or to an Honours degree, approved for this purpose by the Facul ty Board, of another university. or

(b) have satisfied all of the requirements for admission to a degree of the University of Newcastle or to a degree, approved by the Faculty Board. of anothertertlarytnstitution and have completed such work and sat for such examtnations as the Faculty Board may have detenntned and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that reqUired for admission to a degree of bachelor with second class honours In an appropriate subject; or

(cl In exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such academic and professional qualtfications as may be approved by the Faculty Board.

QuaHfication for the Degree

3 To qualtfyfor admission to the degree a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Facu lty Board a program consisting of:

(a) such examinations and such work as may be prescrlbed hy the Facul ty Board; and

(h) a thesis embodytng the results of an orlglnal Investigation or design.

Time Requirements

4 The program shall be completed in not less than two years except that, In the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or for a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be eqUivalent or who has had previous research experience. the Faculty Board may reduce this period by up to one year.

Section Seven Postgradua .. Degree Rul ••

5 A paM-time candidate shall. except with the permission of the Faculty Board. which shall be given only in spectal circumstances:

(a) conduct the majorproportlon of the research or destgn work in the University; and

(h) take paM tn research seminars within the Department In which the program Is being carned out.

Enmlners

6 Any third examiner shall be an external examiner.

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF (CLINICAL)

Classification

I. The degree of Master of Psychology (Cllnle,a] shall be a degree by research offered In Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

Interpretation

2. In this &hedule unless the context or matter otherwise Indicates or requires:

"Board" means the Board of Studies Psychology;

"Co--ordlnator" means the Co-ordinator MasterofPsychology (Clinical) degree aplpol:nl by the Board on the recommendation of Head of the Deparlment of Psychology.

Admlsslon to Candidature

3. (I) An applicant for admission to candlda.1t shall:

(a) have satisfied the reqUirements admission to a Bachelor degree In University with Honours Class Class 11 in Psychology. or to any degree approved for this purpose: the Board; or

(b) In exceptional cases, produce ofpo., .. s:.ln!! sueoh othelr quallftcati as may be approved by the Board.

(2) Notwithstanding sub-Clause (1) the onther~ommend"tiQ,noftheCo·o~ may require an applicant to coml>lelte prerequisite and/or corequlslte it may prescrlbe.

(3) Applicants for admission to calndldal shall be considered by the shall approve or reject any appli,callon


(4) In considerlng an application. the Board shall take account of the applicant's academic quallficattons and experience. the report of an Intervlewwtth the applicant and any other selection procedures applied to the applicant as determined by the Board. Thetntervtewand sel~tion procedures shall be conducted hy a Sel~tion Committee approved by the Board.

(51 Before an appltcatton for admission to candidature is approved, the Board shall be satisfied that adequate supervision and factlttles are available.

guatIfIcation for Admission to the Degree

4, ToquaUty for admission to the degreea candidate shall:

(a) complete and pass such seminars and tutorials, written and practical work and eXaminations as specified by the Board; and

complete to the satisfaction of the Committee a thesis embodytng the results of an empirical Investigation on a subject approved by the Board on the recommendation of the Co-ordinator.

1beprogram shall be completed In not less than two years of study and. not more than six years of study unless the Board otherwise pennlts.

;: El<anlliners shall be appointed by the Committee recommendation of the Head of the

l<Oe1>.rlme,nt of Psychology. One examiner may tnlternal examiner being a member of the

University.

of Thesis Examination

Board shall consider:

the examiner's reports on the theSis; and

a report by the Co-ordinator on the candidate's performance In the work preSCribed under Clause 4(a);

shall submit these to the Committee ~ge'lI1ler with its recommendation. The "'nlmitt.,e In detennlnlng the outcome of the

examination shall take Into account the recommendation.

Section Saven Postgradua" Degree Rul.s

SCHEDUlE - MASTER OF PSYCHOLOGY (EDUCATIONAL)

Not offered tn 1994

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SCIENCE

Classification 1. The Master of Science shall be a degree by

research offered by the Faculty of Science and Mathematics. the Faculty ofEngtneerlng or the Faculty of Health Sciences. The Faculty in which the candidate Is enrolled shall be responsible for the program.

AdmIaaion to Candidature 2. (I) To be eligtble for admission to candidature

in the Faculty of Science and Mathematics an applicant shall: (a) have satisfied all the reqUirements for

admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours Class I or Class II of the University or to a degree. approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board, of this or any other university. or

(h) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Science of the University or other approved university and have completed such work and passed such examtnatlonsas the Faculty Boardmay have determined and have achieved a standard at least eqUivalent to that required for admission to a degree of bachelor with second class Honours In an appropriate subject; or

(cl In exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department In which the applicant proposes to cany out the program.

(2) To be eltgthle for admission to candidature In the Faculty of Engineering an applicant shall: (a) have satisfied the requirements for

admission to a degree With Honours In the University or other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board in the area in which the appllcan t proposes to carry out research; or

I

Faculty of SCience Ind Mathemetlcs

(h) have satisfied the requirements for admission toa degree in the University or other university approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board and have completed to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board such work and examinations as determined by the Faculty Board; or

(c) tn exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department in which the candidate proposes to cany out the program.

(3) To be eligible for admission to candidature in the Faculty of Health SCiences an appltcant shall: (a) have satisfied the reqUirements for

admission to a relevant professional Bachelor degree of the University or to a degree approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board; or

(b) have completed such work and passed such examinations as the Faculty Board may have detenntned and have achieved a standard at least equivalent to that required for admission to a degree of Bachelor wUh second class Honours; or

(c) In exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qual1ftcattons as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department In which the candidate proposes to cany out the program.

QuaHflcatioD for the Degree 3. ToquaUtY for admission to the degree a candidate

shall complete to the satisfaction of the Facul ty Board a program conSisting of: (a) such work and examinations as may be

prescribed by the Faculty Beard; and (h) a thesis embodying the results of an original

investigation or design. Time Requirements 4. The program shall be completed:

(a) In not less than two academic years except that, In the case of a candidate who has completed the requirements for a degree of Bachelor with Honours or a qualification deemed by the Faculty Board to be

Section Seven Postgradul" Degree Rules

equlvalentorwho has had prev:!ous research experience. the Faculty Board may reduce this period to not less than one academic year; and

(h) In not more than 5 years. except with the permlsslon of the Faculty Board.

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF SCIENTIFIC STllDIES

ClualficatioD

1. The degree of Master of Scientific Studies be a degree by coursework offered in th" F,acl!l(y of Science and Mathematics.

Admlaalon to Candidature

2. An applicantfor admission to "arldl,dai:ure slhalb

(a) have satisfied the requirements admission to the degree of Bachelor

(h)

approved for this purpose by the Board; and

in accordance with the policy by the Faculty Board; or

(cl in excepttonal cirCUmstances evidence of possessing quallficattons and experience as may approved by the Faculty Board.

QuaHfication for the Degree

3. (1) To qualItY for admission to the degree candidate shall complete a prescrtbed by the Faculty

Credit

not less than 160 credit points ~, . ..,","" credit points shall be a project on a approved by the Faculty Board on recommendation of the relevant Head Departmen t.

4. Acandidatemaybe granted credit by the Board on such condUlons as it may determl for up to 80 credit points.

Time Requirement.

5. The degree shall be completed in not less two years unless othetwlse permUted by Faculty Board.

APPROVED StlBJECTS

Flculty of Science and Mathemltlcs

Section Seven Postgrldulte Degree Rules

The subjects approved by the Faculty Beard for the award are:

Code Name Cp Pre"'qulsltes Co,.,quultes ASTI<695 Foundations of Applied Science 40 Appropriate undergraduate

and Technology subjects ASTI<696 Topics in Applied SCience and

Technology 40 ASTI<695 ASTI<697 Advanced Topics In Applied Science

and Technology 40 ASTI<696 Project 40 ASTI<696 Foundations of Environmental A 40 Appropriate undergraduate ssessment and Management 40 subjects Topics In Environmental Assessment and Management 40 EAMS695 Advanced TopiCS In Environmental Assessment and Management 40 EAMS696 Project 40 EAMS696 Foundations of Biological Sciences 40 Appropriate undergraduate

subjects Topics In Biological Sciences 40 BlO1.695 Advanced Topics in Biological Sciences 40 BI01.696 Project 40 BI01.696 Foundations of Chemistry 40 Appropriate undergraduate

subjects Topics in Chemistry 40 CHEM695 Advanced Topics In Chemistry 40 CHEM696 Project 40 CHEM696 Foundations of Geography 40 Appropriate undergraduate

subjects Topics in Geography 40 GEOG695 Advanced Topics In Geography 40 GEOG696 Project 40 GEOG696 Foundations of Geology 40 Appropriate undergarduate

subjects Topics in Geology 40 GE01.695 Advanced Topics in Geology 40 GE01.696 Project 40 GE01.696 Foundations of Mathematics 40 Appropriate undergarduate

subjects Topics In Mathematics 40 MATH695 Advanced Topics in Mathematics 40 MATH696 Project 40 MATH696 Foundations of Physics 40 Appropriate undergraduate

subjects Topics In Physics 40 PHYS695 Advanced Topics In Physics 40 PHYS696 Project 40 PHYS696 Foundations of Psychology 40 Appropriate undergraduate

subjects

Code

PSYC696 PSYC697 PSYC698 STAT695

STAT696 STAT697 STAT698

Name

Faculty of Science end Mathemetlc.

Topics in Psychology Advanced Topics in Psychology Project Foundations of Statistics

Topics In Statistics Advanced Topics In Statistics Project

Cp

40 40 40 40

40 40 40

Section Seven

Prerequisites

PSYC695 PSYC696 PSYC696

Postgraduate Degree Rul ••

Corequlsltes

Appropriate undergraduate subjects STAT695 STAT696 STAT696

A candidate may pursue subjects in two disciplines with the approval of the Heads of both Departments and the Dean of the Faculty of Science and Mathematics.

,section eight

. ,Postgraduate Degree Subject ,LIe.:),,' iptions

Notes on Subject and Topic Descriptions

The subject and topic outlines and reading lists which follow are set out in a standard format to facilttate easy reference. An explanation Is given below of some of the technical terms used In this Handbook.

Prerequisites are subjects which must be passed ata Pass grade or better before a candidate enrols In a particular subject. The only prerequisites noted for topics are any topics or subjects which must be taken before enrolltngln the particular subject. To enrol In any subject which the topic may be part of. the prerequisites for that subject must still be satisHed.

Where a prerequisite Is marked as advisory. lectures will be given on the assumption that the subject or topic has been completed as Indicated.

Coreqwsites for subjects or topics are those which the candidate must pass before enrolment or be taking concurrently.

Ezamlnation Under examination rules "examination" includes mid-year examinations. assignments. tests or any other work by which the final grade of a candidate In a subject Is assessed. Some attempt has been made to Indicate for each subject how assessment Is determined.

Texts are essential books recommended for purchase.

References are books relevant to the subject or topic which, however, need not be purchased.

LIST OF APPROVED SUBJECTS REFERRED TO IN HONOURS DEGREES IN THE FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS

Entry to an Honours degree requires a Credit or better average In appropriate 300 level subjects: see prerequisite requirements for relevant subjects.


HONOURSDEGREEOFBACHELOROFAPPUED SCIENCE (ENVIRONMENTALASSE88MENT AND MANAGEMENT)

EAMMOI ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT 20cp

Prerequisites EAMS30 I. EAMS311. Forty credit points level 300 EAMS obtaining at least a Credit grade average

Assessment (a) Two major essays (b) Presentation by each student of two seminar topics (c) Satisfactory standard reached in a two hourwrttten examination at the end of the year

Content

Poltcy making in enVironmental assessment and management. administration in enVironmental management. federal and state enVironmental legislation. role of relevant government agencies and commissions. government poliCies and reports. national and international conventions. the roles of the United Nations EnVironment Program and the World Commission on Environment and Development. the professional practice of environmental management. procedures for consultancy. policy making in prtvate Industry. codes of ethics. the environmental audit. environmental rtskanalysts. trends In environmental management. the publtc consultation process. conflict resolution In environmental decision-making.

Text

To be advised

References

Australian Government 1991. DtscusstonPaperson Ecologically Sustainable Developmen~ Australtan Government PrInter. Canberra.

Carter. R. et al 1984, Systems Management and Change A Graphic Guide. Milton Keynes. Open University Press.

Checkland. P.B. 1981. Systems Thinking. Systems Practfce, WHey. Chichester.

Dorney. L.C. 1987. The ProJessional Practice oj Erwironmental Management, Sprtnger-Verlag.

Folke. C. and Kaberger. T (eds.) 1991. Unking the Natural Environment and the Economy EssaysJrom the Eco-Eco Group. Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht.

Section Eight Postgraduate Degr •• Subject Descriptions

World Commission on Environmental and Development (WCED) 1987. Our Common Future (The Brundtland Report). OUP. Oxford.

Journals

Journal of Environmental Management

Journal of Environmental Planning

The Environmentalist

EAMS402 SEMINAR SERIES

Corequlslte EAMS40 I

20cp

Assessment (a) Presentation of a WIitten paper based on each seminar topic 80% (h) Sattsfactory presentation of seminar topic 20%

Content

Attendance and participation at seminars with a wrttten paper to be presented. Additionally, the student will prepare and present a seminar on an approved topic "

References

To be provided

List of Seminar Topics

Water Resources Management in Australia

PIinclples and Practices of Wastewater Treatment and Disposal Procedures

Radiation In the Environment

EXotic Plants and Associated Problems

Endangered Animals In Australta

Ethics in EnVironmental Decision-Making

CurrentAgrtcultural Practices in Au,str'ali,. aJld II.al1,d Degradation.

,EAMS404 RESEARCH PROJECT

Corequlslte EAMS40 I

Assessment An Internal supervisor and an external examiner will assess the research project

Content

The project win describe research and findings ortginallnvestlgatlon approved by the supervisor

General

The project Is worth 50% -of the year's mark Honours. It must be prepared In standard

format, and include raw data, ~~~,,:u~':~:;::: diagrams of expertmental apparatus,

Faculty of Sc~nce and Mathematics

programs. in appendices. Three unbound copies are tobesubmittedtotheDepartmentofAppUedSclence and Technology by 30 October. These copies wt1l later be bound; one Is retained by the student's supervisor. one Is placed In the departmental Ubrary for future reference, and the third is returned to the student after final assessment has been made.

HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (AVIATION)

AVlA401 AVIATION HONOURS 401 20cp

Prerequisites B.Sc.(AvlaUon) with a Credit grade or betterlnAV1A308.AV1A31O. AV1A311 andAV1A314.

Hours 8 hours per week for the full year.

Examfnatton Progressive assessment based upon ,written reports. seminar presentations and ;·examtnation.

Content

~$tudents will present seminars which relate to their work In terms of a review of literature and

.~~~1~~'~:::';~. Attendance and participation is

AVIATION RESEARCH AND METHODOLOGY IOcp

AVlA314.

:-Q.ro,tte A VlA40 1.

6 hours per week for Semester 1.

Progressive assessment based on

:::~:;~o,p~.resentations. assignments and

statistical procedures such as frequency

• ~~~:~'~e~cro:ss-tabulations. correlations. t-tests, ~f. andslmpleANOVAsandregression

belnltroduce,d. Reviews and reports of research

n,::.~;:~:~~::; Also covered will be qualttattve i]l such as self-reports. observational and

research and historical research. Casequestionnaire construction and interview

O""n,." be covered.

TECHNOLOGY IN AVIATION IOcp

AVlA31O. AV1A312.

6 hours per week for Semester 1.

Progressive examination based on aSSignments and tests.

Section Eight Postgraduate Degr .. Subject Descriptions

Content

The subject is designed to permit wide Interpretatton and applicatton to the range of related topics covered In the BSc (Aviation). These topics Include aeronautical engineering. design. systems and flight operations such as flight planning. navigation and meteorology.

Texts and ReJerenoes

To be advised.

AVIA404 THE HUMAN VARIABLE IN AVIATION IOcp

Prerequisites AVlA221 and AV1A311.

Hours 6 hours per week for Semester 1.

bamlnation Progressive assessment based on seminars, aSSignments and examinations.

Content

This subject Is intended to permit a range of interpretations to enable students to make a study of an approved area In which the human Variable in aviation is the focus. Such a focus Includes ergonomics, aviation psychology. aviation medicine. Instruction and learning.


To be advised.

AVIA40& AVIATION HONOURS -THESIS 40cp

Prerequis(tes B.Sc.(Aviation) with a Credit grade average or better In AVlA308. AVlA31O. AVlA311 and AV1A314.

Corequlsltes A VlA40 I and either A VlA403 or AV1A404.

Hours 12 hours per week for the full year .

Examination The thesis will be assessed by two Examiners one of whom may be external.

Content

AVIA405 is half the Honours In Aviation. It consists of the development. conduct. analysis and reporting of a piece of original empirical research. The thesis (of about 75 pages) formally presents this research In conventional format.

Students are supervIsed by members of the Department of Aviation and are adVised to discuss possible projects well in advance with potenttal supervisors. Nominated topics are submitted to a meeting of the staff of the Department of AViation chatred by the Head of Department, for approval.

Faculty of Science and Mathematlca

HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE

BI0L407) BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES HONOURS 407 4~p

BI0L408) BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES HONOURS 408

Prerequisltes Completion of ordfnary degree reqUirements of the Bachelor of Environmental Science and permission of the Head of Department. 40 credit pOints Level 300 Siologyor other 300 Level subjects approved by Department. obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

Content

The Honours program extends over two semesters of full-time study or four semesters of part-time study and consists of

I) An original thesis limited to a 100 pages of text, embodying the results of a supervised research project (60%)

ti) A review essay (15%)

til) Two seminar presentations (15%)

Iv) A viva involving discussion of selected topics of general environmental Interest (l()l}b)

Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours should notify the Head of Department by 30th November In the year preceding Intake Into the Honours year.

CHEM407) CHEMISTRY HONOURS 407 CHEM408) CHEMISTRY HONOURS 408

46+ 40cp

Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree requirements of the Bachelor of Environmental SCience and permission of the Head of Department. 40 credit points Level 300 ChemistI)' or other 300 Level subjects approved by the Department, obtaining at least a Credit grade average. It will be expected that a student undertaking project work in a particular area will have completed thecorrespondtng Level 300 core subject at a minimum of a Credit grade. Students tntendlng to undertake the Honours program should notify the Head of Department of their intention by 1 November in their final undergraduate year and confirm this as soon as final examination results are known.

Content

The Honours program extends over two semesters or Its part-time equivalent and consists of

Sootlon Eight Postgraduate 0119"'. Subject Descriptions

I) a course of advanced lectures (approximately 50 hours) (30%)

ti) a readingUst In the main area of Interest (30%)

til) a supervised research project, the results of which are embodied in a thesis and presented as a semlnar (40%),

Emmfnatton Half each of the lecture course and the reading Itst will be examined at the end of semester one and the remainder at the end of the second semester. The thesis will be assessed by a committee ' of three (one of whom shall be the project supervisor) appointed by the Department. Part-time students will have their assessment spread accordingly Over two academic years.

Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours " should notify the Head of Department by 30th November in the year preceding intake tnto Honours year.

GEOO407) GEOGRAPHY HONOURS 407 GEOG408) GEOGRAPHY HONOURS 408

Prerequisites Completion of ordinary

requirements of the Bachelor of ~:~~:~:~:~ Science and permiSSion of the Head 0

40 credtt points Level 300 Geography or Level subjects approved by the Department, oblalnln at least a Credit grade average. The also the Head of the ability In research topic lies.

Content

The Honours program extends over two setne,sters~ full-time study or its part-time eqUivalent consists of

I) a thesis embodying the results of an investigation on a topic approved by the, Hea,di Department

it) coursework, consisting of reviews of progress in major subject areas of geo~ra1'h Each student will, under supervision. subject area for review, and present it seminar and as an essay.

Examination External and internal eJ<arelln;dl<," a research thesis. and Internal assessment of coursework.

Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to should notify the Head of Department by November In the year preceding intake into Honours year.

Faculty of Sctence and Mathematics

HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Bl0L401) HONOURS IN B10LQOICAL Bl0L402) SCIENCES 40t-4Ocp

Prerequisites 40 cp Level 300 SIOL (or other 300 level subjects approved by Department), obtaining

Jilt least a Credit grade average.

1Content

'11.e 110Ino'un. p:ro!p-am extends over two semesters of !'i;'U-tllme,.tudly or four semesters of part-time study

]lfi<1 consl"ts of:

Anortglnal thesis limited to a 100 pagesoftert, embodytng the results of a supervised research project (60%)

A review essay (15%)

Two seminar presentations (15%)

A viva involving discussion of selected topics of general blologlcallnterest (10%)

A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours notify the Head of Department by 30th

IVeml,." in the year preceding intake tnto the year.

:::;:~: HONOURS IN CHEMISTRY 40+4Ocp

Completion of ordinary degree ll;:~~:~~ and permission of the Head of ~ An average credit grade in at least four

chemlstly subjects is the normal minimum

~;:~~~~~{~ It will be expected that a student work in a particular area will

the corresponding Level 300 core a minimum of credit grade. Students undertake the Honours program should

Head of Department of their intention by In their final undergraduate year and

SOOn as final examination results are

~o,,011rs program extends over two semesters r-",lrt-tllme eqUivalent and consists of

COUrse of advanced lectures (approximately hours) (30%)

. reading list in the matn area of interest (300/0)

Section Eight Postgraduate Degree Subject Descriptions

til) a supervised research project, the results of which are embodied tn a thesis and presented as a semlnar (40%)

EKamlnatton Half each of the lecture course and the reading 11st Will be examined at the end of semester one and the remainder at the end of the second semester. The thesisw1l1 be assessed byacommittee of three (one of whom shall be the project supervisor) appointed by the Department. Part-time students will have their assessment spread accordingly over two academic years.

GEOGRAPHY

GEOG40I) HONOURS IN GEOGRAPHY 40t-4Ocp GE0G402)

Prerequisites GEOG 10 1 and GEOG 102 plus either GEOG201 and GEOG301 or GEOG202 and GEOG302 Including 30cp from 200 level and 40cp from 300 GEOG level obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

To qualifY for admission to Geography Honours. a student must normally have completed suffiCient training In geographical methods (I.e. GEOG20 1 and GEOG30 1 for PhYSical Geography; GEOG202 and GEOG302 for Human Geography), and have completed a Major in Geography that includes GEOG 10 I, GEOG 102, thlrtycredlt points from level 200 courses and forty credit potnts from level 300 courses. To proceed to Geography Honours a candidate must have obtained at least a Credit grade average in the 300 level Geography subjects taken for the major plus at least twenty other points at credit level tn their university courses. The student must also satisfy the Head of the Department of her / his ability in the area of study w1thln which the proposed research topic lies.

HOUTS 48 hours per week for two semesters.

EXamination External and Internal examination of a research thesis, and internal assessment of the coursework.

Content

The Honours program extends over two semesters of full-time study or Its part-time eqUivalent, and consists of

I) a thesis embodying the results of an original Investigation on a topic approved by the Head of Department


11) coursework. consisting of reviews of research progress In major subject areas of geography. Each student will. under supervision. select a subject area for review. and present It as a seminar and as an essay.

Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours should notlfY the Head of the Department by 1 October in the final year of the undergraduate degree and must confirm this as soon as final results for the year are known. Candidates are expected to commence work on their thesis after completion of their undergraduate degree.

GEOLOGY

GEOIAOI, HONOURS IN GEOLOGY 4Gt-40ep GE01A02,

Prerequisites 40cp Level 300 GEOL obtaInIng at least a Credit grade average. For GEOlA02. corequisite ofGEOlAO 1. completion of ordinary degree reqUirements.

Hours To be advised

Examination

(I) a viva voce examination

(til research work canied out and Its presentation in a thesis

(itt) seminars. assignments

Content

Part A

Lecture-tutorial work with directed reading in the following fields of geology: mineralogy and crystallography; geochemIstry; Igneous petrology; metamorphic petrology; coal petrology; sedimentology; stratigraphy. palaeontology; structural geology; economic geology; engineering geology. Presentation of a seminar.

Not all fields wtll be avatlable every year.

PartB

A research project. the results of which are to be embodied In a thesis. presentation of a seminar on the results of the research project.

PHYSICS

PHYS401, HONOURS IN PHYSICS PHYS402,

4Gt-40ep

Prerequisites PHYS30 I plus any other three PHYS300 subjects. It Is expected that the level 300 Physics

Soctlon Eight Postgradulte Degr .. Subject Descriptions

subjects wt11 have been passed at Credit level Or better.

HOUTS PHYS401 and PHYS402 together comprtse 115 hours oflectures plus a project.

ExamInatton as reqUIred.

Content

PHYS40 1 andPHYS402 are Intended to give studenta an advanced understanding of the fundamentals of

modem physics appropriate for an ~~~nt~~u~~!:~;~~ in the discipline as well as exposure to the Interests of the Department vtz. soUd state PhysI"s,l radar meteor physIcs. electromagnetic propagation and aspects of appUed physIcs.

These alms will be achieved by ofl.rln. compulsory core topiCS. Quantum M"d,anl1c. Theoretical Solid State Physics and Plasma and a number of optional topiCS. The Relattvtty, AppUed Nuclear Physics. Surface Space Physics. Atomic collisions In Solids. Physics. Fourier Transforms. Ionospheric Medtcal PhYSiCS and the Detection of Particles RadIation. Whtle not all of these topIcs may offered in anyone year. other optional aVailable dependtng on visitors to the .1.·n,rtn,.n

Texts

As required.

PSYCHOLOGY

PSYC4011 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS,

PSYC402' PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (THESIS,

PSYC401 PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 401 (SEMINARS,

PrerequisIte Acom'ple,te<lBJ\ 01 BSc 0" thre<' compl years of a BA(Psych, or BSc(Psych, IncludIng subjects PSYC 10 I and PSYC 102. at least 40 poInts of Psychology at the 200 level PSYC207, anil atle";~t 6() cn,dlt polntsofF'sycho! at the 300 level IncludIng PSYC30 I and Candtdates must have obtained at least a grade In each of four 300 level Psychology IncludIng PSYC30 I and PSYC302.


EXamination To be advtsed

Content


psYC401 comprises half of the final Honours In PsyChology. Full· time students enrol In PSYC402 as well. Part-time students complete PSYC401 In the finst year and PSYC402 In the second. PSYC40 I consists of five seminar series. including one compulsory unit on theoretical Issues in Psychology. fcholce of two unIts In mathemattcal or physIological "I!I~hology. and a choice of two units In applied or

Psychology. Each unit will Include seminars attendance and participation Is compulsory.

will be assessed by essay. examination. oral or a combination. The exact topics of vary from year to year dependtng on

One seminar may be replaced with There is

overlap wtth PSYC403.

PSYCHOLOGY HONOURS 402 (THESIS, 40ep

li'e<1""'Ue A completed SA or BSc. or three complete a BA(Psych, or BSc(Psych, Includtng the PSYCIOI and PSYCI02. at least 40 credtt

Psychology at the 200 level Includtng and at least 60 credtt pOints of Psychology level IncludIng PSYC30 I and PSYC302. must have obtained at least a Credit

each of four 300 level Psychology subjects PSYC30 I and PSYC302.

PSYC401

hu..tU;,n ThesIs wtll be assessed Independently supelVlsor and by another member. or

of the Department.

comprises half of the final Honours in Full-time students enrol in PSYC40 I as

'arlt-",~p students complete PSYC40 I in the PSYC402 In the second. PSYC402

,, __ ,.L. deVelopment. conduct. analysis. and of a piece of original empirical research. is a formal presentation of this research

In APA format. There Is a Umlt of fifty student Will be supervised by a member

~'chol(,1!V Department. Students are strongly II U>dtSCtlSS potenttal projects wtth approprtate ne,nbe ... well In advance. Involvement with

Section Eight Postgraduate Degree Subject Descriptions

external agenCies must be through offiCial departmental channels.


To be advtsed.

COMBINED HONOURS SUBJECTS

GEOIAOil HONOURS IN GEOLOGY MATH401, AND MATHEMATICS 4Gt-40ep

Prerequisites Completion of Ordinary Degree requirements at the appropriate level and permiSSion of the Heads of the Departments of Geology and Mathematics

Content

At least 40 credit points chosen from those avallable to Honours students in Mathematics together with work equal to 40 credit points at 400 Level offered by the Department of Geology. Geology 401 wtll also Include a major thesis which embodies the results of a field research project Involvtng the application of mathematical studies to a particular geological problem. Other work. as for example seminars and aSSignments, may be required by either Department.

MATH4011 HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS PSYC40Il AND PSYCHOLOGY 4Gt-40ep

Prerequisites See enlIy for each subject and consult the Head of both Departments.

HONOURS DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MATHEMATICS

MATIl401, HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS MATH402, 4Gt-4Oep

Prerequisites A major sequence of Mathematics subjects. IncludIng at least 40 credIt poInts at the 300 level obtaining at least a Credit grade average and favourable assessment by the Head of Department.

Hours At least 8 lecture hours per week over one full-time year or 4 lecture hours per week over two part-time years.

Examination At least eIght 2 hour final papers. and a study under direction of a special topic using relevant published material and presented in written form. Work on this thesis normally starts early In February.

Content

A selection of at least eight Mathematics topics. The topics offered may be from any branch ofMathemaUcs

Faeulty of Selenee and Math.matles

including Pure Mathematics. Applied Mathematics. Statistics. Computer Science and Operations Research as exemplified in the publication Mathematical Reviews. Summaries of some topics are given later tn this section of the Handbook. listed as "500 level subjects", but the Department should be consulted for further details, Including the current list of other topics which are not available as "500 level subjects" .

Students seeking admission to this subject should apply In writing to the Head of the Department before 20 December of the preceding year. A meeting will be held on the first 1\lesday of the first semester 10 room VI07 at l.OOp.m. to determine both the timetable for topics. and which topics wtll be covered.

HONOURS COURSE IN STATISTICS

This is a Level 400 course consisting of several coursework subjects and a project.

Prerequisite 40credtt points from Level 300 subjects offered by the Department of Statistics obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

Content

Students are reqUired to take subjects worth 40-60 credit potntsofwhtch at least three subjects must be chosen from Level 400 subjects offered by the Department of Statistics.

Students are also required to complete project work which can be worth 20. 30 or 40 credit points. to be determined by consultation with the Head of Department. The results of the project are to be presented tn a thesis. The project may be a practical one involving the analysIs of data. or a theoretical one. Work on the project normally starts early in February. Level 400 units which may be offered are:

Sub~ct Cp STAT401 PROBABlL1lY THEORY 10

STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA 10

STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVNAL ANALYSIS 10

STAT404 ROBUST REGRESSION AND SMOOTHING 10

STAT405 STATISTICAL CONSULTING 10

STAT406 METHODS FOR QUALllY IMPROVEMENT 10

STAT407 ADVANCED TOPICS IN STATISTICS 10

Section Eight

STAT408 PROJECT

STAT409 PROJECT

STAT410 PROJECT

STAT4ll PROJECT

Postgraduate Degree Sublec:t Deserlptlons

LEVEL 400 STATISTICS SUBJECTS

10

20

30

40

STAT401 PROBABDUTYTHEORY lOcp

Prerequisite Forty credit points Level 300 STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

This Is a rigorous course on the mathematical theoty of probability. presenting techniques and theoIY needed toestabltsh llmtt theorems. Theappitcations of such techniques are spread throughout the discipline of Statistics.

Topics covered include elementary measure theory. random variable. expectation. the characteristic function. modes of convergence. laws of large numbers. central limit theorems. law of the Iterateil logartthm.

References

Billingsley. P. 1970. ProbobUity and Measure. Wiley

Brelman. L. 1968. ProbobUity. Addison-Wesley

Chung. K.L. 1974. A Course in Probobatty 2nd edn. Academic Press

Dudley. RM. 1989. Real Analysis and Pr,>bo,bUi4h Wadsworth & Brook

Moran. P.A.P. 1968. 1984. An Introduction ProbobUity Theory. Oxford University Press

STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA

Prerequisite Forty credit points Level 300 subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade

The course will discuss the analysiS of categorl< data. It will begin with a thorough coverage tables before moving on to larger (r x c) c;;!~~~~ tables. Topics to be covered include models for categorical elata. measures of",,,,oclatic measures of agreement, the Mantel-Haenszel for combining tables. appltcattons of regression and logltnear models.

References

Agresti. A. 1990. Categortca1 Data Analysis.

Bishop. Y.M.M .. Feinberg. S.E. et al. 1975. Multivariate Analysis: Theory andPractice.

Feeulty of Selenee and Mathematles

Flelss. J.L. 1982. Statlstfcal Metlwdsjor Rates and Proportions. 2nd edn. Wiley

STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND.SURVIVAL ANALYSIS lOcp

Prerequisite Forty credit points Level 300 STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credlt grade average.

'ibIs course presents a mathematical treatment of the techniques used in population projections. manpower studies and the SUrvival models used tn demography and biostatistics.

Text

>Lawless. J. 1982. Statlstfcal Models and Metlwdsjor ,ft/fetlme Data. Wiley

D.R and Oakes. D. 1984. Analysis ojSurvtval Chapman & Hall

Ilanidt-JOIlhrcso'n. RC. and Johnson. N.L. 1980. Models and Data Analysis. Wiley

il~:;~~~ J.D. and Prentice. RL. 1980. The !a' Analysis oj FaUure TIme Data. Wiley

N. 1977. Applted MathematfcalDemography.

N. 1968. Introduction to the Mathematfcs oj ipulatlon, Addison-Wiley

J.H. 1975. Mathematfcal Models jor the qfHwnan Populations. Cambrtdge U.P.

ROBUST REGRESSION AND SMOOTHING lOcp

Forty credit points Level 300 STAT obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

main theme Is the use of the computer to fit data when the assumptions of traditional

may not be satisfied or when It is not known 'ad\'ane< what form of model is appropriate. 1ICS1 to Ib< covered include concepts of robustness.

and high breakdown estimation In linear scatterplot smoothers (e.g. ACE. LOESS

splines). kernel regression and methods for the amount of smoothing and radically approaches (e.g. CART and projection

RG. and Sheather. S.J. 1990. Robust and Testing. Wiley

Seellon Eight

References

Postgraduate Degre. Subjeet Deserlptlons

Eubank. R.L. 1988. Spl!ne Smoothing and Nonpwametrlc Regression. M.Dekker

Hampel. F.RRonchetti. E.M.et al.1986. Robust Statlstics: The Approach Based on Influence Functions. Wiley

HardIe. W. 1990. Applied Nonparametrlc Regression, Cambrtde U. P.

HardIe. W. 1991. Smoothing Techniques: With Implementation in S. Sprtnger

Rousseeuw. P.J. and Leroy. A.M. 1987. Robust RegreSSion and Outlier Detection

STAT405 STATISTICAL CONSULTING lOcp

PrereqUisite Forty credit points Level 300 STAT subjects obtaining at least a Credit grade average.

The aim of this course 1s to develop both the statisUcaJ and nonstatisUcal skills required for a successful consultant. The course includes a study of the consulting literature. a review of commonly-used statistical procedures. problem formulation and solving. analysis of data sets. report writing and oral presentation. role-playtngandconsultlngwtthactual clients.

STAT406 METHODS FOR QUALITY IMPROVEMENT IOcp


The course will cover the concepts of total quail ty management, the Deming philosophy and relevant statistical techniques. Simple methods such as flow charts and Pareto dlagramsw1l1 becovered in addition to the various types of control charts and process capability analysis. Modem experimental design techniques for optimizing process performance will be included. The course is a practical one and the issues involved in actualIy implementing a quality and productivity improvement program In an organisation will be addressed.

Course readings provided.

STAT407 ADVANCED TOPICS IN STATISTICS lOcp


This course consists offou rmodules that are selected from the following topics: MultiVariate methods; randomization, bootstrapping and other computer

Ii "

Il,i

Faculty of Sctence and Mathematics

Intensive methods; analysts of repeated measurements: sample size estimation. analysing large data sets; meta-analyses.

STAT408 PROJECT IOcp


STAT409 PROJECT 20cp


STAT4IO PROJECT 30cp


STATUI PROJECT 40cp


POSTGRADUATE AND HIGHER DEGREE SUBJECTS

GRADUATE DIPWMA IN SCIENCE

BIOIA06, BIOWGY DIPWMA 406 BIOIA06, BIOWGY DIPWMA 406 40+4Ocp

Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree reqUirements of the Bachelor of Science and permission of the Head of Department. 40 credit points Level 300 Biology or other 300 Level subjects approved by the Department.

A Graduate Diploma In Science In Biological Sciences is designed to develop those skills required for continuing self education and to develop the skills required1n the investigation of a topic in a particular area of biology. At the end of the Graduate Diploma program. a student should be profiCient at:

I) Investtgatlng a biological problem or phenomenon In an appropriate and productive manner

11) communicating the results of a scientific investigation In writing In an appropriate way

tit) communicating scientific information to a scientific audience

tv) obtaining information on a particular topic from a number of different sources and synthesising it into a coherent ovelView of the field.

To aChieve these aims the following tasks wtl1 be undertaken during the year:

Section Eight Postgradua .. Degree SubJect Description.

a) a research project or an Investigation which will involve studies in either a single or two different areas resulting In a report which wlll be presented as a thesis (60%)

b) a seminar to be presented at the end of the second semester in which detatls are given of the work undertaken on the project Or investigations (10%)

c) two essays (30%)

CHEM406) CHEMISTRY DIPWMA 406 CHEM406' CHEMISTRY DIPWMA 406 40+4Oep

CHEM406 CHEMISTRY DIPWMA 406

Prerequisftes Completion of ordinary degree reqUirements of the Bachelor of Science and penntssion of the Head of Department. 40 credit points Level 300 Chemistry.

candidates will choose eight topics from a list, details of which are avallable from the Department of Chemistry. Topics will be presented either as ten lecture courses with additional reading or as directed readings. Topic tittles are presented below but not all may be offered In a particular year:

Infrared and Raman Spectra; Natural Products Biosynthesis; Principles of Environmental Sampling: Automated Methods of Analysts; Technetium Chemistry; Electrochemical Techniques; PyrolyUc Methods and Organic Photochemistry; Gold Cluster Chemistry; Boron and Silicon In Organic SynthesIs: Laser Spectroscopy; Organic Structure Elucidation by NMR; Water and Waste ChemiStry; Solution Equillbrta; Polydentate Ligands and Coordination; Chemistry; Ionlcs; Physical Organic Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Sp,ectn)sclopYi.i Organosulfur Chemistry.

Assessment A one hourexamlnatlon inea,'hsel.ecl~ topic.

CHEM406 CHEMISTRY DIPWMA 406

Corequlslte CHEM405

A minor research project to be performed ,,",ne'r th supelVislon of a member of the academic Department of Chemistry. A topiC of interest to candidate w!ll be selected. Calnd.ld'ltel' alre Y'eque"te< to contact the Head of Department prior commencement to discuss a suitable project.

Assessment A minor thesis reporting on the project of not more than fifty typed, spaced A4 pages is the basis of assessment.

Faculty of ScJ.nce end Mathematics

addition candidates will be required to present results orally in a research seminar.

GEOG406, GEOGRAPHY DIPW~ 406 QEOG406) 4O+4Oep

Prerequisites Completion of ordinary degree reqUirements of the Bachelor of Science and permission of the Head of Department. 40 credit points Level 300 Geography. The student must also satisfY the Head ofthe Department of his/her ability In the area of study within which the proposed research topic lies.

Examination External and Internal examination of a research theSis and Internal assessment of the coursework.

Content

The Diploma program extends over two semesters of full-time study or Its part-time eqUivalent and consists of

1) a thesis embodying the resul ts of an original investigation on a topic approved by the Head of Department.

H) coursework consisting of reviews of research progress In major subject areas of geography. Each student will. under supeIVIslon. select a subject area for review and present It as a seminar and as an essay.

·Note A candidate who wishes to proceed to the ,'. DIploma should notifY the Head of Department by , . SO November In the year preceding intake Into the

DIploma year.

GEOWGY DIPWMA 406 GEOWGY DIPWMA 406 40+4Ocp

GEOLOGY DIPWMA 406

ij~::~:~~~~~ Completion of ordinary degree of the Bachelor of SCience and

of the Head of Department. 40 credit

~~:~~;v~.~ ~~. ~:~~~~'~~I~.h<:r :100 Level subjects U by the Department.

act, c,;nelldate will prepare a formal thesis proposal no longer than 6 typewritten pages. This will also be presented as a seminar. The

thesis proposal will be worth 45% and the 15% of the total mark for Geology 405. A

research assignment will consist of a 3000 'Jl"le"say on a topic of current scientific Interest In .. ""'cr, .. filed of earth science but not related to

Section Eight Postgraduate Degree Subject Description.

the thesis topic. The assignment will be presented as a seminar which will be worth 25% and the seminar 15% of the total mark for Geology 405.

GEOIA06 GEOLOGY DIPWMA 406

Corequlsite GEOIA05

A thesis based on the Investigations carried out by the candidate during the year In the selected field of research Is to be presented. It win be marked by at least two staff members and one external examiner Including a vive voce examination of the research project and togetherwtth Its oral presentation counts 50% towards the final mark.

PHYS406) PHYSICS DIPWMA 406 PHYS406, PHYSICS DIPWMA 406 40+4Ocp

Prerequisftes Completion of ordinary degree requirements of the Bachelor of Science and permission of the Head of Department. 40 credit points Level 300 PhysiCS.

Candidates will be required to complete a selectton of topics amounting to 100 lectures. Students must consult with the Head of Department about their subject choice before enrolling. Each student will also undertake a minor research project under the supeIVIsion of an academic member of staff in an area of joint interest and present a seminar on the outcomes.

Assessment By coursework (60%) and a project (40%).

GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

GE0G491 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES SEMINAR 1 20cp

This course examines the environmental planning system in NSW and the rationale and methodology of Impact assessment as an enVironmental management tool. The second semester Involves an Introduction to environmental assessment. management and decision making using specific examples from the Hunter Region. such as waste management. total catchment management and recreational management.

GE0G492 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES MINOR PROJECT lOcp

One semester length project under individual supervision required for the Diploma In


Environmental Studies. The topiC is determined by the student's Interest and background.

GE0G591 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDlES MAJOR PROJECT I 30cp

One-half of the project under individual supervision required for the Master of Environmental Studies. Simultaneous enrolment wtth GEOG592 reqUired for full-time students. Part-time students may take GEOG591 and GEOG592 in separate years. The topic is determined by the student's interest and background.

GEOG592 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDlES MAJOR PROJECT II 30cp

One-half of the project under individual supervision required for the Master of Environmental Studies. Simultaneous enrolment with GEOG592 required for full-time students. Part-time students may take GEOG591 and GEOG592 in separate years. The topic Is determined by the student's interest and background.

GEOG594 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDlES SEMINAR 2 20cp

Prerequisite GEOG491

Extends the evaluation of environmental Impact assessment, planning, management and decision making from GEOG491. The second semester Is devoted to group development and application of a confltctresolutlon model. with a formal presentaUon of the results to the Board of Environmental Studies.

GEOG595 DIRECTED ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY I lOcp

Directed research and reading courses under Individual supetvlsion for students with specific interests or needs In the area of Environmental Studies.

GEOG596 DIRECTED ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY 2 lOcp

Directed research and reading courses under Individual supetvlsion for students with specific interests or needs in the area of Environmental Studies.

Secllon Elghl Postgraduate Degre. Subject Descriptions

MASTER OF SCIENTIC STUDlES

AppUed Science and Technology

ASTK695 FOllNDATIONS OF APPLIED SCmNCE AND TECHNOLOGY 40cp

Prerequisite An approved degree contalning subjects in Applied Science and Technology.

This subject provides the foundation for further studies In two broad areas of Applied Science and Technology; product research and development and manufactUring systems.

The subject Is presented as a series of strands or topics from which students wtll select 40 credit points of studies appropriate to their area of specialisation In Applied Science and Technology. In order to pass ASTK695 Foundations of Applied Science and Technology, students must pass each of the strands making up the forty credit points of

work. Depending on the avatlabl11ty of staff. not all strands may be offered In a year. Students must consult with the Head of the Department tn making their selection of strands.

In order to pass ASTK695 Foundations of Applied Science and Technology. students must pass each of the strands making uRthe forty credit points of, work. Assessment Based on Project work (70%) Examinations (30%).

ASTK696 TOPICS IN APPLIED SCmNCE AND TECHNOLOGY

Prerequisite An in Applied Science and Technology.

In this subject. students select strands of

from selected areas o)ff~~A~P~p~:I!i,e:'d~Si~~~~:~;U:~~: Technology. The selection 0

with the Head of Department so as to student to specialise tn a selected area of Science and Technology.

Depending on the

may be offered In ayear. S~'~~~~~~:;,~~s~~~'~:~~:; the Head of the Department in of strands. Students may also take further strands offered by the Faculty of Science Mathematics.

In order to pass ASTK696 Topics in Applied and Technology, students must pass strands making up the forty credit points


Assessment Based on Project work (70%) and Examinations (30%).

JdlTK697 ADVANCED TOPICS IN APPLIED SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 40cp

f::::::~~Based on Project work (70%) and 1,·1 (30%).

PROJECT 40cp

'~~::~~~ ASTK697 Advanced Topics in Applied ;S and Technology

subject the student will participate tn a reseru-ch or industry based project. The project wtIl

supeIV1sed by an academic member of the The project will focus on product

and development or manufacturing <cllne,lo!lY appropriate to the students selected

of specialisation.

Based on a seminar and wrttten report investigation. The report should be less than

pages of typed, double-spaced A4 pages.

SCmNCES

FOUNDATIONS OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES 40cp

credit points of undergraduate subjects are so as to upgrade and augment the studenfs

knowledge In the chosen area of ect,.li''''tion. If appropriate, these subjects maybe

from outside BlOL subjects.

Socllon Elghl Postgraduate Degr •• Subject Descriptions

BI0I.696 TOPICS IN BIOLOGICAL 8CmNCES 40cp

Forty credit points of the followtng selected topics can be chosen. Each topic can be taken at a ten credit point or a twenty credit point level:

Antmal Development Antmal Physiology BiochemiStry Cell Biology Ecology Environmental Biology Genetics

Immunology Microbiology Molecular Biology Plant Development Plant Physiology Plant Molecular Biology

Assessment Topics will be examined by essays, seminar and reports.

BI01.697 ADVANCED TOPICS IN BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES 40cp

Literature search and reading lists in the area of specialisation in which there has been the appropriate preparation in 8101..695 and 8101..696.

Assessment Examination will be by oral presentation and formal wrttten material. It is expected for this subject that a teaching or technical promotional display (e.g. posters, video. computer disc) wtll result

BIOI.69S PROJECT 40cp

The student wtll undertake a supeIVised program to enable exposure to the research process. The results will be embodied in a (onnal report.

CHEMISTRY

CHEM695 FOUNDATIONS OF CHEMISTRY 40cp

Prerequisite Approved three year degree with at least first year University ChemistIy.

This subject contains a number of modem topics drawn from a wide area of Chemistry. Students must choose eight topics. Programs will be tailored to the needs and background of individual studen ts. Depending on staff availabUity, not all1tsted topics may be offered In anyone year and some are not aVailable for part-time (evening) study. The topics listed havedifferentdegreeofindtvidual prerequisites. Each topic involves ten to twelve lectures or directed reading and In some cases associated tutorials. Details of each topiC are available on request. Students must consultwtth the Head of Department as regards subject choice and avatlabll!ty before enrolling.

Faculty of Science and Mathamatici

u.t of Topic.

Name Cp

Nuclear Magnetic Resonance 5

Physical Organic Chemistry 5

Organosulfur Chemistry 5

Ionic Solutions 5

coordination Chemfstry 5

Solution Equtllbrfa 5

Water and Waste Chemistry 5

Organic Structure Elucidation

byNMR 5

Laser Spectroscopy 5

Chemometrics 5

Industrial Chemical Analysis 5

Environmental Trace Analysts 5

Cluster Chemistry 5

Blolnorganlc Coordination

Chemfstry 5

Organic Reaction Mechanisms 5

Electrochemical Solar Energy 5

Molecular Spectroscopy 5

Heterocyclfc Chemistry 5

Identification of Natural compounds 5

Organic Spectroscopy 5

Computational Chemistry 5

Industrial Metal Chemistry 5

Industrial OrganiC Chemistry 5

OrganiC AnalysIs 5

Electrochemical Technology 5

SoUd-state Chemistry 5

Photochemistry I Solar Energy 5

Polymer Chemistry 5

Key to Prerequisites

1. Bachelors Degree with Major In Chemistry

Section Eight

Semester

1

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

2 2

2

2

2

2

2

lor 2

lor 2

lor 2

lor 2

lor 2

lor 2

lor 2

lor 2

2. Minimum of two years University Chemistry

3. At least first year University Mathematics

4. At least first year University Chemistry

Assessment One 1 hour examinatton tn each topiC.

postgraduate Degr •• SubJect DelcrlptJonl

Prerequisite

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2.3

2

2

2

2

2

2.3

2

2

2

2

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

FacUlty of Science and Mathematics

CBEM696 TOPICS IN CHEMISTRY 40cp

prerequisite ApproVed three year degree with at least firSt year UniVersity ChemiStry.

111is subject concentrates In part 'on the emerging and Important areas of environmental chemIStry

• ~~;~~:~~~~~:~~~c:hemIstry. Thecourseconsfsts ., 24 oftutorfalsand 72 hours ,oIlaboraltOlY vmrk spread over two semesters (2Ocp vaJue)andanequlvalentamountofdlrecledread1ngs

Full detaHs of the course content are \vaJilat,le IfrOln the ChemiStry Departroent. Students nu"tcclnSlult the Head of Department before enrolUng

define topiC selections.

1\vo 2 hour examinations (50% of and two literature reviews of

(500/0 of assessment).

lIEI1I6G.7 ADVANCED TOPICS IN CHEMISTRY 40cp

CHEM695 and CHEM696 or ~rrlablvely B.Sc (Hons) with a Chemistry major.

subject will consist of four topics chosen from . Each topic consists of directed readings

Idv,anc,ed and reviews In Inorganic. organiC ph:ysl1cal chemistry. Full detaUs of the course

are available from the Department of Students must consult the Head of

artm"nt regard1ng subject selection before

s.cUonElght Postgradua. Degree Subject Descriptions

\,

Uat of Topic.


_Ion Eight Postgraduate Degr •• Subject Descriptions

Name Cp Seme8ter Pre1'equlslte (for alII

10 lor 2 CHEM695 Inorganic Spectroscopy

X-Ray crystallography 10 lor 2 and

Inorganic Oxo Clusters IO lor 2 CHEM696

10 lor 2 or Medicinal Chemistry

Australian Natural Products 10 I or 2 B.Sc (Hons)

10 lor 2 In Organic Reactions

Photoelectron Spectroscopy 10 lor 2 Chemistry

Impedance Spectroscopy 10 lor 2

Assessment For each topic. a critical essay or ltterature review of no less than 5000 words.

CHEM698 PROJECT 40cp

Prerequisite CHEM695 and CHEM696 or alternatively B.Sc (Hons) with a Chemistry major.

A research project In an area of Interest to the student which will be undertaken with supervision by an academic member of the Department.

Assessment Minor thesis on the work of not more than forty typed, double spaced A4 pages to be presented at the end of the project and oral presentatton of the results In a research seminar.

ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND

MANAGEMENT

EAMS695 FOUNDATIONS OF ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT 40cp


EAMS698 TOPICS IN ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT 40cp


EAMS697 ADVANCED TOPICS IN ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT 40cp

Not offered tn 1994.

EAMS69S PROJECT


40cp

GEOGRAPHY

GE0G695 FOUNDATIONS OF GEOGRAPHY


GE0G696 TOPICS IN GEOGRAPHY


GE0G697 ADVANCED TOPICS IN GEOGRAPHY


GE0G698 PROJECT


GEOLOGY

GEOL695 FOUNDATIONS OF GEOLOGY

PrerequisUe as a major.

40Cp

40cp

40Cp

40Cp

Forty credit points of appropriate unde:rgrad1uatej subjects are chosen to upgrade the basic sdenol'l knowledge of the student In the chosen area spectallsation. With permission of the Head Department these subjects may be chosen subjects offered by other departments.

GE0L696 TOPICS IN GEOLOGY

Corequislte GEOL695

Students may choose topiCS from the list below. Each topic can be taken at a ten credit or twenty credit point level:


BasIn Analysis Thin-skinned tectonics SedImentology Low grade metamorphism and Stratigraphy Crustal Evolution Structural and metamorphlc Coal UtiUsation aspects of subduction

complex sequences Coal Geology Ore deposit geology Geochemistry Environmental Geology Carboniferous Stratigraphy and Palaeontology

Assessment Literature revtews (2500 words for a ten credit point topic. 5000 words for a twenty credit point topic) and a seminar.

GEOL697 ADVANCED TOPICS IN GEOLOGY 40cp


Students will be expected to Critically review a paper in an area of Interest, present a seminar on a topic provided by the supemsor and a 6000 word essay on one on the topics listed for GEOL696.

GEOL698 PROJECT 40cp

, The student will undertake a research project on an , area of interest under the supervision of a member of staff. The results of the project will be embodied In a thesis no more than 40 typed, double spaced

"pages and will also be presented as a seminar.

FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 40cp

~~;:!~:'A~,degree with a substantial amount of !II and approval of the Head of ;Ie~ .. ~tffi'ent of Mathematics.

iU~jects of a Mathematical nature totalling forty

~~~~:::::app""'edbytheHeadOfDepartment

TOPICS IN MATHEMATICS 40cp

_quu,lte MATH695

of a Mathematical nature totalling forty

~~~~~~:~~ approved by the Head of Department

r,Al'Be'97 ADVANCED TOPICS IN MATHEMATICS 40cp

MATH696

of a Mathematical nature totalling forty

:I~;~~::~ approved by the Head of Department

Section Eight Postgraduate Degr .. Subject Description.

MATH698 PROJECT

Prerequisite MA TH696

40cp

Work under the guidance ofa supervisor appointed by the Head of Department of Mathematics. A WJitten report on the work must be presented by the student

PHYSICS

PHYS695 FOUNDATIONS OF PHYSICS 40cp

Prerequisite An approved three year degree with at least twenty credit points of 200 Level physics.

Forty credit points of undergraduate offerings, consistent with the students background and proposed area of speclaUsation. to be approved by the Head of Department.

Assessment By written examination plus some progressive assessment.

PHYS696 TOPICS IN PHYSICS 40cp

Prerequisite An approved three year degree with at least twenty credit points of 200 Level physIcs.

Forty credit points (or approximately 100 lecture hours) chosen from the current list of Physics 300 and Physics 400 lecture topiCS, but excluding and Physics 300 topics already Included In PHYS695, and subject to approval by the Head of Department.

Assessment By [onnal examination of each course plus assignment work.

PHYS697 ADVANCED TOPICS IN PHYSICS 40cp

Prerequisite PHYS695 and PHYS696 or a B.Sc. (Hons) in Physics.

A Uterature search. extensive reading and a critical revtewoffour topics relevant to the students chosen area of specialisation as developed In PHYS695 and PHYS696. These topiCS should be decided upon In consultation with the Head of Department and. If appropIiate, the candidates project supervisor.

Assessment Via an essay of5000 words and an oral examination on each topiC.

PHYS69S PROJECT 40cp

PrerequisItePHYS695andPHYS6960raB.Sc.(Hons) In PhYSiCS.

A substantial research project under the supervision of an academic memberofthe department in an area of joint Interest.

Faculty of ScJence end Mathematics

Assessment The submission of a minor thesis and oral presentation of the results.

PSYCHOLOGY

PSYC6!16 FOllNDATIONS OF PSYCHOLOGY


PSYC696 TOPICS IN PSyCHOLOGY


40cp

40cp

PSYC697 ADVANCED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 40cP


PSYC698 PROJECT


STATISTICS

STAT695 FOUNDATIONS OF STATISTICS

40cp

40cp

Consists offourSTAT300 level subjects approved by the Head of Department of Statistics.

STAT698 TOPICS IN STATISTICS 40cp

Consists of four STAT400 level subjects (plus additional work as required) approved by the Head of Department of Statistics.

STAT697 ADVANCED TOPICS IN STATISTICS 40cp

Consists of four STAT400 level subjects (plus additional work as required) approved by the Head of Department of Statistics.

STAT698 PROJECT 40cp

Forty credit poln ts undertaken after liaison with the Head of Department of Statistics.

Soc.lonElgh. Postgradua" Degr •• Subject Descriptions

MATHEMATICS POSTGRADUATE AND HIGHER DEGREE SUBJECTS IN MATHEMATICS

Note A meeting will be held on the first Tuesday of the ftrstand second semesters in Room VI07at 1.00 pm to determine both which of the subjects are to be offered durtng the year. and the timetable for these

subjects.

MATH501 ASTROPHYSICAL APPLICATIONS OF MAGNETO HYDRODYNAMICS lOcp

Prerequisites Background In Calculus and Partial Differential Equations.

HoLUs About 27 lecture hours - Full Year.


Content The normal state of matter in the universe is that of a plasma. or ionized gas. penneated by magnetic fields. Moreover. these fields (unlike that of the earth) may be dominant. or at least Significant. In controlltng the structure of the region. The aim of thlscourse is to Investigate the effects of astrophysical magnetic fields.

References Chandrasekhar. S. 1961. HydrodynamiC and Hydromagnetic StabUlty. Oxford.

Cowling. T.G. 1957. Magnetohydrodynamfcs~

lntersctence. DeJong. T. & Maeder.A.(eds) 1977 • Star Formati0"t .

D. Reidel. Mestel. L. 1975. Effects oj Magnetic Mem.Sc.Roy.ScI. Liege (6) 8 79.

Moffatt. H.K. 1978. Magnetic Field GeneratJDn ElectTically conducting fluids. CUP.

Spiegel. E.A. & Zahn. J.P.(eds) 1976. problems. Stellar Convection. Springer.

MATH502 BANACH ALGEBRA

Corequlslte MATH3iO. Hours About 27 hours - Full Year.

Examirtation One 2 hour paper.

Content A Banach A1gebm Is a"ru'themlaucalstruclt~r~.~~~ the two main strands of pure mathematical the topolOgical and the algebraic - are

Faculty of Science end Math.metlc.

fruitful contact. The course will cover the follOwing subject matter. Normed a1gebras; regular and singular elements; the spectrum of an element and its properties; the Gelfand-Mazur theorem; topological divisors of zero; the spectral radius and spectral mapping theorem for polynomials; Ideals and max1mal Ideals. Commu taUve Banach algebras; the Gelfand theol)' and the Gelfand representation theorem. Weak topologies. the Banach-Alaoglu theorem. the Gelfand topology. Involutions In Banach algebras; hermitfan involutions; the GelfandNaimark representation theorem for commutive B* algebras. Numetical range of an element In a normed algebra; relation of the numerical range to the spectrum; B* algebras are symmetric. discussion of the Gelfand-Natmark representation theorem for B* algebras. Applications of Banach algebra theol)'.

Text

. Zelazko. W. 1973. BanachAlgebras. Elsevier.

:,~~~,:~:'G.'!<Nlarlicl.L.1966.FunctionalAnalYSIs.

,~~~~~~F.F. & Duncan. J. 1973. Complete Normed Ii Springer.

,.,~~::~F~.F~. & Duncan.J. 1970. Numerical Ranges ,1 on Normed Spaces and Elements of

AI.~",bl·as. Cambridge.

~alJmark. M.A. 1959. Normed Rings. Noordhoff.

C.E. 1960. General Theory oj Banach ~lg"b"as. Van Nostrand.

W. 1973. Functional Analysis. McGraw-HUI.

!lmmo:ns. G.F. 1963. Introduction to 1bpology and Analysis. McGraw· Hill.

r!lwlsky. A. 1964. I'UnctionalAnalysls. Blaisdell.

CONVEX ANALYSIS

ll1'equlsite MATH31O.

About 27 lecture hours - Full Year.

ran;iIru!tion One 2 hour paper.

lOcp

mV'exlltv has become an increasingly Important analysts: much of current research In

'~:~:~.I ;::~~::~concerns generaUsfng to convex \~ prev1ouslystudlesforthenorm;

Int.e ... ,.!ln convexity has arisen from areas mathematics related to fixed point theory

optimisation problems. We begin with a study

Section Eight Postgradu ... Degr.. Subject o..crlptlona

of convex sets and functions defined on Unear spaces: gauges of convex sets. separation properties. We then study topology on linear spaces generated by convex sets: metrfsabUity. normabUity and finite dimensional cases. We examine continuity and separation for locally convex spaces, continuity for convexity properties and Banach-Alaoglu Theorem. We study extreme points of convex sets. the KreinMilman theorem. We give particular attention to the studyofdifferentiatlonofconvexfunctlonsonnormed Ii near spaces: Gateaux and Frechet derivative. MazUr's and Asplund's theorems.

Text

GUes. J.R 1982. Convex Analysis with Application (n the D{[[erentfatfon. of Convex Functions. Pitman.

References

Barbu. V. & Precupanu. T. 1978. Convextty and Optimization in Banach Spaces. SIJthoff & Noordhoff .

Clarke. F.H. 1983. Optlmlzation and non·smooth analysis. Wiley.

Day. M.M. 1973. Normed Linear Spaces. Springer.

Dlestel. J. 1975. Geometry qf Banach Spaoes -Selected 1bpics Springer.

Ekeland.l. & Ternan. R. 1976. ConvexAnalyslsand Variational Problems. North Holland.

Giles. J.R. 1978. Analysis oJNormed Linear Spaces. Unlv. of Newcastle.

Holmes. RB. 1975. GeometTic I'Unctional Analysis and Its Applications. Springer.

Roberts. A.W. & Varberg. D.E. 1970. Convex Functions. Academfc.

Rockafeller. RT. 1970. ConvexAnalysls. PrInceton.

Rudin. W. 1973. Functional Analysis. McGraw-Hill.

Valentine. F.A. 1964. Convex Sets. McGraw-Hill.

Wllansky. A. 1964. Functional Analysis. Blaisdell.

MATH504 FWID STATISTICAL MECHANICS

HoLUS About 27 lecture hours - Full Year.


Content

lOcp

Cluster-diagrammatic expansions - low denSity solutions; Integrodlfferentlal equations (BGY. HNC. PYJ. high denSity solutions; quantum liqUids - WU· Feenburg fermion extension; numerical solution of integral equaUons: phase transitions -diagrammatic

F.culty of Science .nd .... th.m.tlc.

approach; critical phenomena; the liquid surface; Uquld metals; liquid crystals; molecular dynamics andMonteCarlocomputersimulatlon; trrevers1blltty; transport phenomena. Polymeric systems.

Text

Croxton. C.A. 1975. Introduction to LIquid State Physics. Wiley.

Reference

Croxton. C.A. 1974. LIquid State Physics - A Statistical Mechanical Introduction, Cambridge.

MATH505 FOUNDATIONS OF MODERN DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY lOcp

Prerequisite MATIl201. MATIl202 and MATH203.

Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full Year.


Content

This topic will Introduce basic concepts of the local theory of differentiable manifolds. Vector fields. differential forms. and their mapping. Frobenlus' theorem. Fundamental properties of Lie groups and Lie algebras. General linear group. Principle and associated fibre bundles. Connections. Bundle of Unear frames. affine connections. Curvature and torsion. Metric. geodesics. Riemannian manifolds.

References

Auslander. L. 1967. D(fferenttalGeometry. Harper& Row.

Chevalley. C. 1946. Theory oj LIe Groups. VoL I. Princeton.

Kobayashi. S. & Nomlzu. K. 1963. Foundations oj Differential Geometry. Vol. 1, Intersctence.

MATH506 HISTORY OF ANALYSIS TO AROUND 1900 IOcp

HolUs About 27 lecture hours - Full year.


Content

A course of lectures on the history of mathematics With emphasis on analysis. Other branches of mathematics will be referred to for putting the analysts Into context. Where feasible, use Will be made of Original material. in translation. The course will be assessed by essays and a final 2-hour examination.

Section Eight Postgradu.te Deg,.. Subject Descriptions

Topics to be covered Include: pre-Greek concepts of exactness and approximation; Greek concepts of continuity. Irratlonallty. Infinity. Infinitesimal. magnitude. ratio, proportion and their treatment in Elements V. XII and the works of Archimedes; developments of number systems and their eqUivalents; scholastic mathematics; vtrtual motion; Renaissance quadrature/cubature by lnftnitestma1s and by "geometry"; cartesian geometry; 17th and 18th century calculus; rigorization of analysts in the 19th century with stress on the developments of number systems, continUity, function concept, differentiability. Integrability.

ReJerences Usts will he presented during the course.

Students interested tn this or other topics on aspects of the History of Mathematics should approach thq lecturer concerned as soon as possible.

MATH507 LINEAR OPERATORS lOep. PrerequisItes MATIl310 and MATIl31 I.

Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full Year. '1 Emmlnation One 2 hour paper.

Content

This wtll usually be a chotce of one of the

Operator Theory: Linear operators on HUbert general Banach spaces will be studied. The wtll largely concentrate on spectral theory, particular for compact and compact operators.

References

Dunford. N. & Schwarts.J. 1950. Ur,en".CI""raW

Intersctence.

Taylor. A.E. & Lay. D.C. 1980. FUnctional Analysis. WHey.

The Geometric Theory of Banach Spaces: Contenls will Include: reflexivity. dualities convexity and smoothness. the external convex sets, basic sequences. sUIPerHexll renormtngs, the theory of'!'ype. and opw,torlq

References

Beauzamy. B. 1985. Introduction to Banach and their Geometry. North Holland.

Jameson.G.J.O.1974. Chapman and Hall.

The choice of Topic may vary from year to part based on student interests.


MATH50S MATHEMATICAL PHYSIOLOGY IOcp

Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year.


PhYSiology - the study of how the body works based on the knowledge of how It is constructed -essen t1ally dates from early in the seventeenth century when

. the EngUsh physicIan Harvey showed that hlood . clrculatesconstantlythrough thehody. The IntrusIon

Into this field Is well known through wide publicity given to (for example) heart by. and kidney dialysis machines, cardiac assist

and prosthetic devices such as hlp knee joints; the obviously beneficial union has to the establtshment of Bioengineering

wtthln Universities and Hospitals. l'e"haLps the earltest demonstration of mathematics'

application in (some areas of) phYSiology is mid-nineteenth century derivation by Hagen, the basic equations of continuum motion. of

?o~:~~;~~~~~~;P~~~~:~~~~~~:I~~~ flow through narrow it modelsofthecardJovascular have recently been developed.

~ltheml.tI'oal models have also been fonnulated for such as coughing. mictUrition and walking,

• W<,.asIO. the more vttal processes Involved in gas ,c~Lanlge tn the lungs, mass transport between

and blood and blood and tissue. metabolic

~::~::~~~wtthtn tissues. enzyme kinetics, Signal ~I along nerve fibres. sperm transport In eC"TV!x. Indeed. mathematical engineering might

said to be part of the conspiracy to produce humans (e.g. see "Fast Running Tracks" In

1978 issue of Scientific American).

course wfll examine in some detafl a few of the mathematical models; relevant

D.H. (ed.) 1972. Cardiovascular Fluid IVols I & III. Academic.

C.G .. Pedley. T.J. 1978. The Mechanics oJthe ""''''''on. Oxford.

~.tensen. H.N. 1975. Biological Transport, W.A.

.C. 1984. Biodynomlcs: Circulatton. Springer.

Y.C. 1981, Biomechanics: Mechanical oj LIving TIssues. Springer.

Section Eight Postgradua" Degree Subject Descriptions

Fung. Y.C .• Perrone. N. & Anllker. M. (eds.) 1972 Btomechantcs Its Foundations and Objectives' Prentice-Hall. •

Lightfoot. E.N. 1974. Transport Phenomena and LIving Systems. Wiley.

Margar1a. R 1976. Biomechanics and Energettcs of Muscular exerCise. Clarendon.

Pedley. T.J. 1980. The fluid MechaniCS oj Large Blood Vessels. cambridge.

West. J.B. (ed.) 1977. Bioengineering Aspects oJ/he Lung. Marcel Dekker.

MATH509 NONLINEAR OSCILLATIONS lOcp

Prerequisite MATIl304. MATIl205

Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year

&amtnation One 2 hour paper. Content

Physical problems often gtve rise to ordinary differential equations which have oscillatory solUtions. This course win be concerned with the . existence and stability ofpetiodlc solutions of such differential equations, and will cover the follOWing subjects; two-dimenSional autonomous systems. limit sets, and the POfncare-Bendtxson theorem. Brouwer's fixed point theorem and its use in finding periodic solutions. Non-critical linear systems and their perturbations. The method of averaging. Frequency locking. Jump phenomenon, and subharmonics. Bifurcation of periodic solutions. Attentlon will he paid to applications throughout the course.

References

Hale. J.K. 1969. Ordinary Differential Equations. Wiley.

Hirsch. M.W. & Smale. S. 1974. Differential Equattons. Dynomlcal Systems and Linear Algebra. Academic.

Marsden. J.E. & McCracken. M. 1976. The HopJ Bifurcation and its Applications. Springer.

Nayfeh. A.H. & Mook. D.T. 1979. Nonlinear OscUlations. Wiley.

Stoker. J.J. 1950. Nonlinear Vibrattons. Wiley.

MATH510 PERTURBATION THEORY IOcp

Prerequisites MATH201. 203. 304.


Faculty of Science and MIIthematlcs

Soctlon Eight Postgraduate Deg"'. Subjoct Descriptions


Content

Regu]arperturbation methods. Including parameter and coordinate perturbations. A discussion of the sources ofnonuniformfty in perturbation expansions. The method of strained coordinates and the methods of matched and compostte asymptotic expansions. The method of multiple scales.

References Bender. C.M. & Orszag. S.A. 1978. Advonced Mathel11D.tfcal Methodsfor Scientists and Engineers.

McGraw-HtIl. Bush. A. W. 1992. PerturbationMethodsfor Engineers ond Scientists. CRC.

Cole. J.D. 1968. PerturbatiDn Methods in Applied Mathel11D.tfcs. Blaisdell.

Hinch. E. J. 1991. PerturbatiDnMethods. Cambridge.

Nayfeh. A.H. 1981. lntroductiDn to PerturbatiDn Techniques. Wiley.

Nayfeh. A.H. 1970. PerturbatiDn Methods. Wiley.

Van Dyke. M. 1975. Perturbation Methods in Fluid Mechanics. Paraboltc.

MATHSII QUANTUM MECHANICS lOcp


Examlnation One 2 hour paper.

Content State vectors and operators in Dirac fonnalism. observables and measurement, Schrodlnger's equation, SchrOdinger and Heisenberg pictures, harmonic oscillator by ladder operators, angular momentum, symmetry, plus a selection of more specialised topics.

References

Sakurai. J.J. 1985. Modem Quantum Mechanics. Addison Wesley. Dirac, P.A.M 1958. The Principles of Quantum Mechanics, 4th edn,.Clarendon Press.

MATHS12 RADICALS It ANNIHILATORS lOcp

Prerequisite MATH312

Hours About 27 lecture hours - Fun year.


Content

ThIs topic will briefly outline the classical theol)' of finite dimensional algebras and the emergence of the concepts of radical. idempotence. ring. chain conditions. etc. Hopefully thus set In perspective, the next part wiU deal with the Artin-HopklnsJacobson ring theol)' and the signiflcance of other radicals when finiteness conditions are dropped. The relations between various radicals, noetherian rings. left and right annihilators and the GoldieSmall theorems will end the topiC.

References

Cohn. P. 1977. Algebra VoL 2. Wiley.

Dlvinsky. N. 1964. Rings ond Radicals. Allen-Unwin.

Herstein.I.N. 1968. Non-oommutat/ve Rings. WUey.

Kaplansky. I. 1969. Fields ond Rings. Chicago.

McCoy. N. 1965. The Theory of Rings . McM!llan.

MATHSl3 SYMMETRY lOop

Prerequisite Some knowledge of Linear Algebra.

HOlUS About 27 lecture hours - Full Year.

Examlrtation One 2 hour paper, and assessment

Content Thts course studies various aspects of symmetty. ~ Mattersdiscussed maytnclude: Invarlanceoflattlces;'· crystals and associated functions and equaUons~. permutation groups; finite geometries; regular and, strongly-regular graphs; designs; tactical. configurattons, "classical" simple groups, , . ' groups, representattons, characters.

References Biggs. N.Land White. A.T. 19·79.Per'IIWltatfDnGrc,U/14 ond Combinatortol Structures. Cambridge.

Carmichael. R.D. 1964. Groups of Finite Dover reprin t. HarriS. D.C. & Bertolucct. M.D. 1978. Symrl1e1 ond SpectrosCOpy. Oxford.

Rosen.J. 1975. Symmetry Discovered.

Shubnikov. A.V. & Koptsik. VA 1974. SurnmBI1JJ

Science and Art. Plenum Press.

WeyI. H. 1973. Symmetry. PrInceton.

White. A.T. 1973. Graphs. Groups ond North -Holland.

and other articles and books mentioned course.

Faculty of Scl.nce and Mathematrci

MATHSl4 VISCOUS FLOW THEORY IOcp

Prerequtsltes MATH 306. MATH305.


Examination One 2 hour paper, and assessment.

Content

Bastc equations. Some exact solutions of the NavierStokes equations. Approximate solutlons: theory of very slow motion, boundary layer theory. etc.

R~erences

Batchelor. G.K. 1967. An IntroductiDn to Fluid Dynamics. Cambridge.

Landau. L.D. & Lifshitz. E.M. 1959. Fluid Mechonics. . Pergamon.

lLangi·ois. W.E. 1964. Slow Viscous Flow. Macm!llan.

S.1. 1956. Vtscous Flow Theory VoLl. Van

~Ro' .. n:head. L. (ed.j 1963. LaminarBoundaryLa.yers.

~~~~~.I~;iil. H. 1968. Boundary Layer Theory.

R Navier-Stokes 1976.Equatlons-Theol)' Numerical Analysis. North Holland.

S GEOMETRICAL MECHANICS IOcp

~:::~I~ Companion Foundations of Modern i>i Geometry.

About 27 lecture hours - Full Year.

One 2 hour paper.

the simplest systems Lagrangian or lm1,ilt'on:lan fonnulations of mechanics are vastly

(albett equivalent) to Newton's equations. the course will introduce lagrangian and

~Jlt'>nllan formulations. and apply them to of particles with constraints and to rlgid

systems.

second part of the course will present the

~:~,!~:l:,~~~~ fonnulaUons ofLagrangtan and m mechanics. An ab intUo introduction to smooth vector fields and their flows,

forms. the tangent and cotangent bundles. ~lIilam mechanics will then be presented in l!lSofl10v.s <m the tangen t bundle of configuration

With Harntltonlan mechanics taking place on ~cotanlgel"t bundle.

Soctlon Eight Postgraduate Degree Subject Descriptions

If time (and student interest) permits topics that might be touched upon include: Hamllton-Jacobi theory. actton-angle variables, approximation methods, classical field theory, geometrical quantisatlon.

Rfifereru:::es

Annold. V.l. 1978. Geometrtcal methods ofClossical Mechanics. Springer.

Abraham. R . Marsden. J.E. 1978. Foundations qf MechanicS, Benjamin/Cummings.

Crampin. M .. Pirani. F.A.E. 1986. Applicable Differential Geometry. CUP.

(and others to be advised).

MATHSl8 CONCRETE GROUP THEORY IOcp

Prerequtsites MA TH211.


Examination One 2 hour paper. and assessment.

Content

A course on some aspects of group construction. which Will include discussion of: presentation of a group by generators and relations; presentation of a group as a group of pennutations. and as a symmetry group or structure-preserving group; relations between groups and some geometrical objects; representation of a group as a group of matrices; construction of groups in various ways from known groups; constructions preserving varietal and categOrical properties; construction of "generating" groups of certain classes.

References

Blggs.N.L.andWhite.A.T.1979.PermutatJonGroups and Combinatorial Structures. Cambridge.

Burrow. M. 1965. RepresentatiDn Theory of Ffnite Groups. Academic Press.

Coxeter, H.S.M. & Moser, W.O.J. 1957. Generators ond Relationsfor Discrete Groups. Springer.

FeU. W.J. 1969, Characters of F'lntte Groups. Benjamin.

Hall. Jr. M. 1962. The Theory of Groups. Macmillan.

Kurosh.A.G. 1960. The Theory of Groups Vo/s.I &11. Chelsea. Tr.& ed. K.A. Hirsch

and otherarttcles and books mentioned during the course.


MATH617 ANALYSIS OF TOPOLOGICAL STRUCTURES lOop

Prerequisites MA TH205.



Content

A topological space is the most basic structure for analysis study. We develop separation axioms. Including Urysohn's Lemma. countable base properties. product and quoUent toplogies, compactness and Tychonoffs Theorem. To link to metric spaces we outline the basic metrisation theorem.

We then study linear toplogies and their special properties. local bases and locally convex toplogles, the metrisation and normabtltty theorems. Gauges andPolars. The Hahn Banach Separation Proper~ies are developed. The theol)' Is applied to the study of weak topologies on Banach spaces, the BanachAlaoglu Theorem and Goldstine Theorems.

References

Giles, J.R. 1982, ConvexAnalysis wlthApplicatlonin the Differentiation of Convex Functions. Pitman.

Jameson,G.J.O.1974,TopoIogyandNonnedSpaces, Chapman & Hall.

Kelly, J.L. 1955, Generallopology, van Nostrand.

Kelly J.L. & Namloka, I. 1965, Linear Iopological spaces. van Nostrand.

Robertson, A.P. & W.J. 1964, Topological vector spaces, Cambridge.

Simons, G.F. 1963, Introduction to topology and modem analysis, McGraw-Hill.

Taylor, A.E. & Lay, D.C. 1980, Introduction 10 Functional Analysis, 2nd edn, Wiley.

Wilansky, A. 1978, Modem methods in topological vector spaces, McGraw-Htll.

Wilansky, A. 1964, Functional Analysis, Blaisdell.

Willard, S. 1970, General topology,Addlson-Wesley.

MATH6lS LIE GROUPS AND ALGEBRAS WITH APPLICATIONS TO DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS lOop

Prerequisite MA TH304.

Hours ApprOximately 27 lecture hours - Full Year.

Soollon Elghl Postgradua .. Degree Subject Descriptions


Content

Introduction to Ue groups. manifolds. vector fields and Ue algebras. Symmetly groups of differential equations, prolongations. group calculations and Integration. Group Invariant solutions, classification, quotient manifolds. Conservation laws and groups. Generalized symmetries and recursion operators.

MATH619 GENERAL RELATIVITY lOop

Hours Approximately 27 lecture hours - Full Year.

.&::amination One 2 hour paper.

Content

This topic presents an introduction to general relativity - the current theory of gravitation. The subject will be presented ustng methods of modem dilTerential geometl)'. Relativtty maybe [and will be) regarded as a special application of pseudoRiemannian geometry. where the manifold. here space· time, has a metric that is not positive definite,

Particles, fluids and electromagnetic fields will ~ introduced in to arbitrary space· times. It will then be shown how these sources of Mmatter" can genera~ the geometry of space-time via Einstein's fie14 equations. Applications of the theol)' will Includ~. Introductions to black .holes and to relativtsU6. cosmology. .:e\ Recommended Companion Foundations of ModeJ)f: Differential Geometry.

References

O'Neill, Barrett 1983, Semi-RietTllU11lian Geom.U with applications to Relativity, Academic.

Hawklng, S.W. & Ellis, G.F.R 1973, The LaJrQeS<1l

structure oj space-time, Cambridge.

Others to be advised.

MATH620 C' - ALGEBRAS

PrereqUisite Some background in re,.l aendl fune!\( analysiS Is reqUired.



Content

The object of the course is to explain the properties of C·-algebras, and to see some ways they arise in different areas of We aim to minimise the technical


requ1red,andtoassumeonlyaverybaslchackground in functional analysts.

We startwith a brleflook at the more general Banach algebras. where we discuss the bastc properties of the spectrum, and the Gelfand transform, which embeds a commutative Banach algebra tnan algebra of continuous functions. The Gelfand-Najmark theorem says that, when the algebra Is a C.-algebra, the Gelfand transform is an isomorphism. and we shall look at this theorem and Us applications in operator theory. We shaH then discuss representations of C·-algebras - roughly speaking, the ways of realiSing an abstract C·-algebra as an "'I~t'''d of operators on Hilbert space. There Is a

construction which shows this can always done - due to Gelfand, Nalmark and Segal- but shall focus on the way in which C·-algebras are

In the representation theory of groups and/or dyr.anlic,ol systems.

..., •• w.,y ,u .'~. 1985, A Course In FunctlonalAnalysis,

G.J. 1990, C'-algebras and Operator Academic Press.

ro:~~:~. J. 1987, lnoltatlon to C'-algebras and !lJ dynamics, World SCientific.

CLIFFORD ALGEBRAS ANDSPINORS

Approximately 27 hours - Full Year.

~1J1l11<lt"'n One 2 hour paper.

lOop

U""U L,,,,,uthe algebras that now bear his name ~netJical algebms". Thlsts becausethesealgebms

tailored to the geometry of an orthogonal Space. algebras are a vehicle for the study of the

orthogonal groups and their simply covers the Spin groups.

Section Eight Postgraduate Degrae Subject Descriptions

of the various Spin groups, the spinor representations, wtll be claSsified. Reference

Benn, I.M. and Tucker, R.W. 1988, An Introductton to Spinors and Geometry, Adam Hilge.

Others to be advised.

MATH622 INTRODUCTION TO CATEGORY THEORY


Hours About 27 lecture hours - Full year

EKarninatlon One 2 hour paper

Content

lOop

This course Is geared to an examination of the concept of "naturality" In mathematics. Categories and functors will be be Introduced as unifying concepts underlying much of mathematics. Some connections with. and applications to Computer Science will be explored. AdjOint functors will be discussed in some depth and Hlustrated by applicatfons to vaIious branches of mathematics, particularly group theol)'. The existence of adJotnt functors under certain condiUons and a monadic approach to untversal algebra wHl end the course. Text

Mac Lane, S. 1971, Categories Jor the Working Mathematician, Springer.

References

Arbtb, M. & Manes, E.G.Arrows 1975, Structures and Funclors: The Categorical Imperative, Academic.

Arblb, M. & Manes, E.G. 1986, A/gebraicApproaches to Program Semantics, Springer.

Barr, M. & Wells, C. 1990, Category Theory Jor Computing Science, Prentice Hall.

Walters, RF.C. 1991. Categories and Computer Science, Carslaw.

MATH623 GREEK MATHEMATICS AND ITS HISTORY lOop

Clifford algebras are useful examples of ""llallve lfnear algebras. They will be used as a

the study of such algebras. The course """uuc Wedderburn's structure theorem for

nhst""plle asSociative algebras and Frobenlus' real division algebras.


Assessment The course will be assessed by essays and seminars

tOl1lho>golnal and Spin groups will proVide concrete of Lie groups. Their representaUonswil1 be

In partlcularthelrreduclblerepresentatlons

Content

An tn-depth study of Greek mathematics from about 500BC to 5OOAD. There will be 27 lectures. In addfUon students will be expected to read. In

,

" " I

11


translation. substantial parts of original works and to interpret and comment upon those works verbally and m writing. LInks with the mathematics of other cultures will also be explored.

References

Presented during the course.

MATH524 DEVELOPMENT OF CONTEMPORARY ALGEBRA lOcp

Prerequisite MATH209 or MATH211

This course of 27 lectures will examine what mathematics can be considered Malgebra" and how it has developed from Babylonian Urnes to about 1930. It will concentrate on those streams which appear to have had a bearing on the present state of the subject rather than on interesting sideshoots. Considerable use will be made of source material (mostly In English translation).

Hows About 27 lecture hours - FuJI year.

Assessment The course will be assessed by essays and seminars.

MATH525 ADVANCED TOPIC IN ANALYSIS


Hours About 27 lecture hours - FuJI year.

Content

lOcp

This will usually be a choice of one of the following.

Fixed Point Theory and Applications: The basic theorems of Brouwer. Schauder-lYchonoff. Kakutant and Leray-Schauderdegree theorywtll be developed. extended and applied.

References

Smart. D.R. 1974. FixedPolntTheorems. Cambridge University Press.

Shashkln Yu. A. 1991. Fixed Points. Amer. Math. Soc./Math. Assoc. of Amer.

Representation theory: Representattons of groups and algebras by linear operators on Hilbert space. Classlflcation of the irreducible representations of certain groups.

Hewitt. E. and Ross. K.A. 1963. Abstract Hamwnlc Analysis. Springer-Verlag.

The choice of Topic may vary from year to year. in part based on student interests.

Secllon Elghl Postgradua" Degree Subject Description.

IlATH528 MODELS OF BIOLOGICAL PATTERN FORMATION lOcp

Prerequisites MATH20I. MATH202. MATH203. MATH213. MATH315.


EKaminat10n One 2 hour paper

Content

In 1952. Turing suggested that. under certain conditions. chemicals can react and diffuse tn such a manner as to produce steady state heterogeneous spatial patterns of chemical or Mmorphogen" concentration. This topic will discuss a number of models of pattern generation which lead to a system of reacUon-dlffuslon equations. These will be analyzed In detail and the conditions under which patterns are likely to occur will be characterized.

References

Murray.J.D. 1989. Mathematical Bfology. Springer.

Segel. LA 1984. ModeUfng Dynamic Phenomena in Molecular and CeUular BWlogy. Cambridge.

MATH527 COMBINATORICS

Prerequisite MA TH218

lOcp


Examination One 2 hour paper and assessment.

Content

Basic counting ideas. Generating functions. Po~ methods and extensions. EqUivalence of some Mc1asslcal numbers". Construction of some design. and codes and some recentcomblnatortal theorems,

References Include )

Llu. C.L. 1984. Introduction to Comblnatorl4l MathematicS. McGraw· Hill. 11

Krishnamurthy. V.1986. Comblnatorlcs: Appltcattons. Wiley.

Brualdl. R. 1977. Introductory Comblnatorlcs. Holland.

Bogart. K.P. 1983. Introductory Pitman.

Tucker. A. 1984. Applied Comblnatorlcs. wiley.,

Street. A.P. & Wallis. W.D. 1982. COInblnai"'*:SJ First Course. Charles Babbage Research

Faculty of ScJence and Mathematici

MATH528 ALGEBRAIC TOPOLOGY

Prerequisite MATH318 or equivalent lOcp

Hours About 27 lecture hours -!"ull year.

EKaminaUon One 2 hour paper. and assessment. Content

Fundamental group for graphs. complexes and topological spaces. Higher homotopy groups. Homology groups and applications.

References

Massey. W.S. 1967. Algebraic Topology: an introduction. Springer-Verlag.

Glblm. P.J. 1977.Graphs. Surfaces and Homology. Chapman and Hall.

IlATH529 DYNAMICAL SYSTEMS lOcp

Prerequisite Some Measure Theory or Topology e.g. MATIl311 or MATH318.



This Course is designed to introduce students to abstract dynamical systems by means of studying certain fundamental examples. The key systems we

Investigate are various measure-preserving

[~~:'!~:~;::: of groups and Markov Shifts on ~~ spaces. The underlying abstract system IIJl1fO~'es the action of a group (usually the integers)

a measure space.

Course will begin with a detailed study of the

"'~,::~~~~~;:::;;~~;::. deSCribing the orbits of these IP transformations. We shall

the notion of ergodlclty. and give the theorem of Birkhoff. with its various

~l>pUCl'tI(ms,. Then we shall develop the spectral of measure-preserving transformations. particular attention to the case when they

Finally, we shaH concentrate on on compact metric spaces.

this end. we shaH show that these systems have Invariant probability measure for which

system Is ergodic.

J. 1976. Ergodic Theory and Topological Yl1<lIltlcs. Academic Press.

Secllon Elghl Po,tgradue" Degr.e Subject De.crlptlon,

!'any. W. 1981. ToplcsinErgodlcTheory. Cambridge University Press.

Walters. P. 1982. An Introduction to Ergodic Theory. Springer-Verlag.

section nine

Subject Computer Numbers

Number Subject

LEVEL 100 SUBJECTS

EMGTIOI Foundations of Environmental Management

EMGTl02 Social Development and the Environment

ENVlO2 Environmental Values and Ethics

ENVlO3 Environmental Issues and Problems

AVIAI09 Introductory Meteorology

AVIAIIO Introductory Navigation

AVIAIII Introductory Aerodynamics

AVIAI12 Introductory Human Factors

AVIA II 3 Aircraft Performance & Systems

AVIAI14 Flight Rules & Procedures

AVIAI15 Reciprocating Engines

AVIAI16 Commercial Meteorology

AVIA II 7 Navigation

AVIA II 8 Aerodynamics

AVIAI19 Aviation Psychology & Medicine

AVIAI20 Aviation Law. Commercial Fltght Rules and Procedures

AVIAI21 Aircraft Systems & Propulsion

AVIAI23 Aircraft Performance & Loading

BlOL 10 I Plant & Animal Biology

BlOLI02 Cell Biology. Genetics & Evolution

CHEMIOI Chemistry 10 I

CHEMI02 Chemistry 102

COMPIIO Introduction to Programming

Points

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

10

5

5

5

5

6,

Number

eOMPlll

eOMP1l2

eOMPI13

GEOGIOI

GEOGI02

GEOLIOI

GEOLlO2

INFO 10 I

MAQMI35

MAQMI36

MAQMI46

MAQMI47

MATH I II

MATH II 2

MATH 102

MATH 103

PHYSlll

PHYSI12

PHYS1l3

PHYS1l4

PSYCIOI

Faculty of Scle_ and Mathematici

Subject

Section Nne

Introductlon to Computer Science 1

Discrete Stt:uctures

Introduction to Artificial Intelligence

Introduction to PhYSical Geography

Introduction to Human Geography

The Environment

Earth Materials

Introduction to Information Systems

Mathematics IA

Mathematics 1 B

Foundation Studies in Elementary Mathematics Mathematics lEe

Mathematics III

Mathematics 112

Mathematics 102

Mathematics 103

Physics III

Physics 112

Physics 113

PhYsics 114

Psychology Introduction 1

Psychology Introduction 2

Introductory Statistics

Introductory Mathematical Statistics 200 SUBJEcTS

EAlI'iS!!O I Agricultural Systems

Industrial and Urban Systems

System Dynamics and Data AnalysIs I

System Dynamics and Data Analysis"

Environment and Human Values II

Development and Social Impact Assessment

Hydrology and Sons AnalYSis

Water Resources Management

Plant Systematics and Plant Ecology

Animal Systematics and Animal Ecology

Aviation Meteorology

Instrument Navigation

Long Range Navigation

SubJect Compute, Number.

Points

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

20

20

15

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

5

Number AVlA210

AVlA211

AVlA212

AVlA213

AVlA214

AVlA218

AVlA219

AVlA220

AVlA221

AVlA222

AVlA223

BlOL201

BlOL202

BIOL204

BlOL20S

BlOL206

BIOL207

I, BlOL208

CHEM211

CHEM221

CHEM23I

II CHEM241

CHEM2S1

CHEM261

COMP221

COMP222

COMP223

COMP224

COMP22S

GEOG201

GEOG202

GEOG203

GEOG204

GEOG207

GEOG208

GEOL211

GEOL212

GEOL213


suJdect Compressible Aerodynamics

Jet Engines

Human Factors

Alrcraft structures & Matenals

Jet Alrcraft Flight Planning

Advanced Aircraft Perfonnance

Section Nine

High Altitude Meteorology and Forecasting

Aircraft Fatigue Management Human Performance In Multi-Crew Operations

Management in Aviation

AviaUon Computing and Electronics

Biochemistry

Animal Physiology

Cell and Molecular Biology

Molecular Genetics

Plant Physiology

Ecology

Biochemisti)' 208

Analytical Chemisti)'

Inorganic Chemistry

OrganiC ChemiSti)'

Physical Chemistry

Applied Chemistry Not In 11194.

Environmental Chemistry

Comparative Programming LangUages

Theory of Computation

Analysis of Algorltbms

The Unix Operating System

Artificial Intelligence 2

Methods in Physical Geography

Methods In Human Geography

Biogeography & Climatology

Geomorphology of Australia

Population. culture & Resources

ClUes and Regions

Optical Mineralogy

Introductory Petrology Ancient Environments & Organisms


Point. S

S

10

5

10

S

S

S

S

S

S

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

S

10

10

Number

GEOL214

GEOL2IS

GEOL216

MAQM2l4

MAQM23S

MAQM236

MAQM237

MATI!201

MATI!202

MATI!203

MATI!204

MATI!20S

MATI!206

MATI!207

MATI!209

MATI!210

MATI!211

MATI!212

MATI!213

MATI!214

MATI!2IS

Focully 01 Science end Mathemltici

SUbject

Section NJne

Geological Structures & Resources

Geology Fiel!! Course 21S

Geology Field Course 216

Quantitatlve Methods Not In 11194.

Mathematics IIA

Mathematics lIB

Mathematics IIC

Multivartable calculus

Partial DlIferential Equations I

Ordinary Differential Equations 1

Real Analysis

Analysis of Metrtc Spaces

Complex AnalysiS I

Complex Analysis 2

Algebra

Geometry I

Group Theory

Discrete Mathematics

Mathematical Modelling

Mechanics

Operations Research

Numerical Analysis

Linear Algebra I

Linear Algebra 2

Scientific Knowledge and Scienunc Method Not In 11194.

Quantum MechaniCS & Electromagnetlsm

Mechanics & Thermal Physics

Solid State & Atomic Physics

Subject Computer Number.

Point.

10

10

5

10

20

10

10

S

S

S

S

5

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

10

10

10

10

Scientific Measurement Principles. Processes and Applicatlons 10

Basic Processes 10

Applied Topics In Psychology I Not In 11194. 10

Applied Topics In Psychology 2 Not In 11194. 10

Experimental Methodology 10

Psychobiology 10

Personamty and Social Processes 10

Developmental Psychology 10

Mathematical Statistics 10

Regression Analysis 10

Number

STAT205

STAT206

Faculty of SCience and Mathematic.

Subject

Engtneertng Statistics

s.cUon Nine

Design and Analysis of Experiments and Surveys


Points

10

10

lEVEL 300 SUBJECTS

EAMC313 Social Aspects of EnVironmental Health 10

EAMS301 Environmental Management I 10

EAMS302 Specialist Study 20

EAMS303 Occupational Hygiene and Toxicology 10

EAMS304 Regional and National Environmental Issues 10

EAMS311 Environmental Management II 10

EAMS314 Environmental Impact Assessment 10

EAMS390 Soil Conservation and Management 10

EAMS394 Flora and Fauna Component of Environmental Impact Assessment 10

AVIA305 Aircraft Design 5

AVIA306 Advanced Aircraft Operations 10

AVIA308 Aviation Instruction 10

AVIA310 Advanced Navigation 10

AVIA311 Advanced Aviation Instruction 10

AVIA312 Applied Aerodynamics 5

AVIA314 Directed Study 10

AVIA315 Advanced Aviation Management 5

AVIA316 Flight Deck Perfonnance 5

AVIA317 Aviation Climatology 5

AVIA318 Aircraft Stability and Control 5

AVIA320 Aviation Instruction Practicum I 5

AVIA32 I Aviation Instruction Practicum II 5

BIOL302 Reproductive Physiology 10

BIOL303 Environmental Plant PhYSiology Not lD 1994 10

BIOL305 Immunology 10

BIOL309 Molecular Biology 10

BIOL31O Microbiology 10

BIOL311 Environmental Biology 10

BIOL312 Animal Development Not In 1994 10

BIOL313 Cellular Biochemistry 10

BIOL314 Plant Development 10

BIOL315 Plant Molecular Biology 10

BIOL316 Cell Biology 10

CHEM311 Analytical Chemistry 10

CHEM312 Chemometrlcs 5

Number

CHEM313

CHEM3I4

CHEM32I

CHEM322

CHEM323

CHEM33I

CHEM332

CHEM333

CHEM334

CHEM335

CHEM34 I

CHEM342

CHEM343

CHEM36I

COMP32I

COMP322

COMP323

COMP324

COMP325

COMP326

COMP327

COMP328

COMP329

COMP330

COMP331

COMP332

GEOG301

GEOG302

GEOG304

GEOG305

GEOG306

10

11

Faculty of Science end Mathemltlc.

Subject

Industrial Chemical Analysis

Section NIne

Trace Analysis tn EnVironmental Systems Not lD 1_ Inorganic Chemistry

Metal-Metal Bonding in Cluster Chemistry

Biotnorganfc Co-ordinatlon Chemistry

Organic Chemistry

HeterocycUc Chemistry Not lD 1994 Organic Reaction Mechanism

Identification of Natural Compounds

Organic Spectroscopy

Physical Chemistry

Electrochemical Solar Energy Conversion Molecular Spectroscopy

Environmental Chemistry

Software Engineering and Project

Computer Vision and Robotics

Computational Logic

Parallel ProceSSing

Database Systems

Data Security

Principles of Operating Systems

Computer Networks

Compiler Design

Graphic User Interfaces

Geometric Data Structures

Computer Graphics

Advanced Methods in Physical Geography

Advanced Methods in Human Geography

The Biosphere and Conservation

Climatic Problems

Geography. of Australia: An Historical Perspective Society & Space

Directed Studies in Human Geography Hydrology

Production. Work & Territory

Directed Studies In Physical Geography

Igneous Petrology & Crustal Evolution

Metamorphic Petrology


Points

5

5

10

5

5

10

5

5

5

5

10

5

5

10

20

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Number

GEOL313

GEOL314

GEOL315

GEOL316

GEOL317

GEOL318

GEOL319

GEOL320

MAQM335

MAQM336

MAQM337

MATIl301

MATIl302

MATIl303

MATIl304

MATIl305

MATIl306

MATIl307

MATIl308

MATIl309

MATIl310

MATIl311

MATIl312

MATIl313

MATIl314

MATIl315

MATIl316

MATIl317

MATIl318

PHYS301

PHYS302

PHYS303

PHYS304

PHYS305

PSYC301

PSYC302

PSYC303

PSYC304

Faculty of Science Ind Mathematic.

SUJUect

SecUonNlne

Structural Geology & Geophysics

Stratigraphic Methods

Sedimentology

Geology of Fuels

Resource and Exploration Geology



Geology of Quaternary Environments

Mathematics IlIA

Mathematics IIIB

Mathematics IIIC

Logic & Set Theory

General Tensors & Relativity

Variational Methods and Integral Equations Not In 1994

Ordinary Differential Equations 2

Partial Differential Equations 2 Not In 1994

Fluid Mechanics Not In 1994

Quantum and Statistical Mechanics Not in 1994

Geometry 2

Comblnatorics Not In 1994

Functional Analysis

Measure Theoty & Integration

Algebra Not In 1994

Numerical Analysis [Theory)

Optimization

Mathematical Biology

Industrial Modelling

Number Theory

Topology Not In 1994

Mathematical Methods & Quantum Mechanics

Electromagnetism and ElectroniCS

Atomic. Molecular and Solid State Physics

Statistical Physics and Relativity

Nuclear Physics and Advanced Electromagnetism

Advanced Foundations for Psychology

Independent Project

Basic Processes 1

Basic Processes 2


Point.

10

10

10

10

10

5

5

10

20

15

15

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

lO

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

lO

Foeulty of Sclo_ s.cuon Nine Ind Mathel'ftltlc.

Number Subject PSYC305 Individual Processes Jlblnt.

PSYC306 Advanced Social Processes 10

PSYC307 Advanced ApPUed Topics In Psychology I 10

PSYC308 Advanced AppUed Topics In Psychology 2 10

PSYC309 Topics in Neural Science Not ill 1994 10

STAT301 Statistical Inference 10

STAT306 Study Design 10

STAT307 Generalized Linear Models 10

STAT308 TIme Series Analysis 10

STAT309 Total Quality Management 10

LEVEL 400 SllBJECTS 10

EAMS401 Environmental Management 20 EAMS402 Seminar Senes

EAMS404 20 Research Project

40 AVIA401 Aviation Honours 401 20 AVJA402 Aviation Research Methodology 10 AVJA403 Technology In Aviation 10 AVIA404 The Human Variable In Aviation 10 AVIA405 Aviation Honours - Thesis 40 BIOL401 Biology Honours 40 I 40 BIOL402 Biology Honours 402 40 BIOL405 Biology Diploma 405 40

BIOL406 Biology Diploma 406 40

BIOL407 Biology Honours 407 40

BIOL408 Biology Honours 408 40

CHEM401 Chemlstty Honours 401 40

CHEM402 Chemistry Honours 402 40

CHEM405 Chemistry Diploma 405 40

CHEM406 Chemistry DI ploma 406 40



GEOG401 Geography Honours 40 1 40

GEOG402 Geography Honours 402 40

GEOG405 Geography Diploma 405 40

GEOG406 Geography Diploma 406 40



GEOG49I Environmental Studies Seminar 1 20

Number

GE00492

GEOIAOI

GEOlA02

GEOlA05

GEOIA06

MAQM435

MAQM436

MAQM437

MATII401

MATII402

MATII405

MATII406

PHYS401

PHYS402

PHYS405

PHYS406

PSYC401

PSYC402

PSYC403

PSYC404

PSYC405

PSYC406

Faculty of Science end Math.metlca

Subject

SecUonNl""

Environmental Studles MInor Project

Geology Honours 401

Geology Honours 402

Geology DIploma 405

Geology DIploma 406

Mathematics IVA

Mathematics IVB

Mathematics IVC



Mathematics Diploma 405

Mathematics Dtploma 406

Physics Honours 401

Physics Honours 402

PhysIcs DIploma 405

PhysIcs DIploma 406


Psychology Honours 402

Psychology 403

Psychology 404

Psychology DIploma 405

Psychology DIploma 406

LEVEL 600 SUBJECTS

GEOG591 Environmental Studies Major Project I

GEOG592 EnVironmental Studles Major Project II

GE00594 Environmental Studies Seminar 2

GEOG595 Directed Environmental Study 1

GE00596 Directed Environmental Study 2

GEOLSOI Foundations of Postgraduate Geology I

GEOLS02 Foundations of Postgraduate Geology II

GEOLS03 Postgraduate Geology I

GEOL504 Postgraduate Geology II

MATIISOI Astrophysical Applications of Magnetohydrodynamlcs MATIIS02 Banach Algebra

MATIIS03 Convex Analysts MATIIS04 FluId Statistical MechanIcs

MATIIS05 Foundations of Modem Differential Geometry MATIIS06 HIstory of AnalysIs to Around 1900

Subl.ct Computer Numbtlrs

Points

10

40

40

40

40

10

10

10

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

40

30

SO

40

40

30

30

20

10

10

40

40

40

40

10

10

10

10

10

10

Number

MATIIS07

MATIIS08

MATIIS09

MATII510

MATII511

MATII512

MATII513

MATII514

MATII515

MATII516

MATII517

Faculty of Scl.nee and Math.metlcs

Subject

Linear Operators

Mathematical PhysIology

Nonlinear OscUlations

Perturbation Theory

Quantum Mechanics

Radicals and Annihilators

Symmetry

Viscous Flow Theory

Geometrical Mechanics

Concrete Group Theory

AnalysIs of Topologtcal Structures

s.ctlon NIne Subject Computer Numbers

Points

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10 MATII518 Lie Groups and Algebras wtth Applications to DUferentiai Equations 10 MATII519 General RelatiVity

10 MATII520 C·-Algebras

10 MATII52 1 Clifford Algebras and Spinors

10 MATII522 Introduction to Category Theory

10 MATII523 Greek Mathematics and its History

10 MATII524 Development of Contemporary Algebra 10 MATII525 Advanced Topic In AnalysIs

10 MATII526 Models of Biological Pattern Formation

10 MATII527 Combinatorics

10 MATII528 Algebraic

10 MATII529 Dynamical Systems

10 LEVEL 800 SUBJECTS

ASTK695 Foundations of Applied Science and Technology 40 ASTK696 TopIcs In Applted ScIence and Technology 40 ASTK697 Advanced Topics in Applted Science and Technology 40 ASTK698 Project

40 BIOL695 Foundations of Biological Sciences 40 BIOL696 Topics in Biological SCiences 40 BlOL697 Advanced Topics in Biological Sciences 40 BIOL698 Project

40 CHEM695 Foundations of Chemistry 40 CHEM696 Topics In Chemistry

40 CHEM697 Advanced Topics tn Chemistry

40 CHEM698 Project

40 EAMS695 Foundations of Environmental Assessment and

Management Not In 1994 40

Number

EAMS696

EAMS697

EAMS698

GEOG695

GEOG696

GEOG697

GEOG698

GEOL695

GEOL696

GEOL697

GEOL69B

MATIl695

MATIl696

MATIl697

MATIl69B

PHYS695

PHYS696

PHYS697

PHYS69B

PSYC695

PSYC696

PSYC697

PSYC69B

STAT695

STAT696

STAT697

STAT698


Subject

Section NI". Subject Computer Number.

Points

Topics In Environmental Assessment and Management Not ill 1994 40

Advanced Topics tn Environmental Assessment and Management Not In 1994 40

Project Not In 1994 40

Foundations of Geography Not In 1994 40

Topics In Geography Not In 1994 40

Advanced Topics In Geography Not In 1994 40


Foundations of Geology 40

Topics in Geology 40

Advanced Topics in Geology 40

Project 40

Foundations of Mathematics 40

Topics in Mathematics 40

Advanced Topics In Mathematics 40

Project 40

Foundations of Physics 40

Topics In Physics 40

Advanced Topics in Physics 40

Project 40

Foundattons of Psychology Not In 1994 40

Topics In Psychology Not In 1994 40

Advanced Topics in Psychology Not in 1994 40


Foundations of Statistics 40

Topics in Statistics 40

Advanced Topics In Statistics 40

Project 40

B The University of Newcastle Campus Layout

Aboriginal Education Centre - Wollotuka Academic Office Block Advanced Technology Centre Animal House Architecture Architecture Drawing Studios An Aviation Behavioural Sciences Building Biological Sciences Bowman BuUding SSC Building (Red Square) CAlT· (Centre for Advanced learning & Teaching) Ceramics Chancellery (Central Administration) Chemistry Building Child Care Centre· Klntalba Child Care Centre - Work Based

AE AOB ATC AN A ADS AT AV W B BB BSC CAlT

CE CH C CCK CCB

Child Care Centre· Wonnayb& CCW Commonwealth Bank CB Computing and Information Sciences CT Design Building D Drama Studios DS Drama Theatre DT Edwards Hall EH Engine9fing Administration EA Engineering Bulk Solids EG Engineering Chemical & Materials EB Engineering Civil & Surveying ED Engineering Classrooms EF Engineering Electrical & Computer EE Engineering Mechanical EC Engineering Science (D W George) ES Evatt House EV General Purpose BuUding GP Geology Building G Graduate Studios GS Great Hall GH Griffith Duncan Theatre H Hunter Building H Hunter Technology Centre HTe International House I

Lecture Theatre :9 Lecture Theatre :Basden Lecture Theatre :E Library - Auchmuty Library· Huxley Maintenance Workshop Mathematics Building McMullin Building Medical Sciences BuUding

B1 BA E L LH MW V MC MS

t

Physical Planning & Slores Building Physics Building Radio 2NUA FM Richardson Wing Security Science BuUding Srulplure Workshop Social Sciences Building Special Education Centre Sports Centre - Auchmury Sports Gymnasium - Hunter Sports Pavilion Staff House Temporary Office Buildings TUNAA TUNRA Annexe University Union - Hunter University Union - Shortland Visual ArtsIMedla Studies Wetlands Pavilion

SEA p V AW GH SB SW SIR SE SC GY SP SH TB AV TA UH US VA WP

Faculty of Science and Mathematics Faculty Handbook 1994 · Volume 2 -Volume 3 -Volume 4 -Volume 5...

Documents

Transcript of Faculty of Science and Mathematics Faculty Handbook 1994 · Volume 2 -Volume 3 -Volume 4 -Volume 5...